GE
AF-650 GPTM
General Purpose Drive
Programming Guide
The instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor to provide for every possible
contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be
desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, the
matter should be referred to the GE company.
AF-650 GP is a trademark of the General Electric Company.
GE
41 Woodford Avenue
Plainville, CT 06062
www.geelectrical.com/drives
130R0361
*MG34H302*
DET-618C
Contents
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
Contents
1 Introduction
4
1.1 Software Version
4
1.2 Approvals
4
1.3 Symbols
4
1.4 Definitions
4
1.4.1 Frequency Converter
4
1.4.2 Input
4
1.4.3 Motor
4
1.4.4 References
5
1.4.5 Miscellaneous
5
1.5 Safety
7
1.6 Electrical Wiring
9
1.6.1 Electrical Wiring - Control Cables
1.7 External Hand Off Auto Example
9
12
2 How to Program
13
2.1 The Keypad
13
2.1.1 The LCD-Display
14
2.1.2 Quick Transfer of Parameter Settings between Multiple Frequency Converters
16
2.1.3 Display Mode
16
2.1.4 Display Mode - Selection of Read-Outs
16
2.1.5 Parameter Set-Up
17
2.1.6 Quick Menu Key Functions
18
2.1.8 Main Menu Mode
20
2.1.9 Parameter Selection
20
2.1.10 Changing Data
20
2.1.11 Changing a Text Value
20
2.1.12 Changing
20
2.1.13 Infinitely Variable Change of Numeric Data Value
21
2.1.14 Value, Step-by-Step
21
2.1.15 Read-out and Programming of Indexed Parameters
21
2.1.16 Local Control Keys
21
2.1.17 Restoring Drive to Factory Settings
22
3 Parameter Descriptions
23
3.1 Parameter Selection
23
3.2 K-## Keypad Set-Up
24
3.3 F-## Parameter Data Set
32
3.4 E-## Digital In/Out
42
3.5 C-## Frequency Control Functions
53
DET-618C
1
Contents
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.6 P-## Motor Data
56
3.7 H-## High Perf Parameters
60
3.8 AN-## Analog In/Out
72
3.9 SP-## Special Functions
77
3.10 O-## Options/Comms
86
3.11 DN-## DeviceNet Fieldbus
93
3.12 PB-## Profibus
97
3.13 EN-## Ethernet
102
3.14 EC-## Feedback Option
106
3.15 RS-## Resolver Interface
108
3.17 ID-## Drive Information
108
3.18 DR-## Data Read-outs
113
3.19 LC-## Logic Controller
119
3.20 B-## Brakes
128
3.21 PI-## PID Controls
134
3.22 SF-# Special Functions
139
4 Parameter Lists
141
4.1 Parameter Options
2
141
4.1.1 Introduction
141
4.1.2 K-## Keypad Set-up
142
4.1.3 F-## Fundamental Parameters
142
4.1.4 E-## Digital In/Outs
144
4.1.5 C-## Frequency Control Functions
145
4.1.6 P-## Motor Data
145
4.1.7 H-## High Perf Parameters
146
4.1.8 AN-## Analog In / Out
148
4.1.9 SP-## Special Functions
149
4.1.10 O-## Options/Comms
150
4.1.11 DN-## DeviceNet
151
4.1.12 PB-## Profibus
152
4.1.13 EN-## Ethernet
153
4.1.14 EC-## Feedback Option
154
4.1.15 RS-## Resolver Interface
154
4.1.16 ID-## Drive Information
155
4.1.17 DR-## Data Readouts
156
4.1.18 LC-## Logic Controller
158
4.1.19 B-## Braking Functions
159
4.1.20 PI-## PID Controls
160
4.1.21 SF-# Special Functions
161
DET-618C
Contents
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
5 Troubleshooting
162
5.1 Status Messages
162
5.1.1 Warnings/Alarm Messages
Index
162
172
DET-618C
3
1 1
Introduction
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
1 Introduction
1.1 Software Version
Programming Guide
1.4 Definitions
1.4.1 Frequency Converter
Software version: 2.31
This Programming Guide can be used for all AF-650 GP
frequency converters with software version 2.31.
The software version number can be seen from ID-43 Software
Version.
Table 1.1 Software Version
1.2 Approvals
IDRIVE,MAX
Maximum output current.
IDRIVE,N
Rated output current supplied by the frequency converter.
UDRIVE,MAX
Maximum output voltage.
1.4.2 Input
Control command
Start and stop the connected motor by means of keypad
and digital inputs.
Functions are divided into two groups.
Functions in group 1 have higher priority than functions in
group 2.
Table 1.2 Approvals
Group 1
Reset, Coasting stop, Reset and Coasting stop,
Group 2
Start, Pulse start, Reversing, Start reversing, Jog
Quick-stop, DC braking, Stop and the [OFF] key.
and Freeze output
1.3 Symbols
1.4.3 Motor
The following symbols are used in this manual.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may
also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
CAUTION
Indicates a situation that may result in equipment or
property-damage-only accidents.
NOTE
Indicates highlighted information that should be regarded
with attention to avoid mistakes or operate equipment at
less than optimal performance.
Motor Running
Torque generated on output shaft and speed from zero
rpm to max. speed on motor.
fJOG
Motor frequency when the jog function is activated (via
digital terminals).
fM
Motor frequency.
fMAX
Maximum motor frequency.
fMIN
Minimum motor frequency.
fM,N
Rated motor frequency (nameplate data).
IM
Motor current (actual).
IM,N
Rated motor current (nameplate data).
nM,N
Rated motor speed (nameplate data).
4
DET-618C
Introduction
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
ns
Synchronous motor speed
ns =
Preset Reference
A defined preset reference to be set from -100% to +100%
of the reference range. Selection of eight preset references
via the digital terminals.
2 × par . F − 04 × 60 s
par . P − 01
nslip
Motor slip.
Pulse Reference
A pulse frequency signal transmitted to the digital inputs
(terminal 29 or 33).
PM,N
Rated motor power (nameplate data in kW or HP).
RefMAX
Determines the relationship between the reference input
at 100% full scale value (typically 10 V, 20 mA) and the
resulting reference. The maximum reference value set in
F-53 Maximum Reference.
TM,N
Rated torque (motor).
UM
Instantaneous motor voltage.
RefMIN
Determines the relationship between the reference input
at 0% value (typically 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA) and the resulting
reference. The minimum reference value set in
F-52 Minimum Reference.
UM,N
Rated motor voltage (nameplate data).
1.4.5 Miscellaneous
Analog Inputs
The analog inputs are used for controlling various
functions of the frequency converter.
There are two types of analog inputs:
Current input, 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA
Voltage input, -10 to +10 V DC.
Analog Outputs
The analog outputs can supply a signal of 0-20 mA, 4-20
mA.
Illustration 1.1 Break-away Torque
Break-away torque
ηDRIVE
The efficiency of the frequency converter is defined as the
ratio between the power output and the power input.
Auto tune
Auto tune algorithm determines the electrical parameters
for the connected motor at standstill.
CT Characteristics
Constant torque characteristics used for all applications
such as conveyor belts, displacement pumps and cranes.
Start-disable command
A stop command belonging to the group 1 control
commands - see this group.
Digital Inputs
The digital inputs can be used for controlling various
functions of the frequency converter.
Stop command
See Control commands.
Digital Outputs
The frequency converter features two Solid State outputs
that can supply a 24 V DC (max. 40 mA) signal.
1.4.4 References
DSP
Digital Signal Processor.
Advanced Vector Control
If compared with standard voltage/frequency ratio control,
(Adv. Vector Control) improves the dynamics and the
stability, both when the speed reference is changed and in
relation to the load torque.
Analog Reference
A signal transmitted to the analog inputs 53 or 54, can be
voltage or current.
Binary Reference
A signal transmitted to the serial communication port.
Electronic thermal overload
Electronic thermal overload is a thermal load calculation
based on present load and time. Its purpose is to estimate
the motor temperature.
Intermittent Duty Cycle
An intermittent duty rating refers to a sequence of duty
cycles. Each cycle consists of an on-load and an off-load
period. The operation can be either periodic duty or nonperiodic duty.
DET-618C
5
1 1
1 1
Introduction
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
Keypad
The keypad makes up a complete interface for control and
programming of the frequency converter. The keypad is
detachable and can be installed up to 3 m from the
frequency converter, i.e. in a front panel with the installation kit option.
Logic Controller (LC)
The LC is a sequence of user defined actions executed
when the associated user defined events are evaluated as
true by the Logic Controller. (Parameter group LC-##).
lsb
Least significant bit.
msb
Most significant bit.
MCM
Short for Mille Circular Mil, an American measuring unit for
cable cross-section. 1 MCM = 0.5067mm2.
Drive Standard Bus
Includes RS-485 bus with drive protocol or MC protocol.
See O-30 Protocol.
Thermistor
A temperature-dependent resistor placed where the
temperature is to be monitored (frequency converter or
motor).
Trip
A state entered in fault situations, e.g. if the frequency
converter is subject to an over-temperature or when the
frequency converter is protecting the motor, process or
mechanism. Restart is prevented until the cause of the
fault has disappeared and the trip state is cancelled by
activating reset or, in some cases, by being programmed
to reset automatically. Trip may not be used for personal
safety.
Process PID
The PID control maintains the desired speed, pressure,
temperature, etc. by adjusting the output frequency to
match the varying load.
Trip Locked
A state entered in fault situations when the frequency
converter is protecting itself and requiring physical
intervention, e.g. if the frequency converter is subject to a
short circuit on the output. A locked trip can only be
cancelled by cutting off mains, removing the cause of the
fault, and reconnecting the frequency converter. Restart is
prevented until the trip state is cancelled by activating
reset or, in some cases, by being programmed to reset
automatically. Trip may not be used for personal safety.
PCD
Process Control Data
VT Characteristics
Variable torque characteristics used for pumps and fans.
Power Cycle
Switch off the mains until display is dark – then turn
power on again.
60° AVM
Switching pattern called 60° Asynchronous Vector
Modulation (F-37 Adv. Switching Pattern).
Pulse Input/Incremental Encoder
An external, digital pulse transmitter used for feeding back
information on motor speed. The encoder is used in
applications where great accuracy in speed control is
required.
Power Factor
The power factor is the relation between I1 and IRMS.
On-line/Off-line Parameters
Changes to on-line parameters are activated immediately
after the data value is changed. Press [OK] to activate
changes to off-line parameters.
RCD
Residual Current Device.
3 x U x I RMS
I1
I 1 x cos ϕ1
=
since cosϕ1 = 1
I RMS
I RMS
The power factor indicates to which extent the frequency
converter imposes a load on the mains supply.
The lower the power factor, the higher the IRMS for the
same kW performance.
SFAVM
Switching pattern called Stator Flux oriented Asynchronous
Vector Modulation (F-37 Adv. Switching Pattern).
I RMS =
I 12 + I 52 + I 72 + .. + I n2
In addition, a high power factor indicates that the different
harmonic currents are low.
The frequency converters' built-in DC coils produce a high
power factor, which minimizes the imposed load on the
mains supply.
STW
Status Word
6
3 x U x I 1 cos ϕ
The power factor for 3-phase control:
=
Set-up
Save parameter settings in four Set-ups. Change between
the four parameter Set-ups and edit one Set-up, while
another Set-up is active.
Slip Compensation
The frequency converter compensates for the motor slip
by giving the frequency a supplement that follows the
measured motor load keeping the motor speed almost
constant.
Power factor =
DET-618C
Introduction
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
1 1
functions are not sufficient. In such cases the
mains supply must be disconnected.
1.5 Safety
2.
The motor may start while setting the
parameters. If this means that personal safety
may be compromised (e.g. personal injury caused
by contact with moving machine parts), motor
starting must be prevented by disconnection of
the motor connection.
3.
A motor that has been stopped with the mains
supply connected, may start if faults occur in the
electronics of the frequency converter, through
temporary overload or if a fault in the power
supply grid or motor connection is remedied. If
unintended start must be prevented for personal
safety reasons (e.g. risk of injury caused by
contact with moving machine parts), the normal
stop functions of the frequency converter are not
sufficient. In such cases the mains supply must be
disconnected.
4.
Control signals from, or internally within, the
frequency converter may in rare cases be
activated in error, be delayed or fail to occur
entirely. When used in situations where safety is
critical, e.g. when controlling the electromagnetic
brake function of a hoist application, these
control signals must not be relied on exclusively.
WARNING
The voltage of the frequency converter is dangerous
whenever connected to mains. Incorrect installation of the
motor, frequency converter or network may cause death,
serious personal injury or damage to the equipment.
Consequently, the instructions in this manual, as well as
national and local rules and safety regulations, must be
complied with.
Safety Regulations
1.
The mains supply to the frequency converter
must be disconnected whenever repair work is to
be carried out. Check that the mains supply has
been disconnected and that the necessary time
has elapsed before removing motor and mains
supply plugs.
2.
[Off] does not disconnect the mains supply and
consequently it must not be used as a safety
switch.
3.
The equipment must be properly earthed, the
user must be protected against supply voltage
and the motor must be protected against
overload in accordance with applicable national
and local regulations.
4.
The earth leakage current exceeds 3.5 mA.
5.
Protection against motor overload is not included
in the factory setting. If this function is desired,
set F-10 Electronic Overload to data value [4] Elec.
OL trip 1 or data value [3] Elec. OL warning 1.
6.
Do not remove the plugs for the motor and
mains supply while the frequency converter is
connected to mains. Check that the mains supply
has been disconnected and that the necessary
time has elapsed before removing motor and
mains plugs.
7.
The frequency converter has more voltage
sources than L1, L2 and L3, when load sharing
(linking of DC intermediate circuit) or external 24
V DC are installed. Check that all voltage sources
have been disconnected and that the necessary
time has elapsed before commencing repair work.
Warning against unintended start
1.
The motor can be brought to a stop by means of
digital commands, bus commands, references or
a local stop, while the frequency converter is
connected to mains. If personal safety considerations (e.g. risk of personal injury caused by
contact with moving machine parts following an
unintentional start) make it necessary to ensure
that no unintended start occurs, these stop
DET-618C
7
Introduction
1 1
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
NOTE
WARNING
High Voltage
Touching the electrical parts may be fatal - even after the
equipment has been disconnected from mains.
Also make sure that other voltage inputs have been
disconnected, such as external 24 V DC, load sharing
(linkage of DC intermediate circuit), as well as the motor
connection for kinetic back up.
Systems where frequency converters are installed must, if
necessary, be equipped with additional monitoring and
protective devices according to the valid safety regulations,
e.g law on mechanical tools, regulations for the prevention
of accidents etc. Modifications on the frequency converters
by means of the operating software are allowed.
NOTE
Hazardous situations shall be identified by the machine
builder/ integrator who is responsible for taking necessary
preventive means into consideration. Additional
monitoring and protective devices may be included, always
according to valid national safety regulations, e.g. law on
mechanical tools, regulations for the prevention of
accidents.
8
Crane, Lifts and Hoists:
The controlling of external brakes must always have a
redundant system. The frequency converter can in no
circumstances be the primary safety circuit. Comply with
relevant standards, e.g.
Hoists and cranes: IEC 60204-32
Lifts: EN 81
Protection Mode
Once a hardware limit on motor current or dc-link voltage
is exceeded the frequency converter will enter “Protection
mode”. “Protection mode” means a change of the PWM
modulation strategy and a low switching frequency to
minimize losses. This continues 10 s after the last fault and
increases the reliability and the robustness of the
frequency converter while re-establishing full control of the
motor.
The “Protection mode” can be disabled by setting
SP-26 Trip Delay at Drive Fault to zero which means that
the frequency converter will trip immediately if one of the
hardware limits is exceeded.
DET-618C
Introduction
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
1 1
1.6 Electrical Wiring
1.6.1 Electrical Wiring - Control Cables
Illustration 1.2 Basic Wiring Schematic Drawing.
A=Analog, D=Digital
Terminal 37 is used for Safe Stop. For Safe Stop installation instructions, refer to the Design and Installation Guide DET-767.
*The brake chopper factory option must be ordered to use dynamic braking resistors
**This is available when ordering the brake chopper option on unit size 23 and above drives.
Very long control cables and analog signals may in rare cases and depending on installation result in 50/60 Hz earth loops
due to noise from mains supply cables.
If this occurs, it may be necessary to break the screen or insert a 100 nF capacitor between screen and chassis.
The digital and analog inputs and outputs must be connected separately to the common inputs (terminal 20, 55, 39) of the
frequency converter to avoid ground currents from both groups to affect other groups. For example, switching on the
digital input may disturb the analog input signal.
DET-618C
9
1 1
Introduction
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
Input polarity of control terminals
1.6.2 Start/Stop
Terminal 18 = E-01 Terminal 18 Digital Input [8] Start
Terminal 37 = Safe stop (where available)
Illustration 1.3 PNP (Source)
Illustration 1.6 Start/Stop
Illustration 1.4 NPN (Sink)
NOTE
Control cables must be screened/armoured.
Illustration 1.5 Earthing of Screened/Armoured Control Cables
10
DET-618C
Introduction
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
1.6.3 Pulse Start/Stop
1 1
1.6.5 Potentiometer Reference
Terminal 18 = E-01 Terminal 18 Digital Input Latched start,
[9]
Terminal 27= E-03 Terminal 27 Digital Input Stop inverse, [6]
Terminal 37 = Safe stop (where available)
Voltage reference via a potentiometer
Reference Source 1 = [1] Analog input 53 (default)
Terminal 53, Low Voltage = 0 V
Terminal 53, High Voltage = 10 V
Terminal 53, Low Ref./Feedback = 0 RPM
Terminal 53, High Ref./Feedback = 1500 RPM
Switch S201 = OFF (U)
Illustration 1.7 Pulse Start/Stop
1.6.4 Speed Up/Down
Illustration 1.9 Potentiometer Reference
Terminals 29/32 = Speed up/down
Terminal 18 = E-01 Terminal 18 Digital Input Start
[9] (default)
Terminal 27 = E-03 Terminal 27 Digital Input
Freeze reference [19]
Terminal 29 = E-04 Terminal 29 Digital Input
Speed up [21]
Terminal 32 = E-05 Terminal 32 Digital Input
Speed down [22]
Illustration 1.8 Speed Up/Down
DET-618C
11
1 1
Introduction
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
10.
1.7 External Hand Off Auto Example
Hand Off Auto (HOA), without the use of the Drive keypad
To have a HOA system with an external 0-10 V potentiometer for the hand reference and a 4-20 mA signal for
the auto reference, 2 set-ups should be used. In this
example we use set-up 1 for the hand mode and set-up 2
for the auto mode. We use analog input 53 for the hand
reference (0-10 V potentiometer) and analog input 54 for
the auto reference (4-20 mA) and digital input 27 for the
set-up selector. Please ensure that the analog inputs have
the correct dip settings (A-53 [U] and A-54 [I]).
Set F-01 Frequency Setting 1 to Analog input 54
(auto mode).
If you want different settings in hand and auto mode, like
different accel/decel ramps, speed limits etc. you can now
program them. You just have to make sure you edit the
correct set-up. Set-up 1 is Hand mode and set-up 2 is Auto
mode.
External Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch Wiring
In the upper right corner of the keypad you can see 2
numbers – like 1(1). The number outside the parenthesis is
the active set-up and the number inside the parenthesis is
the set-up which will be edited. Default will always be 1(1).
Make sure you edit set-up 1.
12
1.
Make all the parameter changes you need, that
will be common for auto and hand mode, like
motor parameters etc.
2.
Set K-10 Active Set-up to [9] Multi Set-up. This
parameter change is needed to be able to
change set-up from an external source, like a
digital input.
3.
Set K-11 Edit Set-up to [9] Active Set-up. This is
recommended because then the active setup will
always be the set-up that is edited. If you prefer
you can also ignore this and manually control
what set-up you want to edit through K-11 Edit
Set-up.
4.
Set E-03 Terminal 27 Digital Input to [23] Set-up
select bit 0. When terminal 27 is OFF, set-up 1
(hand) is active, when it is ON, set-up 2 (auto) is
active.
5.
Set F-01 Frequency Setting 1 to Analog input 53
(hand mode).
6.
Ensure C-30 Frequency Command 2 and
C-34 Frequency Command 3 are both No Function.
This is good practice to make sure no other
references are added.
7.
Copy set-up 1 to set-up 2. Set K-51 Set-up Copy to
[2] Copy to set-up 2. Now setup 1 and 2 are
identical.
8.
If you need to be able to change between hand
and auto mode while the motor is running you
will have to link the 2 set-ups together. Set
K-12 This Set-up Linked to to [2] set-up 2.
9.
Change to set-up 2 by setting input 27 ON (if
K-11 Edit Set-up is [9]) or by setting K-11 Edit Setup to set-up 2.
Illustration 1.10 GE 30 mm HOA Cat# (1) 104PSG34B & (3)
CR104PXC1
DET-618C
How to Program
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
2 How to Program
2 2
2.1 The Keypad
The easiest programming of the frequency converter is
performed by the keypad.
The keypad is divided into four functional groups
1.
Graphical display with Status lines.
2.
Menu keys and indicator lights - changing
parameters and switching between display
functions.
3.
Navigation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).
4.
Operation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).
All data is displayed in the display, which can show up to
five items of operating data while displaying [Status].
Display lines
a.
Status line: Status messages displaying icons and
graphic.
b.
Line 1-2: Operator data lines displaying data
defined or chosen by the user. By pressing
[Status], up to one extra line can be added.
c.
Status line: Status messages displaying text.
Illustration 2.1 Keypad
DET-618C
13
2 2
How to Program
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
2.1.1 The LCD-Display
The LCD-display has backlight and a total of 6 alphanumeric lines. The display lines show the direction of
rotation (arrow), the chosen set-up as well as the
programming set-up. The display is divided into 3 sections.
Top section
shows up to 2 measurements in normal operating status.
Middle section
The top line shows up to 5 measurements with related
unit, regardless of status (except in the case of alarm/
warning).
Bottom section
always shows the state of the frequency converter in
Status mode.
Illustration 2.3 Indicator lights (LEDs)
Keypad Keys
The control keys are divided into functions. The keys
below the display and indicator lamps are used for
parameter Set-up, including choice of display indication
during normal operation.
Illustration 2.4
Illustration 2.2 Bottom Section
The active set-up (selected as the active set-up in
K-10 Active Set-up) is shown. When programming another
set-up than the active set-up, the number of the
programmed set-up appears to the right.
Display contrast adjustment
Press [Status] and [▲] for darker display
Press [Status] and [▼] for brighter display
[Status]
indicates the status of the frequency converter and/or the
motor. Choose between 3 different readouts by pressing
[Status]: 5 line readouts, 4 line readouts or Logic Controller.
Use [Status] for selecting the mode of display or for
changing back to Display mode from either the Quick
Menu mode, the Main Menu mode or Alarm mode. Also
use [Status] to toggle single or double read-out mode.
[Quick Menu]
allows quick access to different Quick Menus such as
•
•
•
Most parameter set-ups can be changed immediately via
the keypad, unless a password has been created via
K-60 Main Menu Password or via K-65 Quick Menu Password.
Indicator lights (LEDs)
If certain threshold values are exceeded, the alarm and/or
warning LED lights up. A status and alarm text appear on
the keypad.
The ON LED is activated when the frequency converter
receives mains voltage or via a DC bus terminal or 24V
external supply option (OPC24VPS) supply. At the same
time, the back light is on.
•
•
•
14
Green LED/On: Control section is working.
Yellow LED/Warn.: Indicates a warning.
Flashing Red LED/Alarm: Indicates an alarm.
Quick Start
Parameter Data Check
Trending
Press [Quick Start] to program the parameters belonging
to the Quick Menu. It is possible to switch directly
between Quick Menu mode and Main Menu mode.
[Main Menu]
is used for programming all parameters.
It is possible to switch directly between Main Menu mode
and Quick Menu mode.
Parameter shortcut can be carried out by pressing down
[Main Menu] for 3 seconds. The parameter shortcut allows
direct access to any parameter.
[Alarm Log]
displays an Alarm list of the five latest alarms (numbered
A1-A5). To obtain additional details about an alarm, use
the arrow keys to maneuver to the alarm number and
DET-618C
How to Program
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
press [OK]. Information is displayed about the condition of
the frequency converter before it enters the alarm mode.
[Back]
reverts to the previous step or layer in the navigation
structure.
[Cancel]
last change or command will be cancelled as long as the
display has not been changed.
[Info]
supplies information about a command, parameter, or
function in any display window. [Info] provides detailed
information whenever help is needed.
Exit info mode by pressing either [Info], [Back], or [Cancel].
[Hand]
enables control of the frequency converter via the keypad.
[Hand ] also starts the motor, and it is now possible to
enter the motor speed data by means of the arrow keys.
The key can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
K-40 [Hand] Button on Keypad
External stop signals activated by means of control signals
or a serial bus will override a “start” command via the
keypad.
The following control signals will still be active when
[Hand ] is activated
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Illustration 2.5 Back
[Hand] - [Off] - [Auto]
Reset
Coasting stop inverse
Reversing
Set-up select bit 0- Set-up select bit 1
Stop command from serial communication
Quick stop
DC brake
[Off]
stops the connected motor. The key can be selected as [1]
Enable or [0] Disable via K-41 [Off] Button on Keypad. If no
external stop function is selected and the [Off] key is
inactive the motor can be stopped by disconnecting the
voltage.
Illustration 2.6 Cancel
Illustration 2.7 Info
Navigation Keys
The four navigation keys are used to navigate between the
different choices available in [Quick Menu], [Main Menu]
and [Alarm Log]. Use the keys to move the cursor.
[Auto]
enables the frequency converter to be controlled via the
control terminals and/or serial communication. When a
start signal is applied on the control terminals and/or the
bus, the frequency converter will start. The key can be
selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via K-42 [Auto] Button
on Keypad.
NOTE
[OK]
is used for choosing a parameter marked by the cursor
and for enabling the change of a parameter.
An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digital inputs has
higher priority than the control keys [Hand] – [Auto].
Local Control Keys
for local control are found at the bottom of the keypad.
[Reset]
is used for resetting the frequency converter after an alarm
(trip). It can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
K-43 [Reset] Button on Keypad.
The parameter shortcut can be carried out by holding
down the [Main Menu] key for 3 seconds. The parameter
shortcut allows direct access to any parameter.
Illustration 2.8 Local Control Keys
DET-618C
15
2 2
2 2
How to Program
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
2.1.2 Quick Transfer of Parameter Settings
between Multiple Frequency
Converters
Data transfer from keypad to frequency converter
NOTE
Stop the motor before performing this operation.
1.
Go to K-50 Keypad Copy
Once the set-up of a frequency converter is complete,
store the data in the keypad or on a PC via Drive Control
Tool Software DCT 10.
2.
Press the [OK] key
3.
Select “All from keypad”
4.
Press the [OK] key
The parameter settings stored in the keypad are now
transferred to the frequency converter indicated by the
progress bar. When 100% is reached, press [OK].
2.1.3 Display Mode
In normal operation, up to 5 different operating variables
can be indicated continuously in the middle section: 1.1,
1.2, and 1.3 as well as 2 and 3.
2.1.4 Display Mode - Selection of ReadOuts
It is possible to toggle between three status read-out
screens by pressing [Status].
Operating variables with different formatting are shown in
each status screen - see below.
Table 2.1 shows the measurements that can be linked to
each of the operating variables. When options are
mounted, additional measurements are available. Define
the links via K-20 Display Line 1.1 Small, K-21 Display Line
1.2 Small, K-22 Display Line 1.3 Small, K-23 Display Line 2
Large, and K-24 Display Line 3 Large.
Illustration 2.9 Keypad
Data storage in keypad
NOTE
Stop the motor before performing this operation.
1.
Go to K-50 Keypad Copy
2.
Press the [OK] key
Operating variable
Unit
3.
Select “All to keypad”
DR-00 Control Word
hex
4.
Press the [OK] key
DR-01 Reference [Unit]
[unit]
DR-02 Reference [%]
%
DR-03 Status Word
hex
DR-05 Main Actual Value [%]
%
DR-10 Power [kW]
[kW]
DR-11 Power [hp]
[HP]
DR-12 Motor Voltage
[V]
DR-13 Frequency
[Hz]
DR-14 Motor current
[A]
DR-16 Torque [Nm]
Nm
DR-17 Speed [RPM]
[RPM]
DR-18 Motor Thermal
%
All parameter settings are now stored in the keypad
indicated by the progress bar. When 100% is reached,
press [OK].
Connect the keypad to another frequency converter and
copy the parameter settings to this frequency converter as
well.
16
Each readout parameter selected in K-20 Display Line 1.1
Small to K-24 Display Line 3 Large has its own scale and
digits after a possible decimal point. By larger numeric
value of a parameter fewer digits are displayed after the
decimal point.
Ex.: Current readout 5.25A; 15.2A 105A.
DET-618C
How to Program
Operating variable
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
Unit
DR-20 Motor Angle
DR-30 DC Link Voltage
V
DR-32 Brake Energy /s
kW
DR-33 Brake Energy /2 min
kW
DR-34 Heatsink Temp.
C
DR-35 Drive Thermal
%
DR-36 Drive Nominal Current
A
DR-37 Drive Max. Current
A
2 2
DR-38 Logic Controller State
DR-39 Control Card Temp.
Illustration 2.10 Status screen I
C
DR-40 Trending Buffer Full
DR-50 External Reference
Status screen II
See the operating variables (1.1, 1.2, 1.3 and 2) shown in
Illustration 2.11.
In the example, speed, motor current, motor power and
frequency are selected as variables in the first and second.
DR-51 Pulse Reference
DR-52 Feedback[Unit]
[Unit]
DR-53 Digi Pot Reference
DR-60 Digital Input
bin
DR-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting
V
DR-62 Analog Input 53
DR-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting
V
DR-64 Analog Input 54
DR-65 Analog Output 42 [mA]
[mA]
DR-66 Digital Output [bin]
[bin]
DR-67 Freq. Input #29 [Hz]
[Hz]
DR-68 Freq. Input #33 [Hz]
[Hz]
DR-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz]
[Hz]
DR-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz]
[Hz]
Illustration 2.11 Status screen II
Status screen III
This state displays the event and action of the Logic
Controller. For further information, see 3.19 LC-## Logic
Controller.
DR-71 Relay Output [bin]
DR-72 Counter A
DR-73 Counter B
DR-80 Fieldbus CTW 1
hex
DR-82 Fieldbus REF 1
hex
DR-84 Comm. Option STW
hex
DR-85 Drive Port CTW 1
hex
DR-86 Drive Port REF 1
hex
DR-90 Alarm Word
Illustration 2.12 Status screen III
DR-92 Warning Word
DR-94 Ext. Status Word
2.1.5 Parameter Set-Up
Table 2.1 Measurements
Status screen I
This read-out state is standard after start-up or initialization.
Press [Info] to obtain information about the measurement
links to the displayed operating variables (1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2
and 3).
See the operating variables shown in Illustration 2.10.
The frequency converter can be used for practically all
assignments, which is why the number of parameters is
quite large. The frequency converter offers a choice
between two programming modes - a Main Menu and a
Quick Menu mode.
The former provides access to all parameters. The latter
takes the user through a few parameters making it
possible to start operating the frequency converter.
Change a parameter in either Main Menu mode or Quick
Menu mode.
DET-618C
17
2 2
How to Program
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
2.1.6 Quick Menu Key Functions
Select Parameter Data Check to get information about:
•
the last 10 changes. Use the [▲] [▼] navigation
keys to scroll between the last 10 changed
parameters.
•
the changes made since default setting.
Pres [Quick Menus] to see a list of different areas
contained in the Quick menu.
Select Trendings to get information about the display line
read-outs. The information is shown as graphs.
Only display parameters selected in K-20 Display Line 1.1
Small and K-24 Display Line 3 Large can be viewed. It is
possible to store up to 120 samples in the memory for
later reference.
Illustration 2.13 Quick Menus
Select Quick Start to go through a limited amount of
parameters to get the motor running almost optimally. The
default setting for the other parameters considers the
desired control functions and the configuration of signal
inputs/outputs (control terminals).
The selection of parameter is effected by means of the
arrow keys. The parameters in the following table are
accessible.
Parameter
Setting
K-01 Language
K-02 Motor Speed Unit
P-02 Motor Power [HP]
or
P-07 Motor Power [kW]
[kW]
F-05 Motor Rated Voltage
[V]
P-03 Motor Current
[A]
F-04 Base Frequency
[Hz]
P-06 Base Speed
[rpm]
F-01 Frequency Setting 1
F-02 Operation Method
F-07 Accel Time 1
[sec]
F-08 Decel Time 1
[sec]
F-10 Electronic Overload
F-17 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
or
F-15 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
F-18 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]
or
F-16 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
H-08 Reverse Lock
P-04 Auto Tune
[1] Enable complete
Auto Tune
Table 2.2
18
DET-618C
How to Program
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
2.1.7 Initial Commissioning
The easiest way of carrying out the initial commissioning is by pressing [Quick Menu] and following the quick set-up
procedure (read Table 2.3 from left to right). The example applies to open loop applications.
2 2
Press
Quick Start
K-01 Language
Set language
K-02 Motor Speed Unit
Set motor speed in Hz or RPM
P-02 Motor Power [HP] or P-07 Motor
Power [kW]
Set Motor nameplate power
F-05 Motor Rated Voltage
Set Nameplate voltage
F-04 Base Frequency
Set Nameplate frequency
P-03 Motor Current
Set Nameplate current
P-06 Base Speed
Set Nameplate speed in RPM
F-01 Frequency Setting 1
Set reference source
F-02 Operation Method
Select which reference site to activate
F-07 Accel Time 1
F-08 Decel Time 1
F-10 Electronic Overload
F-15 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] or
F-17 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
Set the accel time with reference to synchronous motor
speed, ns
Set the decel time time with reference to synchronous
motor speed, ns
Set motor thermal protection
Set motor speed high limit in Hz or RPM
F-16 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] or
F-18 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]
Set motor speed low limit in Hz or RPM
H-08 Reverse Lock
Set allowed rotation direction
P-04 Auto Tune
Set desired auto tune function. Enable complete auto
tune is recommended
Table 2.3
DET-618C
19
2 2
How to Program
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
2.1.8 Main Menu Mode
2.1.10 Changing Data
Start the Main Menu mode by pressing [Main Menu]. The
read-out shown below appears on the display.
The middle and bottom sections on the display show a list
of parameter groups which can be chosen by toggling [▲]
and [▼] keys.
The procedure for changing data is the same in the Quick
menu and the Main menu mode. Press [OK] to change the
selected parameter.
The procedure for changing data depends on whether the
selected parameter represents a numerical data value or a
text value.
2.1.11 Changing a Text Value
If the selected parameter is a text value, change the text
value with the [▲] [▼] keys.
Place the cursor on the value to save and press [OK].
Illustration 2.14 Main Menu Mode
Each parameter has a name and number which remain the
same regardless of the programming mode. In the Main
Menu mode, the parameters are divided into groups. The
first digit of the parameter number (from the left) indicates
the parameter group number.
All parameters can be changed in the Main Menu.
However, depending on the choice of configuration
(H-40 Configuration Mode), some parameters can be
"missing". E.g. open loop hides all the PID parameters, and
other enabled options make more parameter groups
visible.
2.1.9 Parameter Selection
Illustration 2.16 Changing a Text Value
2.1.12 Changing
If the chosen parameter represents a numeric data value,
change the chosen data value by means of the [◀] [▶]
navigation keys as well as the [▲] [▼] navigation keys. Press
[◀] [▶] keys to move the cursor horizontally.
In the Main menu mode, the parameters are divided into
groups. Select a parameter group with the navigation keys.
After selecting a parameter group, choose a parameter by
means of the navigation keys.
The middle section on the display shows the parameter
number and name as well as the selected parameter value.
Illustration 2.17 Changing a Data Value
Press [▲] [▼] keys to change the data value. [▲] increases
the data value, and [▼] decreases the data value. Place the
cursor on the value to save and press [OK].
Illustration 2.15 Parameter Selection
Illustration 2.18 Saving a Data Value
20
DET-618C
How to Program
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
2.1.13 Infinitely Variable Change of
Numeric Data Value
2 2
If the chosen parameter represents a numeric data value,
select a digit with [◀] [▶].
Illustration 2.20 Keypad Keys
[Hand]
enables control of the frequency converter via the keypad.
[Hand] also starts the motor and it is now possible to enter
the motor speed data by means of the arrow keys. The key
can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via K-40 [Hand]
Button on Keypad.
External stop signals activated by means of control signals
or a serial bus will override a 'start' command via the
keypad.
The following control signals are still active when [Hand] is
activated:
Illustration 2.19 Selecting a Digit
Change the selected digit infinitely variably with [▲] [▼].
The chosen digit is indicated by the cursor. Place the
cursor on the digit to save and press [OK].
2.1.14 Value, Step-by-Step
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Certain parameters can be changed step by step or
infinitely varying. This applies to P-07 Motor Power [kW],
F-05 Motor Rated Voltage and F-04 Base Frequency.
The parameters are changed both as a group of numeric
data values and as numeric data values infinitely varying.
2.1.15 Read-out and Programming of
Indexed Parameters
Parameters are indexed when placed in a rolling stack.
ID-30 Fault Log: Error Code to ID-32 Alarm Log: Time contain
a fault log which can be read out. Choose a parameter,
press [OK], and use [▲] [▼] to scroll through the value log.
Use C-05 Multi-step Frequency 1 - 8 as another example:
Choose the parameter, press [OK], and use [▲] [▼] to scroll
through the indexed values. To change the parameter
value, select the indexed value and press [OK]. Change the
value by pressing [▲] [▼]. Press [OK] to accept the new
setting. Press [Cancel] to abort. Press [Back] to leave the
parameter.
2.1.16 Local Control Keys
Keys for local control are found at the bottom of the
keypad.
[Hand] - [Off] - [Auto]
Reset
Coasting stop inverse
Reversing
Set-up select lsb - Set-up select msb
Stop command from serial communication
Quick stop
DC brake
[Off]
stops the connected motor. The key can be selected as [1]
Enable or [0] Disable via K-41 [Off] Button on Keypad.
If no external stop function is selected and the [Off] key is
inactive the motor can be stopped by disconnecting the
voltage.
[Auto]
enables the frequency converter to be controlled via the
control terminals and/or serial communication. When a
start signal is applied on the control terminals and/or the
bus, the frequency converter will start. The key can be
selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via K-42 [Auto] Button
on Keypad.
NOTE
An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digital inputs has
higher priority than the control keys [Hand] [Auto].
[Reset]
is used for resetting the frequency converter after an alarm
(trip). It can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
K-43 [Reset] Button on Keypad.
DET-618C
21
2 2
How to Program
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
2.1.17 Restoring Drive to Factory Settings
The drive can be restored to factory settings in two ways.
Recommended
1.
Select H-03 Restore Factory Settings
2.
Press [OK]
3.
Select [2] Restore Factory Settings
4.
Press [OK]
5.
Cut off the mains supply and wait until the
display turns off.
6.
Reconnect the mains supply - the frequency
converter is now reset.
H-03 Restore Factory Settings restores all except:
SP-50 RFI Filter
O-30 Protocol
O-31 Address
O-32 Drive Port Baud Rate
O-35 Minimum Response Delay
O-36 Max Response Delay
O-37 Max Inter-Char Delay
ID-00 Operating hours to ID-05 Over Volt's
ID-20 Historic Log: Event to ID-22 Historic Log:
Time
ID-30 Fault Log: Error Code to ID-32 Alarm Log:
Time
Manual Restore of Factory Settings
1.
Disconnect from mains and wait until the display
turns off
2.
Press [Status] - [Main Menu] - [OK] at the same
time while power up for keypad
3.
Release the keys after 5 s.
4.
The frequency converter is now programmed
according to default settings.
Manual restores all except:
ID-00 Operating hours
ID-03 Power Up's
ID-04 Over Temp's
ID-05 Over Volt's
NOTE
A manual restore also resets serial communication, RFI
filter settings (SP-50 RFI Filter) and fault log settings.
22
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3 Parameter Descriptions
3.1 Parameter Selection
3 3
Parameters for AF-650 GP are grouped into various parameter groups for easy selection of the correct parameters for
optimized operation of the frequency converter.
Main Menu Item
Parameter groups:
Keypad Set-up
K-##
Parameter Data Set
F-##, E-##, C-##, P-##, H-##, AN-##, SP-##, O-##, DN-##, PB-##, EN-##, EC-##, RS-##
Drive Information
ID-##
Data Readouts
DR-##
Advanced Parameter Data Set
LC-##, B-##, PI-##, SF-##
Table 3.1 Parameter groups in Main Menu Items
Group No
Parameter groups:
K-##
Keypad Set-Up
F-##
Fundamental Parameters
E-##
Digital In/Out
C-##
Frequency Control Functions
P-##
Motor Data
H-##
High Perf Parameters
AN-##
Analog In/Out
SP-##
Special Functions
O-##
Options/Comms
DN-##
DeviceNet
PB-##
Profibus DP
EN-##
Ethernet
EC-##
Feedback Option
RS-##
Resolver Interface
ID-##
Drive Information
DR-##
Data Readouts
LC-##
Logic Controller
B-##
Braking Functions
PI-##
PID Controls
SF-##
Special Features
Table 3.2 Parameter groups
DET-618C
23
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.2 K-## Keypad Set-Up
K-04 Operating State at Power-up
Option:
Parameter group related to the fundamental functions of
the drive, keypad buttons, configuration of the keypad
display, copy-cat features, and password protection.
Function:
Selects the operating mode upon
reconnection of the frequency converter to
mains voltage after power down in Hand
(local) operation mode.
3.2.1 K-0# Keypad Basic Settings
[0]
Resume
Restarts the frequency converter, maintaining
the same and the same start/stop settings
Parameters for configuring basic drives settings.
(applied by [Hand/Off]) as before the
K-01 Language
Option:
frequency converter was powered down.
Function:
[1] * Forced stop,
Restarts the frequency converter with a saved
ref=old
local reference, after mains voltage reappears
Defines the language to be used in the
display. .
and after pressing [Hand].
[0] * English
[1]
Deutsch
[2]
Francais
[4]
Spanish
[5]
Italiano
[2]
[22] English US
[24] Russian
K-02 Motor Speed Unit
Function:
NOTE
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the
motor is running.
NOTE
Changing the Motor Speed Unit will reset
certain parameters to their initial value. It is
recommended to select the motor speed unit
first, before modifying other parameters.
[0]
RPM Selects display of motor speed variables and
parameters (i.e. references, feedbacks and limits) in
terms of motor speed (RPM).
[1] * Hz
Selects display of motor speed variables and
parameters (i.e. references, feedbacks and limits) in
terms of output frequency to the motor (Hz).
K-03 Regional Settings
Option:
Function:
NOTE
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running.
[0]
Interna-
Activates P-07 Motor Power [kW] for setting the
tional
motor power in kW and sets the default value
24
restarting the frequency converter.
Define and control the individual parameter setups.
The frequency converter has four parameter setups that
can be programmed independently of each other. This
makes the frequency converter very flexible and able to
solve advanced control functionality problems, often
saving the cost of external control equipment. For example
these can be used to program the frequency converter to
operate according to one control scheme in one setup
(e.g. motor 1 for horizontal movement) and another
control scheme in another setup (e.g. motor 2 for vertical
movement). Alternatively they can be used by an OEM
machine builder to identically program all their factory
fitted frequency converters for different machine types
within a range to have the same parameters and then
during production/commissioning simply select a specific
setup depending on which machine the frequency
converter is installed on.
The active setup (i.e. the setup in which the frequency
converter is currently operating) can be selected in
K-10 Active Set-up and is displayed in the keypad. Using
Multi set-up it is possible to switch between setups with
the frequency converter running or stopped, via digital
input or serial communication commands. If it is necessary
to change setups whilst running, ensure K-12 This Set-up
Linked to is programmed as required. Using K-11 Edit Set-up
it is possible to edit parameters within any of the setups
whilst continuing the frequency converter operation in its
Active Setup which can be a different setup to that being
edited. Using K-51 Set-up Copy it is possible to copy
parameter settings between the setups to enable quicker
commissioning if similar parameter settings are required in
different setups.
K-10 Active Set-up
of F-04 Base Frequency to 50 Hz.
[1] * US
Resets the local reference to 0 upon
3.2.2 K-1# Keypad Set-up Operations
[10] Chinese
Option:
Forced stop,
ref=0
Activates P-07 Motor Power [kW] for setting the
Option:
Function:
motor power in HP and sets the default value
Select the set-up to control the frequency
of F-04 Base Frequency to 60 Hz.
converter functions.
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
K-10 Active Set-up
Option:
[0]
Function:
Factory setup Cannot be changed. It contains the GE data
set, and can be used as a data source when
returning the other set-ups to a known
3 3
state.
[1] * Set-up 1
[1] Set-up 1 to [4] Set-up 4 are the four
separate parameter set-ups within which all
parameters can be programmed.
[2]
Set-up 2
[3]
Set-up 3
[4]
Set-up 4
[9]
Multi Set-up
Remote selection of set-ups using digital
inputs and the serial communication port.
This set-up uses the settings from K-12 This
Set-up Linked to. Stop the frequency
converter before making changes to openand closed loop functions
Use K-51 Set-up Copy to copy a set-up to one or all other
set-ups. Stop the frequency converter before switching
between set-ups where parameters marked ‘not
changeable during operation’ have different values. To
avoid conflicting settings of the same parameter within
two different set-ups, link the set-ups together using
K-12 This Set-up Linked to. Parameters which are ‘not
changeable during operation’ are marked FALSE in the
parameter lists in 4 Parameter Lists.
Illustration 3.1 Edit Set-up
K-12 This Set-up Linked to
Option:
K-11 Edit Set-up
Option:
Function:
To enable conflict-free changes from one set-up
Function:
Select the set-up to be edited (i.e.
to another during operation, link set-ups
programmed) during operation; either the
containing parameters which are not
active set-up or one of the inactive set-ups.
changeable during operation. The link will
ensure synchronising of the ‘not changeable
[0]
Factory setup Cannot be edited but it is useful as a data
[1] * Set-up 1
during operation’ parameter values when
source to return the other set-ups to a
known state.
moving from one set-up to another during
[1] Set-up 1 to [4] Set-up 4 can be edited
parameters can be identified by the label FALSE
freely during operation, independently of
in the parameter lists in 4 Parameter Lists.
the active set-up.
K-12 This Set-up Linked to is used by Multi set-
operation. ‘Not changeable during operation’
[2]
Set-up 2
up in K-10 Active Set-up. Multi set-up is used to
[3]
Set-up 3
move from one set-up to another during
[4]
Set-up 4
operation (i.e. while the motor is running).
[9]
Active Set-up Can also be edited during operation. Edit
Example:
the chosen set-up from a range of sources:
Use Multi set-up to shift from Set-up 1 to Set-
Keypad, Drive RS-485, Drive USB or up to
up 2 whilst the motor is running. Program in
five Network sites.
Set-up 1 first, then ensure that Set-up 1 and
Set-up 2 are synchronised (or ‘linked’). Synchronisation can be performed in two ways:
1. Change the edit set-up to [2] Set-up 2 in
K-11 Edit Set-up and set K-12 This Set-up Linked
to to [1] Set-up 1. This will start the linking
(synchronising) process.
DET-618C
25
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
K-12 This Set-up Linked to
K-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups
Option:
Array [5]
Function:
Range:
3 3
Function:
Index
Keypad value
0
{0}
1
{1,2}
2
{1,2}
3
{3}
4
{4}
Illustration 3.2 Set-up 1
Table 3.4 Example: Set-up 1 and Set-up 2 are
linked
OR
K-14 Readout: Edit Set-ups / Channel
2. While still in Set-up 1, copy Set-up 1 to Set-
Range:
up 2. Then set K-12 This Set-up Linked to to [2]
0*
Set-up 2. This will start the linking process.
Function:
[-2147483648 - View the setting of K-11 Edit Set-up for each
2147483647]
of the four different communication
channels. When the number is displayed in
hex, as it is in the keypad, each number
represents one channel.
Numbers 1-4 represent a set-up number; ‘F’
means factory setting; and ‘A’ means active
set-up. The channels are, from right to left:
keypad, Drive bus, USB, HPFB1-5.
Example: The number AAAAAA21h means
Illustration 3.3 Set-up 2
that the Drive bus selected Set-up 2 in
K-11 Edit Set-up, the keypad selected Set-up
1 and all others used the active set-up.
After the link is complete, K-13 Readout: Linked
Set-ups will read {1,2} to indicate that all ‘not
3.2.3 K-2# Keypad Display
changeable during operation’ parameters are
now the same in Set-up 1 and Set-up 2. If there
are changes to a ‘not changeable during
Define the variables displayed in the keypad.
operation’ parameter, e.g. P-30 Stator Resistance
(Rs), in Set-up 2, they will also be changed
automatically in Set-up 1. A switch between
Set-up 1 and Set-up 2 during operation is now
possible.
NOTE
Please refer to K-37 Display Text 1, K-38 Display Text 2 and
K-39 Display Text 3 for information on how to write display
texts.
[0] * Not linked
[1]
Set-up 1
[2]
Set-up 2
left position. The options are the
[3]
Set-up 3
same as listed for parameter group
[4]
Set-up 4
Select a variable for display in line 1,
K-2#.
K-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups
Array [5]
Range:
0*
[0]
None
[953]
Profibus Warning
Word
Function:
[2205] Readout Transmit
[0 - 255] View a list of all the set-ups linked by means of
K-12 This Set-up Linked to. The parameter has one
Error Counter
[2206] Readout Receive
index for each parameter set-up. The parameter
value displayed for each index represents which
Error Counter
[2207] Readout Bus Off
set-ups are linked to that parameter set-up.
Counter
[2213] Warning Parameter
[1501] Running Hours
[1502] kWh Counter
26
DET-618C
No display value selected.
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
[1200] Control Word
Present control word
[1201] Reference [Unit]
Total reference (sum of digital/
[1202] Reference %
[1238] Logic Controller
State
[1239] Control Card Temp. Temperature of the control card.
up and slow-down) in selected unit.
[1250] External Reference
Total reference (sum of digital/
[1203] Status Word
Present status word.
[1205] Main Actual Value
Actual value as a percentage.
pulse/bus.
[1251] Pulse Reference
Frequency in Hz connected to the
[1252] Feedback [Unit]
Reference value from programmed
digital inputs (18, 19 or 32, 33).
[%]
digital input(s).
[1209] Custom Readout
[1212] Motor Voltage
[1213] Frequency
[1253] Digi Pot Reference
Actual power consumed by the
[1260] Digital Input
terminals (18, 19, 27, 29, 32 and 33).
Actual power consumed by the
Input 18 corresponds to the bit at
motor in HP.
the far left. Signal low = 0; Signal
high = 1.
Voltage supplied to the motor.
[1261] Terminal 53 Switch
Motor frequency, i.e. the output
Setting
[1262] Analog Input 53
converter in Hz
[1263] Terminal 54 Switch
Setting
Motor frequency, i.e. the output
[1264] Analog Input 54
frequency from the frequency
Actual motor torque in Nm
[1217] Speed [RPM]
Speed in RPM (revolutions per
[1265] Analog Output 42
[mA]
calculated by the Electronic Thermal
applied at terminal 29 as an impulse
Overload function.
input.
[1268] Freq. Input #33 [Hz] Actual value of the frequency
applied at terminal 33 as an impulse
input.
[1269] Pulse Output #27
Present motor load as a percentage
[Hz]
[1270] Pulse Output #29
of the rated motor torque.
Intermediate circuit voltage in the
[Hz]
frequency converter.
[1271] Relay Output [bin]
Present brake power transferred to
[1272] Counter A
[1273] Counter B
Stated as an instantaneous value.
the most recent 120 seconds.
terminal 29 in digital output mode.
Application dependent (e.g. LC
Application dependent (e.g. LC
Display the actual counter value.
[1275] Analog input
Actual value at input X30/11 either
Present heat sink temperature of the
[1276] Analog input
frequency converter. The cut-out
X30/12
limit is 95 ±5 ±°C; cutting back in
[1277] Analog output
X30/8 mA
as reference or protection value.
Actual value at input X30/12 either
as reference or protection value.
Actual value at output X30/8 in mA.
Use AN-60 Terminal X30/8 Output to
select the value to be shown.
Percentage load of the inverters.
[1280] Fieldbus CTW 1
Nominal current of the frequency
Control word (CTW) received from
the Bus Master.
converter.
[1237] Inv. Max. Current
Actual value of impulses applied to
[1274] Prec. Stop Counter
X30/11
occurs at 70 ±5° C.
[1236] Inv. Nom. Current
terminal 27 in digital output mode.
Control)
Brake power transferred to an
external brake resistor. The mean
power is calculated continuously for
[1235] Inverter Thermal
Actual value of impulses applied to
Control)
an external brake resistor.
[1234] Heatsink Temp.
Use AN-50 Terminal 42 Output to
[1267] Freq. Input #29 [Hz] Actual value of the frequency
[1221] Phase Angle
[1233] BrakeEnergy/2 min
Actual value at output 42 in mA.
Thermal load on the motor,
[1220] Motor Angle
[1232] BrakeEnergy/s
= 0; Voltage = 1.
Actual value at input 54 either as
[1266] Digital Output [bin] Binary value of all digital outputs.
Temperature
[1230] DC Link Voltage
Setting of input terminal 54. Current
closed loop.
[1219] KTY Sensor
[1222] Torque %
Actual value at input 53 either as a
select the value to be shown.
minute) i.e. the motor shaft speed in
[1218] Motor Thermal
= 0; Voltage = 1.
reference or protection value.
converter in percent.
[1216] Torque
Setting of input terminal 54. Current
reference or protection value.
Phase current of the motor
measured as effective value.
[1215] Frequency [%]
Signal states form the 6 digital
motor in kW.
frequency from the frequency
[1214] Motor Current
Sum of the external reference as a
percentage, i.e. the sum of analog/
up and slow-down) in percent.
[1211] Power [hp]
control.
analog/preset/bus/freeze ref./catch
analog/preset/bus/freeze ref./catch
[1210] Power [kW]
State of the event executed by the
Maximum current of the frequency
[1282] Fieldbus REF 1
Main reference value sent with
control word from the Bus Master.
converter.
DET-618C
27
3 3
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
[1284] Comm. Option STW Extended network communication
K-25 Quick Start
option status word.
[1285] Drive Port CTW 1
Array [50]
Control word (CTW) received from
Define up to 50 parameters to appear in the Quick Start Menu,
the Bus Master.
accessible via the [Quick Menu] key on the keypad. The
Status word (STW) sent to the Bus
parameters will be displayed in the Quick Start Menu in the
Master.
order they are programmed into this array parameter. Delete
[1290] Alarm Word
One or more alarms in a Hex code.
parameters by setting the value to ‘0000’.
[1291] Alarm Word 2
One or more alarms in a Hex code.
For example, this can be used to provide quick, simple access to
[1292] Warning Word
One or more warnings in a Hex
just one or up to 50 parameters which require changing on a
code.
regular basis (e.g. for plant maintenance reasons) or by an OEM
One or more warnings in a Hex
to enable simple commissioning of their equipment.
[1286] Drive Port REF 1
[1293] Warning Word 2
code.
[1294] Ext. Status Word
Range:
One or more status conditions in a
0*
Hex code.
[1295] Ext. Status Word 2
Function:
[0 - 9999] Define up to 50 parameters to appear in the
One or more status conditions in a
Quick Start Menu, accessible via the [Quick
Menu] key on the keypad. The parameters will be
Hex code.
displayed in the Quick Start Menu in the order
they are programmed into this array parameter.
Delete parameters by setting the value to ‘0000’.
K-20 Display Line 1.1 Small
Option: Function:
For example, this can be used to provide quick,
Select a variable for display in line 1, left position. The
options are the same as listed for parameter group
simple access to just one or up to 50 parameters
which require changing on a regular basis (e.g.
K-2#.
for plant maintenance reasons) or by an OEM to
enable simple commissioning of their equipment.
K-21 Display Line 1.2 Small
Option: Function:
3.2.4 K-3# Keypad Custom Readout
Select a variable for display in line 1, middle position.
The options are the same as listed for parameter group
K-2#.
K-22 Display Line 1.3 Small
Option: Function:
Select a variable for display in line 1, right position. The
It is possible to customize the display elements for various
purposes: *Custom Readout. Value proportional to speed
(Linear, squared or cubed depending on unit selected in
K-30 Unit for Custom Readout) *Display Text. Text string
stored in a parameter.
options are the same as listed for parameter group
K-2#.
K-23 Display Line 2 Large
Option: Function:
Select a variable for display in line 2. The options are
Custom Readout
The calculated value to be displayed is based on settings
in K-30 Unit for Custom Readout, K-31 Min Value of Custom
Readout (linear only), K-32 Max Value of Custom Readout,
F-17 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM], F-15 Motor Speed High
Limit [Hz] and actual speed.
the same as those listed for parameter group K-2#.
K-23 Display Line 2 Large
Option: Function:
Select a variable for display in line 2. The options are
the same as those listed for parameter group K-2#.
Illustration 3.4
28
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
The relation will depend on the type of unit selected in
K-30 Unit for Custom Readout:
Unit Type
K-30 Unit for Custom Readout
Option:
Function:
[121] gal/s
Speed Relation
Dimensionless
[122] gal/min
Speed
[123] gal/h
Flow, volume
[124] CFM
3 3
[125] ft3/s
Linear
Flow, mass
Velocity
[126] ft3/min
Length
[127] ft3/h
Temperature
[130] lb/s
Pressure
Quadratic
[131] lb/min
Power
Cubic
[132] lb/h
[140] ft/s
Table 3.5
[141] ft/min
[145] ft
K-30 Unit for Custom Readout
[160] °F
Option:
[170] psi
Function:
It is possible to program a value to be shown in
[171] lb/in2
the display of the keypad. The value will have a
[172] in WG
linear, squared or cubed relation to speed. This
[173] ft WG
relation will depend on the unit selected (see
[180] HP
Table 3.5). The actual calculated value can be read
K-31 Min Value of Custom Readout
in DR-09 Custom Readout, and/or shown in the
Range:
display be selecting [DR-09] Custom Readout in
[0] *
K-20 Display Line 1.1 Small to K-24 Display Line 3
0 CustomRea-
Large.
doutUnit*
Function:
[-999999.99 -
None
[1]
%
[5]
PPM
[10]
1/min
[11]
rpm
[12]
Pulse/s
[20]
l/s
[21]
l/min
[22]
l/h
[23]
m3/s
[24]
m3/min
This parameter sets the min.
par. K-32
value of the custom defined
CustomRea-
readout (occurs at zero
doutUnit]
speed). Only possible to set
different from 0 is when
selecting a linear unit in
K-30 Unit for Custom
Readout. For Quadratic and
Cubic units the minimum
value will be 0.
K-32 Max Value of Custom Readout
Range:
Function:
100 CustomRea-
[par. K-31 -
This parameter sets the
[25]
m3/h
[30]
kg/s
[31]
kg/min
[32]
kg/h
value for F-17 Motor Speed
[33]
t/min
High Limit [RPM] or
[34]
t/h
F-15 Motor Speed High Limit
[40]
m/s
[Hz] (depends on setting in
[41]
m/min
K-02 Motor Speed Unit).
[45]
m
[60]
°C
[70]
mbar
[71]
bar
doutUnit*
999999.99
max value to be shown
CustomRea-
when the speed of the
doutUnit]
motor has reached the set
K-37 Display Text 1
Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - 0] Enter a text which can be viewed in the graphical
[72]
Pa
display by selecting [37] Display Text 1 in
[73]
kPa
K-20 Display Line 1.1 Small, K-21 Display Line 1.2
[74]
m WG
[80]
kW
Small, K-22 Display Line 1.3 Small, K-23 Display Line 2
Large or K-24 Display Line 3 Large.
[120] GPM
DET-618C
29
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
K-38 Display Text 2
K-41 [Off] Button on Keypad
Range:
Option:
0*
Function:
[0 - 0] Enter a text which can be viewed in the graphical
display by selecting [38] Display Text 2 in
Function:
[8]
Password without OFF
[9]
Enabled, ref = 0
K-20 Display Line 1.1 Small, K-21 Display Line 1.2
3 3
Small, K-22 Display Line 1.3 Small, K-23 Display Line 2
Large or K-24 Display Line 3 Large.
K-42 [Auto] Button on Keypad
Option:
[0]
Function:
Disabled
Avoid accidental start of the
K-39 Display Text 3
Range:
0*
frequency converter in Auto mode.
Function:
[0 - 0] Enter a text which can be viewed in the graphical
display by selecting [39] Display Text 3in K-20 Display
[1] * Enabled
[Auto] Key enabled
[2]
Avoids unauthorised start in Auto
Password Protection
mode. If K-42 [Auto] Button on
Line 1.1 Small, K-21 Display Line 1.2 Small,
Keypad is included in the Quick
K-22 Display Line 1.3 Small, K-23 Display Line 2 Large
or K-24 Display Line 3 Large.
3.2.5 K-4# Keypad Buttons
Parameters for configuring the graphical keypad Hand, Off,
Auto, & Reset keys.
K-40 [Hand] Button on Keypad
Option:
[0]
Disabled
Function:
Key disabled avoids accidental usage
of the key.
[1] * Enabled
[2]
[Hand ] key enabled
Password Protection Avoid unauthorized start in Hand
mode. If K-40 [Hand] Button on
Keypad is included in the Quick Start
Menu, then define the password in
K-65 Quick Menu Password.
[3]
Hand Off/On
[4]
Hand Off/On w. Passw.
[7]
Enabled without OFF
[8]
Password without OFF
[9]
Enabled, ref = 0
K-43 [Reset] Button on Keypad
Option:
[0]
Function:
Disabled
No effect when [Reset] is pressed.
Avoids accidental alarm reset.
[1] * Enabled
[Reset] Key enabled
[2]
Password
Avoids unauthorised resetting. If
Protection
K-43 [Reset] Button on Keypad is
included in the Quick Menu, then
Menu, then define the password in
define the password in K-65 Quick
Menu Password.
K-65 Quick Menu Password. Otherwise
define the password in K-60 Main
Menu Password.
[3]
[3]
[4]
Enabled without
[7]
Password without
OFF
[5]
[6]
Hand Off/On w.
Passw.
OFF
[4]
Hand Off/On
[8]
Enabled with OFF
Password with OFF
Enabled without
Resets the frequency converter
OFF
without setting it in Off mode.
Password without
Resets the frequency converter
OFF
without setting it in Off mode. A
password is required when pressing
K-41 [Off] Button on Keypad
Option:
[0]
Disabled
Function:
[1] * Enabled
[Off] Key enabled
[2]
Avoids unauthorised stop. If
K-41 [Off] Button on Keypad is
included in the Quick Menu, then
define the password in K-65 Quick
Menu Password.
[3]
Hand Off/On
[4]
Hand Off/On w. Passw.
[7]
Enabled without OFF
30
[9]
Enabled, ref = 0
Avoids accidental stop of the
frequency converter.
Password Protection
[Reset] (see [2]).
3.2.6 K-5# Copy/Save
Copy parameter settings between set-ups and to/from the
keypad.
K-50 Keypad Copy
Option:
Function:
NOTE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
K-50 Keypad Copy
Option:
K-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password
Function:
Option:
[0] * No copy
[1]
[2]
editing of Main Menu parameters.
memory.
[3]
Bus: Read only
[4]
Bus: No access
All from
Copies all parameters in all set-ups from the
[5]
All: Read only
Keypad
keypad memory to the frequency converter
[6]
All: No access
memory.
[3]
Keypad: No access Prevent unauthorized viewing and
All to Keypad Copies all parameters in all set-ups from the
frequency converter memory to the keypad
[2]
Function:
Size indep.
Copy only the parameters that are
From Keypad
independent of the motor size. The latter
3 3
If [0] Full access is selected then K-60 Main Menu Password,
K-65 Quick Menu Password and K-66 Access to Quick Menu
w/o Password will be ignored.
selection can be used to program several
frequency converters with the same function
K-65 Quick Menu Password
without disturbing motor data.
Range:
200*
K-51 Set-up Copy
Function:
[-9999 -
Define the password for access to the Quick
9999]
Menu via the [Quick Menu] key. If
Function:
K-66 Access to Quick Menu w/o Password is
[0] * No copy
No function
set to [0] Full access, this parameter will be
[1]
Copy to set-
Copies all parameters in the present
up 1
Programming Set-up (defined in K-11 Edit
Option:
ignored.
K-66 Access to Quick Menu w/o Password
Set-up) to Set-up 1.
[2]
Option:
Copy to set-
Copies all parameters in the present
up 2
Programming Set-up (defined in K-11 Edit
Function:
[0] * Full access
Disables the password defined in
K-65 Quick Menu Password.
Set-up) to Set-up 2.
[1]
[3]
Copy to set-
Copies all parameters in the present
up 3
Programming Set-up (defined in K-11 Edit
[2]
Set-up) to Set-up 3.
[4]
Copy to set-
Copies all parameters in the present
up 4
Programming Set-up (defined in K-11 Edit
[3]
Keypad: Read
Prevents unauthorised editing of Quick
only
Menu parameters.
Keypad: No
Prevents unauthorised viewing and
access
editing of Quick Menu parameters.
Bus: Read only
Read only functions for Quick Menu
parameters on Fieldbus and/ or Drive
Set-up) to Set-up 4.
standard bus.
[9]
Copy to all
Copies the parameters in the present set-up
[4]
over to each of the set-ups 1 to 4.
Bus: No access
No access to Quick Menu parameters is
allowed via Fieldbus and/ or Drive
standard bus.
3.2.7 K-6# Password Protection
[5]
All: Read only
Parameters for setting the Password Protection for the
drive parameters.
standard bus.
[6]
All: No access
K-60 Main Menu Password
Range:
100*
[-9999 9999]
standard bus is allowed.
Define the password for access to the Main
Menu via the [Main Menu] key. If K-61 Access
If K-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password is set to [0] Full
access then this parameter will be ignored.
access, this parameter will be ignored.
K-67 Bus Password Access
Range:
0*
K-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password
[0] * Full access
No access from keypad, Fieldbus or Drive
Function:
to Main Menu w/o Password is set to [0] Full
Option:
read only function for Quick Menu
parameters on keypad, Fieldbus or Drive
Function:
[0 - 9999] Writing to this parameter enables users to unlock
the frequency converter from network/DCT-10.
Function:
Disables password defined in K-60 Main
Menu Password.
[1]
Keypad: Read only Prevent unauthorized editing of Main
Menu parameters.
DET-618C
31
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.3 F-## Parameter Data Set
F-03 Max Output Frequency 1
Range:
Parameter group related to the fundamental functions of
the drive.
Function:
NOTE
Max. output frequency cannot exceed
10% of the carrier frequency (F-26 Motor
Noise (Carrier Freq)).
3.3.1 F-0# Fundamental 0
Parameters to configure frequency command, base speed
settings, Torque Boost, and accel/decel time.
Provides a final limit on the output frequency
for improved safety in applications where you
F-01 Frequency Setting 1
Option:
want to avoid accidental over-speeding. This
limit is final in all configurations (independent
Function:
of the setting in H-40 Configuration Mode).
Select the reference input to be used
for the first reference signal.
F-01 Frequency Setting 1,
F-04 Base Frequency
Range:
C-30 Frequency Command 2 and
C-34 Frequency Command 3 define
up to three different reference
60
Hz*
signals. The sum of these reference
Function:
[20 -
1000
Select the motor frequency value from the
Hz]
motor nameplate data. If a value different from
signals defines the actual reference.
[0]
Min - Max motor frequency: 20-1000 Hz.
50 Hz or 60 Hz is selected, it is necessary to
adapt the load independent settings in
No function
H-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed to
[1] * Analog Input 53
[2]
Analog Input 54
[7]
Frequency input 29
[8]
Frequency input 33
H-53 Model Shift Frequency. For 87 Hz operation
with 230/400 V motors, set the nameplate data
for 230 V/50 Hz. Adapt F-17 Motor Speed High
Limit [RPM] and F-53 Maximum Reference to the
[11] Local bus reference
87 Hz application.
[20] Digital Potentiometer
[21] Analog input X30-11
(General Purpose I/O Option Module)
[22] Analog input X30-12
(General Purpose I/O Option Module)
F-05 Motor Rated Voltage
Range:
Function:
460 V*
[10 - 1000 V] Enter the nominal motor voltage
F-02 Operation Method
according to the motor nameplate data.
Option:
The default value corresponds to the
Function:
nominal rated output of the unit.
Select which reference site to activate.
[0] * Linked to
[1]
Use local reference when in Hand mode; or
Hand / Auto
remote reference when in Auto mode.
Remote
Use remote reference in both Hand mode
and Auto mode.
[2]
Local
F-07 Accel Time 1
Range:
Function:
3.00
s*
[0.01 - Enter the accel time, i.e. the acceleration time
3600 s]
Choose a accel time such that the output
Auto mode.
current does not exceed the current limit in
NOTE
F-43 Current Limit during ramping. The value
0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s in speed mode. See
When set to [2] Local, the frequency
converter will start with this setting
again following a 'power down'.
F-03 Max Output Frequency 1
Range:
Function:
132
[1 -
Hz*
590 Hz]
from 0 RPM to the synchronous motor speed nS.
Use local reference in both Hand mode and
NOTE
decel time in F-08 Decel Time 1.
Par . F − 07 =
tacc s x ns RPM
ref RPM
F-08 Decel Time 1
Range:
3.00
s*
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running.
Function:
[0.01
Enter the decel time, that is, the deceleration
- 3600
time from the synchronous motor speed ns to 0
s]
RPM. Choose a decel time such that no overvoltage arises in the inverter due to regenerative
operation of the motor, and such that the
generated current does not exceed the current
limit set in F-43 Current Limit. The value 0.00
32
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
F-08 Decel Time 1
F-10 Electronic Overload
Range:
Option:
Function:
Function:
corresponds to 0.01 s in speed mode. See accel
input (H-96 KTY Thermistor Input).
time in F-07 Accel Time 1.
See 3.3.3.2 KTY Sensor Connection.
tdec s x ns RPM
Par . F − 08 =
ref RPM
•
based on the actual load and time.
The calculated thermal load is
F-09 Torque Boost
Range:
compared with the rated motor
Function:
100 %*
[0 - 300
%]
Via calculation of the thermal load,
current IM,N and the rated motor
Enter the % value to compensate voltage in
frequency fM,N. See 3.3.3.3 Electronic
relation to load when the motor is running at
Thermal Overload.
low speed and obtain the optimum U/f
•
characteristic. The motor size determines the
Via a mechanical thermal switch
(Klixon type). See 3.3.3.4 Klixon.
frequency range within which this parameter
For the North American market: The
is active.
electronic overload functions provide class
Motor size
Change over
20 motor overload protection in accordance
0.25 kW-7.5 kW
<10 Hz
with NEC.
[0] * No
protection
Continuously overloaded motor, when no
warning or trip of the frequency converter is
required.
[1]
Thermistor
Activates a warning when the connected
warning
thermistor or KTY-sensor in the motor reacts
in the event of motor over-temperature.
[2]
Thermistor
Stops (trips) frequency converter when
trip
connected thermistor or KTY sensor in the
motor reacts in the event of motor overtemperature.
The thermistor cut-out value must be > 3
kΩ.
Integrate a thermistor (PTC sensor) in the
motor for winding protection.
[3]
Elec. OL
Calculates the load when set-up 1 is active
Warning 1
and activates a warning on the display when
the motor is overloaded. Program a warning
Illustration 3.5 Changeover
signal via one of the digital outputs.
[4]
3.3.2 F-1# Fundamental 1
Elec. OL Trip
Calculates the load when set-up 1 is active
1
and stops (trips) frequency converter when
the motor is overloaded. Program a warning
Parameters to configure drive electronic overload and
high/low speed limits.
signal via one of the digital outputs. The
signal appears in the event of a warning
and if the frequency converter trips (thermal
F-10 Electronic Overload
Option:
warning).
Function:
[5]
Thermal motor protection can be
implemented using a range of techniques:
•
[6]
Via a PTC sensor in the motor
Elec. OL Trip
2
windings connected to one of the
analog or digital inputs (F-12 Motor
Thermistor Input). See 3.3.3.1 PTC
Thermistor Connection.
•
Elec. OL
Warning 2
[7]
Elec. OL
Warning 3
[8]
Elec. OL Trip
3
Via a KTY sensor in the motor
[9]
winding connected to an analog
DET-618C
Elec. OL
Warning 4
33
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
F-10 Electronic Overload
Option:
Function:
[10] Elec. OL Trip
4
[20] ATEX Elec.
3 3
OL
Activates the thermal monitoring function
for Ex-e motors for ATEX. Enables H-94 ATEX
Using an analog input and 10 V as power supply:
Example: The frequency converter trips when the motor
temperature is too high.
Parameter set-up:
Set F-10 Electronic Overload to [2] Thermistor Trip
Set F-12 Motor Thermistor Input to [2] Analog Input 54
overload cur.lim. speed reduction, H-98 ATEX
overload interpol. points freq. and H-99 ATEX
overload interpol points current.
[21] Advanced
Elec. OL
3.3.3.1 PTC Thermistor Connection
Illustration 3.8 PTC Thermistor Connection - Analog Input
Input
Supply Voltage
Digital/analog
Threshold
Cut-out Values
Digital
10 V
< 800 Ω - > 2.7 kΩ
Analog
10 V
< 3.0 kΩ - > 3.0 kΩ
NOTE
Check that the chosen supply voltage follows the specification of the used thermistor element.
3.3.3.2 KTY Sensor Connection
Illustration 3.6 PTC Profile
Using a digital input and 10 V as power supply:
Example: The frequency converter trips when the motor
temperature is too high.
Parameter set-up:
Set F-10 Electronic Overload to [2] Thermistor Trip
Set F-12 Motor Thermistor Input to [6] Digital Input
KTY sensors are used especially in Permanent Magnet
Servo Motors (PM motors) for dynamic adjusting of motor
parameters as stator resistance (P-30 Stator Resistance (Rs))
for PM motors and also rotor resistance (P-31 Rotor
Resistance (Rr)) for asynchronous motors, depending on
winding temperature. The calculation is:
Rs = Rs20° C x (1 + αcu x ΔT ) Ω
αcu = 0.00393
KTY sensors can be used for motor protecting (H-97 KTY
Threshold level).
AF-650 GP can handle three types of KTY sensors, defined
in H-95 KTY Sensor Type. The actual sensor temperature can
be read out from DR-19 KTY sensor temperature.
Illustration 3.7 PTC Thermistor Connection - Digital Input
34
where
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.3.3.4 Klixon
The Klixon type thermal circuit breaker uses a KLIXON®
metal dish. At a predetermined overload, the heat caused
by the current through the disc causes a trip.
3 3
Using a digital input and 24 V as power supply:
Example: The frequency converter trips when the motor
temperature is too high
Parameter set-up:
Set F-10 Electronic Overload to [2] Thermistor Trip
Set F-12 Motor Thermistor Input to [6] Digital Input
Illustration 3.9 KTY Type Selection
Illustration 3.11 Thermistor Connection
KTY Sensor 1: 1 kΩ at 100 °C (e.g. Philips KTY 84-1)
KTY Sensor 2: 1 kΩ at 25 °C (e.g. Philips KTY 83-1)
KTY Sensor 3: 2 kΩ at 25 °C (e.g. Infineon KTY-10
F-11 Motor External Fan
Option:
NOTE
[0] * No
If the temperature of the motor is utilized through a
thermistor or KTY sensor the PELV is not complied with in
case of short circuits between motor windings and sensor.
In order to comply with PELV the sensor must be extra
isolated.
Function:
No external fan on motor, i.e. the motor is derated at
low speed.
[1]
Yes Applies an external motor fan (external ventilation), so
no derating of the motor is required at low speed. The
upper curve in graph above (fout = 1 x fM,N) is
followed if the motor current is lower than nominal
motor current (see P-03 Motor Current). If the motor
current exceeds nominal current, the operation time
3.3.3.3 Electronic Thermal Overload
still decreases as if no fan were installed.
The calculations estimate the need for a lower load at
lower speed due to less cooling from the fan incorporated
in the motor.
Illustration 3.10 Electronic Thermal Overload Profile
DET-618C
35
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
F-12 Motor Thermistor Input
F-17 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
Option:
Range:
Function:
3 3
Function:
NOTE
3600
[par. F-18 -
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
RPM*
60000 RPM]
Enter the maximum limit for motor
speed. The Motor Speed High Limit can
be set to correspond to the
manufacturer’s maximum rated motor
speed. The Motor Speed High Limit
Select the input to which the thermistor
must exceed the setting in F-18 Motor
(PTC sensor) should be connected. An
Speed Low Limit [RPM].
analog input option [1] or [2] cannot be
selected if the analog input is already in
NOTE
use as a reference source (selected in
Max. output frequency cannot exceed 10% of the carrier
frequency (F-26 Motor Noise (Carrier Freq)).
F-01 Frequency Setting 1, C-30 Frequency
Command 2 or C-34 Frequency Command
3).
F-18 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]
[0] * None
[1]
Range:
Analog Input 53
0 RPM*
Function:
[0 - par.
Enter the minimum limit for motor speed.
F-17 RPM]
The Motor Speed Low Limit can be set to
[2]
Analog Input 54
[3]
Digital input 18
[4]
Digital input 19
correspond to the manufacturer’s
[5]
Digital input 32
recommended minimum motor speed. The
[6]
Digital input 33
Motor Speed Low Limit must not exceed
the setting in F-17 Motor Speed High Limit
NOTE
[RPM].
Digital input should be set to [0] PNP - Active at 24 V in
E-0#.
3.3.4 F-2# Fundamental 2
F-15 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
Range:
60.0
Hz*
Parameters to configure drive Start Speed, Start Current,
Holding Time and Motor Noise (Carrier Frequency).
Function:
[par.
Enter the maximum limit for motor speed.
F-16 -
The Motor Speed High Limit can be set to
par. F-03
correspond to the manufacturer’s
Hz]
F-20 PM Start Mode
Option:
[0]
recommended maximum of the motor shaft.
The Motor Speed High Limit must exceed the
Function:
Rotor
Suitable for all applications where the motor
Detection
is known to be standing still when starting
in F-16 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]. Only
(e.g. conveyors, pumps and non wind milling
F-17 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM] or
fans).
F-15 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] will be
[1] * Parking
lower than 2-5% of the nominal speed) e.g.
the Main Menu and depending on default
due to fans with light wind milling, select [1]
settings dependant on global location.
Parking and adjust B-06 Parking Current and
B-07 Parking Time accordingly.
NOTE
Max. output frequency cannot exceed 10% of the carrier
frequency (F-26 Motor Noise (Carrier Freq)).
F-22 Start Speed [RPM]
Range:
0 RPM*
F-16 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
Range:
0 Hz*
F-15 Hz]
Set a motor start speed. After the start
signal, the output speed leaps to set value.
Set the start function in F-25 Start Function
to [3] Start speed cw, [4] Horizontal operation
or [5] Adv. Vector Control/Flux Clockwise, and
Enter the minimum limit for motor speed.
The Motor Speed Low Limit can be set to
set a start delay time in F-24 Holding Time.
correspond to the minimum output
frequency of the motor shaft. The Motor
Speed Low Limit must not exceed the
setting in F-15 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz].
36
Function:
[0 - 600
RPM]
Function:
[0 - par.
If the motor turns at a slight speed (i.e.
displayed depending on other parameters in
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
F-23 Start Speed [Hz]
F-25 Start Function
Range:
Option:
0 Hz*
Function:
[0 -
500.0 Hz]
Function:
This parameter can be used for hoist
corresponds to the setting of the start
applications (cone rotor). Set a motor start
current in F-29 Start Current.
speed. After the start signal, the output speed
[5]
leaps to set value. Set the start function in
F-25 Start Function to [3] Start speed cw, [4]
Adv. Vector
For the function described in F-22 Start Speed
Control/Flux
[RPM] only. The start current is calculated
Clockwise
automatically. This function uses the start
Horizontal operation or [5] Adv. Vector Control/
speed in the start delay time only. Regardless
Flux Clockwise, and set a start delay time in
F-24 Holding Time.
of the value set by the reference signal, the
output speed equals the setting of the start
speed in F-22 Start Speed [RPM]. [3] Start
F-24 Holding Time
Range:
0 s*
speed/current clockwise and [5] Advanced
Function:
Vector Control/Flux clockwise are typically
used in hoisting applications. [4] Start speed/
[0 - 25.5 s] This parameter refers to the start function
selected in F-25 Start Function.
Enter the time delay required before
current in reference direction is particularly
commencing acceleration.
horizontal movement.
used in applications with counterweight and
[6]
F-25 Start Function
Option:
functions, B-24 Stop Delay to B-28 Gain Boost
Factor. This parameter is only active when
Select the start function during start delay.
H-41 Motor Control Principle is set to [3] Flux
This parameter is linked to F-24 Holding Time.
w/ motor feedback.
Adv. Vector
DC Hold/
Energizes motor with a DC holding current
Control/Flux
delay time
(B-00 DC Hold Current) during the start delay
Counter-cw
time.
[1]
For utilizing mechanical brake control
Function:
[7]
[0]
Hoist Mech.
Brake Rel
F-26 Motor Noise (Carrier Freq)
DC Brake/
Energizes motor with a DC braking current
delay time
(B-01 DC Brake Current) during the start delay
time.
[2]
Coast/delay
Motor coasted during the start delay time
*
time
(inverter off).
[3]
Start speed
Only possible with Advanced Vector Control.
cw
Connect the function described in F-22 Start
355-1200 kW / 500-1600 HP at 690
Speed [RPM] and F-29 Start Current in the
V
Select the carrier frequency. Changing the switching frequency
can help to reduce acoustic noise from the motor. Default
depends on power size.
Option:
start delay time.
1.0 kHz
[1]
1.5 kHz
[2]
Regardless of the value applied by the
Function:
[0]
2.0 kHz
Default switching frequency for
250-800 kW / 350-1200 HP at
reference signal, the output speed applies
400/460 V and 37-315 kW / 50-450
the setting of the start speed in F-22 Start
HP at 690 V
Speed [RPM] or F-23 Start Speed [Hz] and the
output current corresponds to the setting of
[3]
2.5 kHz
the start current in F-29 Start Current. This
[4]
3.0 kHz
Default switching frequency for
function is typically used in hoisting
18.5-37 kW / 25-50 HP at 240 V and
applications without counterweight and
37-200 kW / 50-300 HP at 400/460
V
especially in applications with a Cone-motor,
where the start is clockwise, followed by
rotation in the reference direction.
[4]
Default switching frequency for
[5]
3.5 kHz
[6]
4.0 kHz
Default switching frequency for
Horizontal
Only possible with Advanced Vector Control.
5.5-15 kW / 7.5-20 HP at 240 V and
operation
For obtaining the function described in
11-30 kW / 15- 40 HP at 400/460 V
F-22 Start Speed [RPM] and F-29 Start Current
during the start delay time. The motor
rotates in the reference direction. If the
[7] *
5.0 kHz
Default switching frequency for
0.25-3.7 kW / 0.33-5 HP at 200 V
and 0.37-7.5 kW / 0.5-10 HP at
reference signal equals zero (0), F-22 Start
Speed [RPM] is ignored and the output speed
equals zero (0). The output current
DET-618C
400/460 V
[8]
6.0 kHz
37
3 3
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
F-26 Motor Noise (Carrier Freq)
F-38 Overmodulation
Select the carrier frequency. Changing the switching frequency
Option:
Function:
can help to reduce acoustic noise from the motor. Default
motor shaft. This feature may be useful for
depends on power size.
applications such as grinding machines.
Option:
Function:
[1] * On
Select [1] On to enable the overmodulation
[9]
7.0 kHz
function for the output voltage. This is the right
[10]
8.0 kHz
choice when it is required that the output voltage
[11]
10.0 kHz
is higher than 95% of the input voltage (typical
[12]
12.0kHz
when running over-synchronously). The output
[13]
14.0 kHz
voltage is increased according to the degree of
[14]
16.0kHz
overmodulation.
NOTE
F-27 Motor Tone Random
Option:
Overmodulation leads to increased torque
ripple as harmonics are increased.
Function:
[0] * Off No change of the acoustic motor switching noise.
[1]
On Transforms the acoustic motor switching noise from a
Control in FLUX mode provides an output current
clear ringing tone to a less noticeable ‘white’ noise.
of up to 98% of the input current, regardless of
This is achieved by slightly and randomly altering the
F-38 Overmodulation.
synchronism of the pulse width modulated output
[2]
phases.
3.3.6 F-4# Fundamental 4
F-28 Dead Time Compensation
Option:
Optimal
Function:
[0]
Off
No compensation.
[1] *
On
Activates dead time compensation.
Parameters to configure drive torque and current limits.
F-40 Torque Limiter (Driving)
Range:
Function:
F-29 Start Current
160.0 %*
Range:
Application
0 A*
Function:
[0 - par. Some motors, e.g. cone rotor motors, need extra
P-03 A]
current/starting speed to disengage the rotor. To
obtain this boost, set the required current in
F-29 Start Current. Set F-22 Start Speed [RPM]. Set
in F-24 Holding Time.
This parameter can be used for hoist
Parameters to configure drive Advanced Switching Pattern
and Overmodulation.
installation.
NOTE
Range:
100 %*
Function:
[0 - 1000.0 %] This function limits the torque on the
lation.
[0] * 60 AVM
NOTE
SFAVM
The torque limit reacts on the actual, non-filtrated torque,
including torque spikes. This is not the torque that is seen
from the keypad or the Fieldbus as that is filtered.
F-38 Overmodulation
Function:
Select [0] Off for no overmodulation of the output
voltage, in order to avoid torque ripple on the
38
Function:
shaft to protect the mechanical instal-
Select the switching pattern: 60° AVM or SFAVM.
Off
protect the mechanical
F-41 Torque Limiter (Braking)
F-37 Adv. Switching Pattern
[0]
torque on the shaft to
The torque limit reacts on the actual, non-filtrated torque,
including torque spikes. This is not the torque that is seen
from the keypad or the Fieldbus as that is filtered.
3.3.5 F-3# Fundamental 3
Option:
[Application
dependant]
NOTE
applications (cone rotor).
[1]
This function limits the
Changing F-40 Torque Limiter (Driving) when H-40 Configuration Mode is set to [0] Speed open loop, H-66 Min. Current
at Low Speed is automatically readjusted.
F-25 Start Function to [3] Start speed cw or [4]
Horizontal operation, and set a start delay time
Option:
dependent*
[0 - 1000.0 %]
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
F-43 Current Limit
Range:
160.0
[1.0 -
%*
F-51 Reference/Feedback Unit
Function:
1000.0 %]
Option:
This is a true current limit function that
[32]
kg/h
continues in the oversynchronous range,
[33]
t/min
however due to field weakening the
[34]
t/h
motor torque at current limit will drop
[40]
m/s
accordingly when the voltage increase
[41]
m/min
stops above the synchronised speed of
[45]
m
the motor.
3.3.7 F-5# Extended References
Parameters to configure drive min/max reference and
reference function.
F-50 Reference Range
Option:
°C
[70]
mbar
[71]
bar
[72]
Pa
[73]
kPa
[74]
m WG
[80]
kW
Function:
[121] gal/s
Select the range of the reference signal and the
[122] gal/min
feedback signal. Signal values can be positive
[123] gal/h
[124] CFM
limit may have a negative value, unless [1] Speed
closed loop control or [3] Process is selected in
[125] ft3/s
[126] ft3/min
H-40 Configuration Mode.
[127] ft3/h
Min -
Select the range of the reference signal and the
[130] lb/s
Max
feedback signal. Signal values can be positive
[131] lb/min
only, or positive and negative. The minimum
[132] lb/h
limit may have a negative value, unless [1] Speed
closed loop control or [3] Process is selected in
+Max
[140] ft/s
[141] ft/min
H-40 Configuration Mode.
[1] * -Max -
3 3
[120] GPM
only, or positive and negative. The minimum
[0]
[60]
Function:
[145] ft
For both positive and negative values (both
[150] lb ft
directions, relative to H-08 Reverse Lock).
[160] °F
[170] psi
F-51 Reference/Feedback Unit
[171] lb/in2
Option:
[172] in WG
Function:
Select the unit to be used in Process PID Control
[173] ft WG
references and feedbacks. H-40 Configuration
[180] HP
Mode must be either [3] Process or [8] Extended
F-52 Minimum Reference
PID Control.
Range:
[0] *
None
[1]
%
0 Reference-
RPM
FeedbackUnit*
[2]
Function:
[-999999.999 -
Enter the Minimum
par. F-53
Reference. The Minimum
ReferenceFeed-
Reference is the lowest
backUnit]
value obtainable by
[3]
Hz
[4]
Nm
[5]
PPM
[10]
1/min
[12]
Pulse/s
[20]
l/s
The Minimum Reference
[21]
l/min
unit matches:
[22]
l/h
[23]
m3/s
[24]
m3/min
[25]
m3/h
[30]
kg/s
[31]
kg/min
summing all references.
Minimum Reference is active
only when F-50 Reference
Range is set to [0] Min.- Max.
•
The choice of
configuration in
H-40 Configuration
Mode Configuration
Mode: for [1] Speed
DET-618C
39
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
F-52 Minimum Reference
Range:
F-62 Catch up/slow Down Value
Function:
•
3 3
Range:
closed loop, RPM;
extended functionality with the DigiPot function.
for [2] Torque, Nm.
See parameter group F-9# Digital Pot-Meter.
The unit selected
in F-51 Reference/
F-64 Preset Relative Reference
Feedback Unit.
Range:
0 %*
F-53 Maximum Reference
Range:
1500.000
[-100 100 %]
999999.999
Reference. The Maximum
backUnit*
ReferenceFeed-
Reference is the highest
backUnit]
value obtainable by
The actual reference, X, is increased or
decreased with the percentage Y, set in
actual reference Z. Actual reference (X) is the
sum of the inputs selected in F-01 Frequency
Enter the Maximum
ReferenceFeed-
Function:
F-64 Preset Relative Reference. This results in the
Function:
[par. F-52 -
Function:
Setting 1, C-30 Frequency Command 2,
C-34 Frequency Command 3 and O-02 Control
Word Source.
summing all references.
The Maximum Reference
unit matches:
•
The choice of
configuration in
H-40 Configuration
Illustration 3.12 Preset Relative Reference
Mode: for [1] Speed
closed loop, RPM;
for [2] Torque, Nm.
•
The unit selected
in F-50 Reference
Range.
F-54 Reference Function
Option:
[0] * Sum
Function:
Sums both external and preset reference
sources.
[1]
External/Preset Use either the preset or the external
reference source.
Illustration 3.13 Actual Reference
Shift between external and preset via a
command or a digital input.
F-68 Relative Scaling Reference Resource
3.3.8 F-6# References
Option:
Function:
NOTE
Parameters to configure drive to add or subtract a fixed
value to an input reference.
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
F-62 Catch up/slow Down Value
Range:
0 %*
Select a variable value to be added to the
Function:
[0 -
Enter a percentage (relative) value to be either
fixed value (defined in F-64 Preset Relative
100 %]
added to or deducted from the actual reference
Reference). The sum of the fixed and
for Catch up or Slow down respectively. If Catch
variable values (labelled Y in
up is selected via one of the digital inputs
Illustration 3.14) is multiplied with the actual
(E-01 Terminal 18 Digital Input to E-06 Terminal 33
reference (labelled X in Illustration 3.14).
Digital Input), the percentage (relative) value is
added to the total reference. If Slow down is
This product is then added to the actual
reference (X+X*Y/100) to give the resultant
selected via one of the digital inputs
actual reference.
(E-01 Terminal 18 Digital Input to E-06 Terminal 33
Digital Input), the percentage (relative) value is
deducted from the total reference. Obtain
40
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
F-68 Relative Scaling Reference Resource
F-92 Power Restore
Option:
Option:
Function:
Function:
[0] * Off Resets the Digital Pot-Meter reference to 0% after
power up.
[1]
On Restores the most recent Digital Pot-Meter reference at
power up.
Illustration 3.14 Resultant Actual Reference
F-93 Maximum Limit
Range:
[0] * No function
[1]
100 %*
Analog Input
Function:
[-200 - 200
%]
53
[2]
Analog Input
[7]
Frequency
the resultant reference. This is advisable if
the Digital Pot-Meter is used for fine
tuning of the resulting reference.
54
F-94 Minimum Limit
input 29
[8]
Set the maximum permissible value for
Range:
Frequency
input 33
-100 %*
[11] Local bus
Function:
[-200 - 200
%]
reference
Set the minimum permissible value for
the resultant reference. This is advisable
if the Digital Pot-Meter is used for fine
tuning of the resulting reference.
[20] Digital
Potentiometer
F-95 Accel/Decel Ramp Delay
[21] Analog input
X30-11
Range:
[22] Analog input
0*
X30-12
Function:
[0 - 0] Enter the delay required from activation of the
digital pot-meter function until the frequency
converter starts to ramp the reference. With a delay
3.3.9 F-9# Digital Potentiometer
of 0 ms, the reference starts to ramp as soon as
INCREASE/ DECREASE is activated. See also
F-91 Accel/Decel Time.
Parameters to configure drive digital pot-meter function.
F-90 Step Size
Range:
Function:
0.10 %*
[0.01 200 %]
Enter the increment size required for
INCREASE/DECREASE, as a percentage of
the synchronous motor speed, ns. If
INCREASE/DECREASE is activated the
resulting reference will be increased/
decreased by the amount set in this
parameter.
F-91 Accel/Decel Time
Range:
1 s*
[0 3600 s]
Function:
Enter the ramp time, i.e. the time for adjustment
of the reference from 0% to 100% of the
specified digital potentiometer function (Increase,
Decrease or Clear).
If Increase/ Decrease is activated for longer than
the ramp delay period specified in F-95 Accel/
Decel Ramp Delay the actual reference will be
acceled/deceled according to this ramp time. The
ramp time is defined as the time used to adjust
the reference by the step size specified in
F-90 Step Size.
DET-618C
41
3 3
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.4 E-## Digital In/Out
Parameter group related to the Digital Inputs/Outputs, additional accel/decel ramps, pulse inputs/outputs, and encoder
input.
3.4.1 E-0# Digital Inputs
Parameters to configure the Digital Inputs/Outputs and Safe Stop functions.
Parameters for configuring the input functions for the input terminals.
The digital inputs are used for selecting various functions in the frequency converter. All digital inputs can be set to the
following functions:
Digital input function
Select
Terminal
No operation
[0]
Reset
[1]
All *term 27, 32, 33
All
Coast inverse
[2]
All
Coast and reset inverse
[3]
All
Quick stop inverse
[4]
All
DC-brake inverse
[5]
All
Stop inverse
[6]
All
Start
[8]
All *term 18
Latched start
[9]
All
Reversing
[10]
All *term 19
Start reversing
[11]
All
Enable start forward
[12]
All
Enable start reverse
[13]
All
Jog
[14]
All *term 29
Preset reference on
[15]
All
Preset ref bit 0
[16]
All
Preset ref bit 1
[17]
All
Preset ref bit 2
[18]
All
Freeze reference
[19]
All
Freeze output
[20]
All
Speed up
[21]
All
Speed down
[22]
All
Set-up select bit 0
[23]
All
Set-up select bit 1
[24]
All
Precise stop inverse
[26]
18, 19
Precises start, stop
[27]
18, 19
Catch up
[28]
All
Slow down
[29]
All
Counter input
[30]
29, 33
Pulse input
[32]
29, 33
Ramp bit 0
[34]
All
Ramp bit 1
[35]
All
Mains failure inverse
[36]
All
Latched precise start
[40]
18, 19
Latched precise stop inverse
[41]
18, 19
DigiPot Increase
[55]
All
DigiPot Decrease
[56]
All
DigiPot Clear
[57]
All
Counter A (up)
[60]
29, 33
Counter A (down)
[61]
29, 33
Reset Counter A
[62]
All
42
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
Digital input function
Select
Terminal
Counter B (up)
[63]
29, 33
Counter B (down)
[64]
29, 33
Reset Counter B
[65]
All
Mech. Brake Feedb.
[70]
All
Mech. Brake Feedb. Inv.
[71]
All
PTC Card 1
[80]
All
3 3
Table 3.6
AF-650 GP standard terminals are 18, 19, 27, 29, 32 and 33. OPCGPIO General Purpose I/O Option Module terminals are
X30/2, X30/3 and X30/4.
Functions dedicated to only one digital input are stated in the associated parameter.
All digital inputs can be programmed to these functions:
[8]
Start
(Default Digital input 18): Select start for a
start/stop command. Logic ‘1’ = start, logic ‘0’
[0]
No
operation
[1]
Reset
= stop.
No reaction to signals transmitted to the
[9]
terminal.
Resets frequency converter after a TRIP/
Latched
The motor starts, if a pulse is applied for min.
start
2 ms. The motor stops when Stop inverse is
activated.
ALARM. Not all alarms can be reset.
[2]
Coast
inverse
[3]
Coast and
[10] Reversing
Coasting stop, inverted input (NC). The
frequency converter leaves the motor in free
mode. Logic ‘0’ => coasting stop.
Reset and coasting stop Inverted input (NC).
changes the direction of rotation. It does not
‘1’ to reverse. The reversing signal only
activate the start function. Select both
reset inverse Leaves motor in free mode and resets
[4]
frequency converter. Logic ‘0’ => coasting
directions in H-08 Reverse Lock. The function
stop and reset.
is not active in process closed loop.
[11] Start
Quick stop
Inverted input (NC). Generates a stop in
inverse
accordance with quick-stop ramp time set in
reversing
stops, the shaft is in free mode. Logic ‘0’ =>
inverse
[12] Enable start
forward
Quick-stop.
DC-brake
Inverted input for DC braking (NC). Stops
motor by energizing it with a DC current for
The function is only active when the value in
Disengages the counterclockwise movement
and allows for the clockwise direction.
Disengages the clockwise movement and
reverse
allows for the counterclockwise direction.
(Default Digital input 29): Use to activate jog
speed. See C-20 Jog Speed [Hz].
Current to B-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM].
[15] Preset
Shifts between external reference and preset
reference on reference. It is assumed that [1] External/preset
has been selected in F-54 Reference Function.
B-02 DC Braking Time is different from 0.
Logic ’0’ => DC braking.
Stop inverse
same wire. Signals on start are not allowed at
[13] Enable start
[14] Jog
a certain time period. See B-01 DC Brake
[6]
Used for start/stop and for reversing on the
the same time.
C-23 Quick Stop Decel Time. When motor
[5]
(Default Digital input 19). Change the
direction of motor shaft rotation. Select Logic
Logic '0' = external reference active; logic '1'
Stop Inverted function. Generates a stop
= one of the eight preset references is active.
function when the selected terminal goes
[16] Preset ref bit Preset ref. bit 0,1, and 2 enables a choice
from logical level ‘1’ to ‘0’. The stop is
0
performed according to the selected ramp
between one of the eight preset references
according to the table below.
time (F-08 Decel Time 1, E-11 Decel Time 2,
[17] Preset ref bit Same as Preset ref bit 0 [16].
E-13 Decel Time 3, E-15 Decel Time 4).
NOTE
1
When the frequency converter is at the
torque limit and has received a stop
command, it may not stop by itself. To
ensure that the frequency converter
stops, configure a digital output to [27]
Torque limit & stopand connect this
digital output to a digital input that is
configured as coast.
DET-618C
[18] Preset ref bit Same as Preset ref bit 0 [16].
2
43
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
Preset ref. bit
2
1
0
Sends an inverted stop signal when the
Preset ref. 0
0
0
0
Preset ref. 1
0
0
1
precise stop function is activated in
H-83 Precise Stop Function.
Preset ref. 2
0
1
0
Precise stop inverse function is available for
Preset ref. 3
0
1
1
Preset ref. 4
1
0
terminals 18 or 19.
[27] Precise start,
0
Preset ref. 5
1
0
1
Preset ref. 6
1
1
0
Preset ref. 7
1
1
1
stop
Use when Precise ramp stop [0] is selected in
H-83 Precise Stop Function.
Table 3.7
[19] Freeze
ref
Freezes the actual reference, which is now the
Illustration 3.15
point of enable/condition for Speed up and Speed
down to be used. If Speed up/down is used, the
speed change always follows ramp 2 (E-10 Accel
[28] Catch up
Time 2 and E-11 Decel Time 2) in the range 0 -
(relative) set in F-62 Catch up/slow Down
F-53 Maximum Reference.
[20] Freeze
output
Value.
Freezes the actual motor frequency (Hz), which is
[29] Slow down
now the point of enable/condition for Speed up
Value.
used, the speed change always follows ramp 2
[30] Counter
(E-10 Accel Time 2 and E-11 Decel Time 2) in the
input
range 0 - F-04 Base Frequency.
When Freeze output is active, the frequency
converter cannot be stopped via a low ‘start
[8]’ signal. Stop the frequency converter via a
terminal programmed for Coasting inverse [2]
or Coast and reset, inverse.
H-84 Precise Stop Counter Value.
[32] Pulse input
Use pulse sequence as either reference or
feedback. Scaling is done in parameter group
group E-6#.
[34] Ramp bit 0
Enables a choice between one of the 4 ramps
available, according to the table below.
of the up/down speed is desired (motor potentiometer). Activate this function by selecting either
[35] Ramp bit 1
Freeze reference or Freeze output. When Speed
Preset ramp bit
1
0
up/ down is activated for less than 400 msec. the
resulting reference will be increased/ decreased by
Ramp 1
0
0
Ramp 2
0
1
Ramp 3
1
0
Ramp 4
1
1
than 400 msec. the resulting reference will follow
the setting in accel/decel parameters.
Shut down
Catch up
Unchanged speed
0
0
Reduced by %-value
1
0
Increased by %-value
0
1
Reduced by %-value
1
1
Table 3.9
Table 3.8
[22] Speed down
Same as Speed up [21].
[23] Set-up select Select Set-up select bit 0 or Select Set-up
bit 0
select bit 1 to select one of the four set-ups.
Set K-10 Active Set-up to Multi Set-up.
[24] Set-up select Same as Set-up select bit 0 [23].
bit 1
[26] Precise stop
44
Function acts as Counter stop or speed
reset. The counter value must be set in
Select Speed up and Speed down if digital control
0.1 %. If Speed up/ down is activated for more
inv.
Precise stop function in H-83 Precise Stop
compensated counter stop with or without
NOTE
up
Reduces reference value by percentage
(relative) set in F-62 Catch up/slow Down
and Speed down to be used. If Speed up/down is
[21] Speed
Increases reference value by percentage
Prolongs stop signal to give a precise stop
independent of speed.
DET-618C
Same as Ramp bit 0.
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
[36] Mains failure
Activates SP-10 Line failure. Mains failure
E-02 Terminal 19 Digital Input
inverse
inverse is active in the Logic .0. situation.
Option: Function:
[41] Latched Precise
Stop inverse
Sends a latched stop signal when the
The options are the same as those listed for parameter
precise stop function is activated in
group E-0#.
H-83 Precise Stop Function. The Latched
Precise stop inverse function is available
for terminals 18 or 19.
[55] DigiPot
E-03 Terminal 27 Digital Input
INCREASE signal to the Digital Potenti-
Increase
The options are the same as those listed for parameter
ometer function described in parameter
group E-0#.
group F-9#
[56] DigiPot
Decrease
DECREASE signal to the Digital Potenti-
E-04 Terminal 29 Digital Input
ometer function described in parameter
Option: Function:
group F-9#
[57] DigiPot Clear
3 3
Option: Function:
The options are the same as those listed for parameter
Clears the Digital Potentiometer reference
group E-0#.
described in parameter group F-9#
[60] Counter A
[61] Counter A
[62] Reset Counter
(Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for
E-05 Terminal 32 Digital Input
increment counting in the LC counter.
Option: Function:
(Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for
The options are the same as those listed for parameter
decrement counting in the LC counter.
group E-0#.
Input for reset of counter A.
E-06 Terminal 33 Digital Input
A
[63] Counter B
[64] Counter B
Option: Function:
(Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for
increment counting in the LC counter.
The options are the same as those listed for parameter
(Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for
group E-0#.
decrement counting in the LC counter.
[65] Reset Counter
E-07 Terminal 37 Safe Stop
Input for reset of counter B.
Option:
B
[70] Mech. Brake
Brake feedback for hoisting applications
Feedback
[71] Mech. Brake
Feedback inv.
[80] PTC Card 1
Function:
[1] * Safe Stop
Coasts frequency converter when safe
Alarm
stop is activated. Manual reset from
keypad, digital input or Network.
Inverted brake feedback for hoisting
applications
[3]
All Digital Inputs can be set to PTC Card 1
Safe Stop
Coasts frequency converter when safe
Warning
stop is activated (term 37 off). When safe
[80]. However, only one Digital Input must
stop circuit is reestablished, the frequency
be set to this choice.
converter will continue without manual
reset.
E-00 Digital I/O Mode
Option:
Function:
NOTE
Digital inputs and programmed digital outputs are
pre-programmable for operation either in PNP or NPN
When Auto Reset/ Warning is selected the frequency
converter opens up for automatic restart.
systems.
[0] * PNP Action on positive directional pulses (↕). PNP systems
are pulled down to GND.
[1]
Function
No.
PTC
Relay
Safe Stop
[1]*
-
Safe Stop [A68]
[3]
-
Safe Stop [W68]
Alarm
NPN Action on negative directional pulses (↕). NPN
systems are pulled up to + 24 V, internally in the
Safe Stop
frequency converter.
Warning
Table 3.10 Overview of Functions, Alarms and Warnings
NOTE
Once this parameter has been changed, it must be
activated by performing a power cycle.
3.4.2 E-1# Additional Accel/Decel Ramps
Parameters to configure the Accel/Decel Ramps 2, 3, and 4.
E-01 Terminal 18 Digital Input
E-10 Accel Time 2
Option: Function:
The options are the same as those listed for parameter
group E-0#.
Range:
3.00
s*
DET-618C
Function:
[0.01 - Enter the accel time from 0 RPM to the rated
3600 s]
motor speed ns. Choose a accel time such that
45
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
E-10 Accel Time 2
E-15 Decel Time 4
Range:
Range:
Function:
the output current does not exceed the current
3.00
limit in F-43 Current Limit during ramping. The
s*
value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s in speed mode.
3 3
Function:
[0.01
ns to 0 RPM. Choose a decel time such that no
s]
over-voltage arises in the inverter due to
See decel time in E-11 Decel Time 2.
regenerative operation of the motor, and such
tacc s x ns RPM
Par . E − 10 =
ref RPM
that the generated current does not exceed the
current limit set in F-43 Current Limit. The value
0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s in speed mode. See
E-11 Decel Time 2
Range:
3.00
s*
Enter the decel time from the rated motor speed
- 3600
accel time in E-14 Accel Time 4.
Function:
[0.01
Par . E − 15 =
Enter the decel time from the rated motor speed
- 3600
ns to 0 RPM. Choose a decel time such that no
s]
over-voltage arises in the inverter due to
tdec s x ns RPM
ref RPM
3.4.3 E-2# Digital Output
regenerative operation of the motor, and such
that the generated current does not exceed the
Parameters to configure terminal 27 and 29 digital outputs
controlled by serial communications and to configure Relay
1 and Relay 2.
current limit set in F-43 Current Limit. The value
0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s in speed mode. See
accel time in E-10 Accel Time 2.
Par . E − 11 =
tdec s x ns RPM
ref RPM
E-12 Accel Time 3
Range:
Function:
3.00 s*
[0.01 3600 s]
Enter the accel time from 0 RPM to the rated
motor speed ns. Choose a accel time such
Parameters for configuring the output functions for the
output terminals. The 2 solid-state digital outputs are
common for terminals 27 and 29. Set the I/O function for
terminal 27 in E-51 Terminal 27 Mode, and set the I/O
function for terminal 29 in E-52 Terminal 29 Mode. These
parameters cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.
that the output current does not exceed the
current limit in F-43 Current Limit during
[0]
No operation
[1]
Control ready
outputs
ramping. The value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01
s in speed mode. See decel time in
[2]
Drive ready
s*
the control board.
Function:
[0.01
Enter the decel time from the rated motor speed
- 3600
ns to 0 RPM. Choose a decel time such that no
s]
over-voltage arises in the inverter due to
[3]
[4]
regenerative operation of the motor, and such
[5]
current limit set in F-43 Current Limit. The value
[6]
0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s in speed mode. See
accel time in E-12 Accel Time 3.
tdec s x ns RPM
ref RPM
3.00
s*
operation and is in Auto mode.
Enable / no
Ready for operation. No start or stop
warning
command is been given (start/disable).
Drive running
Motor is running.
Running / no
Output speed is higher than the speed
warning
set in H-81 Min Speed for Function at Stop
[RPM]. The motor is running and there
Run in range /
Motor is running within the programmed
no warning
current and speed ranges set in
H-70 Warning Current Low to
Function:
H-73 Warning Speed High. There are no
[0.01 - Enter the accel time from 0 RPM to the rated
3600 s]
warnings.
motor speed ns. Choose a accel time such that
[8]
the output current does not exceed the current
See decel time in E-15 Decel Time 4.
Par . E − 14 =
tacc s x ns RPM
ref RPM
Run on
Motor runs at reference speed.
reference / no
warning
limit in F-43 Current Limit during ramping. The
value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s in speed mode.
46
The frequency converter is ready for
remote control
are no warnings.
[7]
E-14 Accel Time 4
Range:
Drive ready /
There are no warnings.
that the generated current does not exceed the
Par . E − 13 =
The frequency converter is ready for
operation and applies a supply signal on
E-13 Decel Time 3
3.00
The control board receives supply
voltage.
E-13 Decel Time 3.
Range:
Default for all digital outputs and relay
[9]
Alarm
An alarm activates the output. There are
[10]
Alarm or
An alarm or a warning activates the
warning
output.
no warnings.
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
[11]
[12]
[13]
At torque limit
is a fault on the brake modules. Use the
(Driving) or F-41 has been exceeded.
output/relay to cut out the main voltage
from the frequency converter.
The motor current is outside the range
range
set in F-43 Current Limit.
Below current,
Motor current is lower than set in
Above current,
high
[15]
The torque limit set in F-40 Torque Limiter
Out of current
low
[14]
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
Out of range
[31]
Relay 123
[32]
Mechanical
Enables control of an external
brake control
mechanical brake, see description in
is selected in parameter group O-##.
H-70 Warning Current Low.
Motor current is higher than set in
H-71 Warning Current High.
Output frequency is outside the
[40]
Out of ref range Active when the actual speed is outside
[41]
Below reference Active when actual speed is below speed
settings in parameter H-72 to H-75.
Current Low and H-71 Warning Current
High.
[17]
[18]
Below speed,
Output speed is lower than the setting in
low
H-72 Warning Speed Low.
Above speed,
Output speed is higher than the setting
high
in H-73 Warning Speed High.
[45]
low
reference setting.
Above
Active when actual speed is above speed
reference high
reference setting.
Bus Ctrl
the event of bus time-out.
H-76 Warning Feedback Low and
Below feedback
Feedback is below the limit set in
low
H-76 Warning Feedback Low.
[46]
Bus Ctrl On at
Controls output via bus. The state of the
timeout
output is set in E-90 Digital & Relay Bus
Control. In the event of bus time-out the
output state is set high (On).
[20]
Above feedback Feedback is above the limit set in
high
H-77 Warning Feedback High.
[21]
Thermal
The thermal warning turns on when the
warning
temperature exceeds the limit in the
[47]
Bus Ctrl Off at
Controls output via bus. The state of the
timeout
output is set in E-90 Digital & Relay Bus
Control. In the event of bus time-out the
output state is set low (Off).
motor, the frequency converter, the
[22]
[23]
[24]
brake resistor, or the thermistor.
[55]
Pulse output
Ready, no
Frequency converter is ready for
[60]
Comparator 0
thermal
operation and there is no over-
Comparator 0 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output will go high. Otherwise, it will be
See parameter group LC-1#. If
warning
temperature warning.
Remote, ready,
Frequency converter is ready for
no thermal
operation and is in Auto mode. There is
warning
no over-temperature warning.
Comparator 1 is evaluated as TRUE, the
Ready, no
Frequency converter is ready for
output will go high. Otherwise, it will be
over-/ under
operation and the mains voltage is
voltage
[25]
Controls output via bus. The state of the
output is set in E-90 Digital & Relay Bus
Control. The output state is retained in
H-77 Warning Feedback High.
[19]
[42]
Out of feedback Feedback is outside the range set in
range
3 3
parameter group B-2# Mechanical Brake.
frequency range set in H-70 Warning
[16]
Relay is activated when Control Word [0]
Reverse
low.
[61]
Comparator 1
See parameter group LC-1#. If
low.
within the specified voltage range (see
[62]
Comparator 2
See parameter group LC-1#. If
General Specifications section in the
Comparator 2 is evaluated as TRUE, the
relevant Design Guide).
output will go high. Otherwise, it will be
low.
Reversing. Logic ‘1’ when CW rotation of
the motor. Logic ‘0’ when CCW rotation
[63]
Comparator 3
See parameter group LC-1#. If
the output will follow the reference.
Comparator 3 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output will go high. Otherwise, it will be
Active communication (no time-out) via
low.
of the motor. If the motor is not rotating
[26]
Bus OK
[27]
Torque limit
Use in performing a coasting stop and in
Comparator 4 is evaluated as TRUE, the
and stop
torque limit condition. If the frequency
output will go high. Otherwise, it will be
[64]
the serial communication port.
Comparator 4
low.
converter has received a stop signal and
is at the torque limit, the signal is Logic
[28]
[29]
[30]
See parameter group LC-1#. If
[65]
Comparator 5
See parameter group LC-1#. If
‘0’.
Comparator 5 is evaluated as TRUE, the
Brake, no brake
Brake is active and there are no
output will go high. Otherwise, it will be
warning
warnings.
Brake ready, no
Brake is ready for operation and there
fault
are no faults.
Brake fault
Output is Logic ‘1’ when the brake IGBT
(IGBT)
low.
[70]
Logic Rule 0
See parameter group LC-4#. If Logic Rule
0 is evaluated as TRUE, the output will
go high. Otherwise, it will be low.
[71]
is short-circuited. Use this function to
protect the frequency converter if there
Logic Rule 1
See parameter group LC-4#. If Logic Rule
1 is evaluated as TRUE, the output will
go high. Otherwise, it will be low.
DET-618C
47
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
[72]
Logic Rule 2
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
See parameter group LC-4#. If Logic Rule
[122] No alarm
Output is high when no alarm is present.
2 is evaluated as TRUE, the output will
[123] Start command
Output is high when there is an active
go high. Otherwise, it will be low.
[73]
Logic Rule 3
active
connection or [Hand] or [Auto]), and no
3 is evaluated as TRUE, the output will
Stop or Start command is active.
go high. Otherwise, it will be low.
[74]
Logic Rule 4
Start command (i.e. via digital input bus
See parameter group LC-4#. If Logic Rule
[124] Running reverse Output is high when the frequency
See parameter group LC-4#. If Logic Rule
converter is running counter clockwise
4 is evaluated as TRUE, the output will
(the logical product of the status bits
go high. Otherwise, it will be low.
[75]
Logic Rule 5
‘running’ AND ‘reverse’).
See parameter group LC-4#. If Logic Rule
[125] Drive in hand
5 is evaluated as TRUE, the output will
Output is high when the frequency
mode
converter is in [Hand mode] (as indicated
go high. Otherwise, it will be low.
[80]
Logic Controller See LC-52 Logic Controller Action. The
Digital Output
output will go high whenever the Logic
A
Controller Action [38] Set dig. out. A high
is executed. The output will go low
[81]
Output is high when the frequency
mode
converter is in [Hand] mode (as indicated
by the LED light above [Auto]).
whenever the Logic Controller Action
E-20 Terminal 27 Digital Output
[32] Set dig. out. A low is executed.
Choices are described under E-2#
Logic Controller See LC-52 Logic Controller Action. The
Digital Output B input will go high whenever the Logic
Controller Action [39] Set dig. out. A high
is executed. The input will go low
whenever the Logic Controller Action
[33] Set dig. out. A low is executed.
[82]
by the LED light above [Hand]).
[126] Drive in auto
Logic Controller See LC-52 Logic Controller Action. The
Digital Output
input will go high whenever the Logic
C
Controller Action [40] Set dig. out. A high
E-21 Terminal 29 Digital Output
Choices are described under E-2#
E-24 Function Relay
Array [9]
(Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 3 [2], Relay 4 [3], Relay 5 [4], Relay
6 [5], Relay 6 [5], Relay 7 [6], Relay 8 [7], Relay 9 [8])
Choices are described under E-2#
is executed. The input will go low
[83]
[84]
whenever the Logic Controller Action
E-26 On Delay, Relay
[34] Set dig. out. A low is executed.
Array [9], (Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 3 [2], Relay 4 [3], Relay 5
Logic Controller See LC-52 Logic Controller Action. The
Digital Output
input will go high whenever the Logic
D
Controller Action [41] Set dig. out. A high
[4], Relay 6 [5], Relay 7 [6], Relay 8 [7], Relay 9 [8])
Range:
0.01 s*
Function:
[0.01 - 600 s] Enter the delay of the relay cut-in time.
is executed. The input will go low
The relay will only cut in if the condition
whenever the Logic Controller Action
in E-24 Function Relay is uninterrupted
[35] Set dig. out. A low is executed.
during the specified time. Select one of
Logic Controller See LC-52 Logic Controller Action. The
available mechanical relays and OPCRLY
Digital Output E input will go high whenever the Logic
Relay Option Module in an array
Controller Action [42] Set dig. out. A high
function. See E-24 Function Relay.
is executed. The input will go low
whenever the Logic Controller Action
[36] Set dig. out. A low is executed.
[85]
Logic Controller See LC-52 Logic Controller Action. The
Digital Output F input will go high whenever the Logic
Controller Action [43] Set dig. out. A high
is executed. The input will go low
whenever the Logic Controller Action
[37] Set dig. out. A low is executed.
[120] Local reference
active
Output is high when F-02 Operation
Method = [2] Local or when
F-02 Operation Method = [0] Linked to
hand auto at the same time as the
keypad is in Hand mode.
[121] Remote
reference active
Output is high when F-02 Operation
Method = [1] Remote or [0] Linked to
Illustration 3.16 On Delay, Relay
hand/auto while the keypad is in [Auto]
mode.
48
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
E-27 Off Delay, Relay
E-56 Term X30/6 Digi Out (OPCGPIO)
Array[2]: Relay1[0], Relay2[1]
This parameter is active when OPCGPIO General Purpose I/O
Range:
Option Module is mounted in the frequency converter. Functions
0.01 s*
Function:
are described under E-2# Digital Outputs.
[0.01 - 600 s] Enter the delay of the relay cut-out time.
Select one of available mechanical relays
and OPCRLY Relay Option Module in an
E-57 Term X30/7 Digi Out (OPCGPIO)
3 3
This parameter is active when OPCGPIO General Purpose I/O
array function. See E-24 Function Relay.
Option Module is mounted in the frequency converter. Functions
are described under E-2# Digital Outputs.
3.4.4 E-6# Pulse Input
Parameters to configure terminal 29 and 33 as Pulse Train
inputs.
E-60 Term. 29 Low Frequency
Range:
Illustration 3.17 Off Delay, Relay
100 Hz*
Function:
[0 - 110000
Hz]
Enter the low frequency limit
corresponding to the low motor shaft
speed (i.e. low reference value) in
If the selected Event condition changes before the on- or
off delay timer expires, the relay output is unaffected.
E-51 Terminal 27 Mode
Option:
E-62 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value.
Refer to the diagram in this section.
E-61 Term. 29 High Frequency
Function:
Range:
NOTE
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the
motor is running.
100 Hz*
Function:
[0 - 110000
Hz]
Enter the high frequency limit
corresponding to the high motor shaft
speed (i.e. high reference value) in
E-63 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value..
[0] * Input
[1]
Defines terminal 27 as a digital input.
E-62 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
Output Defines terminal 27 as a digital output.
Range:
E-52 Terminal 29 Mode
0 ReferenceFeed-
Option:
backUnit*
[0] *
[1]
Function:
Input
Output
Defines terminal 29 as a digital input.
Defines terminal 29 as a digital output.
Function:
[-999999.999 -
Enter the low reference
999999.999
value limit for the motor
ReferenceFeed-
shaft speed [RPM]. This
backUnit]
is also the lowest
feedback value, see also
E-67 Term. 33 Low Ref./
E-53 Terminal X30/2 Digital Input
Feedb. Value. Set
terminal 29 to digital
Option: Function:
The options are the same as listed for parameter group
input (E-52 Terminal 29
E-0#.
Mode = [0] input
(default) and
E-54 Terminal X30/3 Digital Input
E-04 Terminal 29 Digital
Option: Function:
Input = applicable
value).
The options are the same as listed for parameter group
E-0#.
E-63 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value
E-55 Terminal X30/4 Digital Input
Range:
Option: Function:
1500.000 Referen-
The options are the same as listed for parameter group
E-0#.
ceFeedbackUnit*
Function:
[-999999.999 -
Enter the high reference
999999.999
value [RPM] for the
ReferenceFeedbackUnit]
motor shaft speed and
the high feedback value,
see also E-68 Term. 33
High Ref./Feedb. Value.
DET-618C
49
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
E-63 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value
E-69 Pulse Filter Time Constant #33
Range:
Range:
Function:
3 3
Select terminal 29 as a
and dampens oscillations on the feedback
digital input
signal from the control.
(E-52 Terminal 29 Mode =
This is an advantage, e.g. if there is a
[0] input (default) and
E-04 Terminal 29 Digital
great amount on noise in the system.
Input = applicable
3.4.5 E-7# Pulse Output
value).
Parameters to configure terminal 27 and 29 as Pulse Train
Outputs and to configure Encoder input terminals 32 and
33.
E-64 Pulse Filter Time Constant #29
Range:
100 ms*
Function:
[1 - 1000
ms]
Function:
Enter the pulse filter time constant. The
E-70 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable
pulse filter dampens oscillations of the
feedback signal, which is an advantage if
Option:
there is a lot of noise in the system. A
[0] *
Function:
No operation
high time constant value results in better
dampening but also increases the time
delay through the filter.
100 Hz*
Hz]
Bus ctrl.
[48]
Bus ctrl., timeout
[101] Reference
Function:
[0 - 110000
[45]
[100] Output frequency
E-65 Term. 33 Low Frequency
Range:
Select the desired display output for
terminal 27.
[102] Feedback
Enter the low frequency
[103] Motor Current
corresponding to the low motor shaft
[104] Torque rel to limit
speed (i.e. low reference value) in
[105] Torq relate to rated
E-67 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value.
[106] Power
E-66 Term. 33 High Frequency
[107] Speed
Range:
[108] Torque
100 Hz*
Function:
[0 - 110000
Hz]
[109] Max Out Freq
Enter the high frequency
corresponding to the high motor shaft
speed (i.e. high reference value) in
E-72 Pulse Output Max Freq #27
E-68 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value.
Range:
5000 Hz*
E-67 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
Range:
0*
[119] Torque % lim
Function:
[0 - 32000 Hz] Set the maximum frequency for
terminal 27, corresponding to the
Function:
[-999999.999 999999.999]
output variable selected in
Enter the low reference value [RPM]
E-70 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable.
for the motor shaft speed. This is also
the low feedback value, see also
E-73 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable
E-62 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value.
Option:
[0] *
E-68 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value
Range:
No operation
terminal 29.
Function:
1500.000 ReferenceFeedbackUnit*
[-999999.999 -
Enter the high
[45]
Bus ctrl.
Bus ctrl., timeout
999999.999
reference value
[48]
ReferenceFeed-
[RPM] for the motor
[100] Output frequency
backUnit]
shaft speed. See
[101] Reference
also E-63 Term. 29
[102] Feedback
High Ref./Feedb.
[103] Motor Current
Value.
[104] Torque rel to limit
[105] Torq relate to rated
E-69 Pulse Filter Time Constant #33
[106] Power
Range:
[107] Speed
100 ms*
Function:
[1 - 1000
ms]
50
Function:
Select the desired display output for
Enter the pulse filter time constant. The
[108] Torque
low-pass filter reduces the influence on
[109] Max Out Freq
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.4.7 E-9# Bus Controlled
E-73 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable
Option:
Function:
Parameters to configure digital, relay and pulse train
outputs to be controlled by the serial communications.
[119] Torque % lim
E-76 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output Variable
E-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control
Select the variable for read-out on terminal X30/6.
Range:
This parameter is active when the General Purpose I/O Option
0*
Module (OPCGPIO) is installed in the frequency converter.
Option:
digital outputs and relays that is
controlled by bus.
Function:
[0] *
No operation
A logical '1' indicates that the output is
[45]
Bus ctrl.
[48]
Bus ctrl., timeout
high or active.
A logical '0' indicates that the output is
[100]
Output frequency
low or inactive.
[101]
Reference
[102]
Feedback
Bit 0
[103]
Motor Current
Bit 1
Digital Output Terminal 29
[104]
Torque rel to limit
Bit 2
Digital Output Terminal X 30/6
[105]
Torq relate to rated
Bit 3
Digital Output Terminal X 30/7
[106]
Power
Bit 4
Relay 1 output terminal
[107]
Speed
Bit 5
Relay 2 output terminal
[108]
Torque
Bit 6
Option B Relay 1 output terminal
[109]
Max Out Freq
Bit 7
Option B Relay 2 output terminal
[119]
Torque % lim
Bit 8
Option B Relay 3 output terminal
Bit 9-31
Reserved for future terminals
E-78 Pulse Output Max Freq #X30/6
Range:
Function:
5000 Hz*
3 3
Function:
[0 - 2147483647] This parameter holds the state of the
Digital Output Terminal 27
Table 3.11
[0 - 32000 Hz]
E-93 Pulse Out #27 Bus Control
3.4.6 E-8# 24 V Encoder Input
Range:
0 %*
Parameters to configure the Encoder outputs.
output terminal 27 when the terminal is
configured as [45] Bus Controlled in
E-80 Term 32/33 Pulses Per Revolution
Range:
1024*
E-70 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable.
Function:
[1 - 4096] Set the encoder pulses per revolution on the
motor shaft. Read the correct value from the
encoder.
E-94 Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset
Range:
0 %*
Option:
output terminal 27 when the terminal is
configured as [48] Bus Ctrl Timeout in
Function:
E-70 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable and a
time-out is detected.
NOTE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
E-95 Pulse Out #29 Bus Control
Range:
Change the detected encoder rotation
[0] * Clockwise
Function:
[0 - 100 %] Set the output frequency transferred to the
E-81 Term 32/33 Encoder Direction
0 %*
Function:
[0 - 100 %] Set the output frequency transferred to the
direction without changing the wiring to
output terminal 29 when the terminal is
the encoder.
configured as [45] Bus Controlled in
E-73 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable.
Sets channel A 90° (electrical degrees)
behind channel B upon clockwise rotation
of the encoder shaft.
[1]
Function:
[0 - 100 %] Set the output frequency transferred to the
E-96 Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset
Range:
Counter
Sets channel A 90° (electrical degrees)
clockwise
ahead of channel B upon clockwise rotation
0 %*
Function:
[0 - 100 %] Set the output frequency transferred to the
output terminal 29 when the terminal is
of the encoder shaft.
DET-618C
51
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
E-96 Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset
Range:
Function:
configured as [48] Bus Ctrl Timeout in
E-73 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable. And a
time-out is detected.
E-97 Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control
Range:
0 %*
Function:
[0 - 100 %] Set the output frequency transferred to the
output terminal X30/6 when the terminal is
configured as [45] Bus ctrl. in E-76 Terminal
X30/6 Pulse Output Variable.
E-98 Pulse Out #X30/6 Timeout Preset
Range:
0 %*
Function:
[0 - 100 %] Set the output frequency transferred to the
output terminal X30/6 when the terminal is
configured as [48] Bus Ctrl Timeout in
E-76 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output Variable.
And a time-out is detected.
52
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.5 C-## Frequency Control Functions
C-05 Multi-step Frequency 1 - 8
Array [8]
Parameter group related to the Jump Frequencies, Multistep Frequencies, Job set-up, and Frequency Settings 2
and 3.
Range: 0-7
Range:
Function:
from 0 (F-52 Minimum Reference) is
programmed, the preset reference is calculated
3.5.1 C-0# Frequency Control Functions
as a percentage of the full reference range, i.e.
on the basis of the difference between RefMAX
Parameters to configure Jump Frequencies 1, 2, 3, and 4,
and Multi-step Frequencies 1 through 8.
and RefMIN. Afterwards, the value is added to
RefMIN. When using preset references, select
C-01 Jump Frequency From [Hz]
Preset ref. bit 0/1/2 [16], [17] or [18] for the
Array [4]
corresponding digital inputs in parameter
Range:
0 Hz*
group E-##.
Function:
[0 - par. F-15
Hz]
Some systems call for avoiding certain
output speeds due to resonance
problems in the system. Enter the lower
limits of the speeds to be avoided.
C-02 Jump Speed From [RPM]
Array [4]
Range:
Function:
0 RPM*
[0 - par. F-17
RPM]
Some systems call for avoiding certain
output speeds due to resonance
problems in the system. Enter the
Illustration 3.18 Preset Reference
lower limits of the speeds to be
avoided.
C-03 Jump Speed To [RPM]
Preset ref. bit
2
1
0
Array [4]
Preset ref. 0
0
0
0
Preset ref. 1
0
0
1
Preset ref. 2
0
1
0
Preset ref. 3
0
1
1
Preset ref. 4
1
0
0
Preset ref. 5
1
0
1
Preset ref. 6
1
1
0
Preset ref. 7
1
1
1
Range:
Function:
0 RPM*
[0 - par. F-17
RPM]
Some systems call for avoiding certain
output speeds due to resonance
problems in the system. Enter the
upper limits of the speeds to be
avoided.
C-04 Jump Frequency To [Hz]
Table 3.12 Preset Ref. Bit
Array [4]
Range:
0 Hz*
Function:
[0 - par. F-15
Hz]
3.5.2 C-2# Jog Set-Up
Some systems call for avoiding certain
output speeds due to resonance
problems in the system. Enter the upper
Parameters to configure Jog Speed, Jog Accel/Decel Time
and Quick Stop Decel Time.
limits of the speeds to be avoided.
C-20 Jog Speed [Hz]
C-05 Multi-step Frequency 1 - 8
Range:
0 Hz*
Array [8]
Hz]
Range: 0-7
Range:
0 %*
[-100 100 %]
Function:
[0 - par. F-15 The jog speed is a fixed output speed at
which the frequency converter is running
when the jog function is activated.
See also C-22 Jog Accel/Decel Time.
Function:
Enter up to eight different preset references
(0-7) in this parameter, using array
programming. The preset reference is stated as
a percentage of the value RefMAX
(F-53 Maximum Reference) If a RefMIN different
DET-618C
53
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
C-21 Jog Speed [RPM]
C-24 Quick Stop Ramp Type
Range:
Select the ramp type, depending on requirements for
Function:
150
RPM*
[0 - par.
4-13 RPM]
3 3
Enter a value for the jog speed nJOG,
acceleration and deceleration. A linear ramp will give constant
which is a fixed output speed. The
acceleration during ramping. An S-ramp will give non-linear
frequency converter runs at this speed
acceleration, compensating for jerk in the application.
when the jog function is activated. The
Option:
Function:
maximum limit is defined in F-17 Motor
[0] *
Speed High Limit [RPM].
[1]
S-ramp Const Jerk
[2]
S-ramp Const Time
See also C-22 Jog Accel/Decel Time.
Linear
C-22 Jog Accel/Decel Time
C-25 Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start
Range:
Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down time (C-23 Quick
3.00 s*
Function:
[0.01 3600 s]
Enter the jog ramp time, i.e. the acceleration/
Stop Decel Time) where the deceleration torque increases. The
deceleration time between 0 RPM and the
larger the percentage value, the greater the jerk compensation
rated motor frequency ns. Ensure that the
achieved, and thus the lower the torque jerks in the application.
resultant output current required for the given
Range:
jog ramp time does not exceed the current
50 %*
Function:
[1 - 99 %]
limit in F-43 Current Limit. The jog ramp time
starts upon activation of a jog signal via the
C-26 Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End
keypad, a selected digital input, or the serial
Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down time (C-23 Quick
communication port. When jog state is
disabled then the normal ramping times are
Stop Decel Time) where the deceleration torque decreases. The
larger the percentage value, the greater the jerk compensation
valid.
achieved, and thus the lower the torque jerks in the application.
Range:
50 %*
Function:
[1 - 99 %]
Parameters to configure Frequency Settings 2 and 3.
C-30 Frequency Command 2
Option:
Function:
Select the reference input to be
used for the second reference
signal. F-01 Frequency Setting 1,
C-30 Frequency Command 2 and
C-34 Frequency Command 3 define
up to three different reference
signals. The sum of these reference
Illustration 3.19 Jog Ramp Time
signals defines the actual reference.
Par . C − 22 =
tjog s x ns RPM
Δ log speed ( par . C − 21) RPM
C-23 Quick Stop Decel Time
Range:
3.00 s*
Function:
[0.01 3600 s]
Enter the quick–stop decel time from the
[0]
No function
[1]
Analog Input 53
[2]
Analog Input 54
[7]
Frequency input 29
[8]
Frequency input 33
[11]
Local bus reference
synchronous motor speed to 0 RPM. Ensure
[20] * Digital Potentiometer
that no resultant over-voltage will arise in the
[21]
Analog input X30-11
[22]
Analog input X30-12
inverter due to regenerative operation of the
motor required to achieve the given decel
time. Ensure also that the generated current
C-34 Frequency Command 3
required to achieve the given decel time does
Option:
not exceed the current limit (set in
Function:
Select the reference input to be
F-43 Current Limit). Quick-stop is activated by
used for the third reference signal.
means of a signal on a selected digital input,
or via the serial communication port.
F-01 Frequency Setting 1,
C-30 Frequency Command 2 and
C-34 Frequency Command 3 define
54
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
C-34 Frequency Command 3
Option:
Function:
up to three different reference
signals. The sum of these reference
signals defines the actual reference.
[0]
No function
[1]
Analog Input 53
[2]
Analog Input 54
[7]
Frequency input 29
[8]
Frequency input 33
3 3
[11] * Local bus reference
[20]
Digital Potentiometer
[21]
Analog input X30-11
[22]
Analog input X30-12
[29]
Analog Input X48/2
DET-618C
55
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.6 P-## Motor Data
P-04 Auto Tune
Parameter group related to setting motor data in the drive.
Option:
Function:
(P-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to P-35 Main
Reactance (Xh)) at motor standstill.
3.6.1 P-0# Motor Data
Activate the Auto Tune function by pressing
[Hand] after selecting [1] or [2] Reduced Auto
Parameters to configure Motor, Auto Tuning and Slip
Compensation.
Tune. After a normal sequence, the display will
read: "Press [OK] to finish Auto Tune". After
P-01 Motor Poles
Range:
4*
pressing the [OK] key the frequency converter
is ready for operation.
Function:
[2 - 100]
Enter the number of motor poles.
[0] * Off
[1]
Poles
2
Full Auto
Performs Auto Tune of the stator resistance RS,
Tune
the rotor resistance Rr, the stator leakage
~nn@ 50 Hz
~nn@ 60 Hz
2700-2880
3250-3460
reactance X1, the rotor leakage reactance X2
and the main reactance Xh. Do not select this
4
1350-1450
1625-1730
6
700-960
840-1153
option if an LC filter is used between the
frequency converter and the motor.
[2]
Table 3.13
Table 3.15 shows the number of poles for normal speed
ranges of various motor types. Define motors designed for
other frequencies separately. The motor pole value is
always an even number, because it refers to the total
number of poles, not pairs of poles. The frequency
converter creates the initial setting of P-01 Motor Poles
based on F-04 Base Frequency and P-06 Base Speed.
resistance Rs in the system only.
•
For the best results run Auto Tune on a cold
motor.
•
Auto Tune cannot be performed while the motor
is running.
•
Auto Tune cannot be performed on permanent
magnet motors.
Function:
4.00
hp*
Performs a reduced Auto Tune of the stator
Auto Tune
Note:
P-02 Motor Power [HP]
Range:
Reduced
[0.09 3000.00 hp]
Enter the nominal motor power in HP
NOTE
according to the motor nameplate data.
It is important to set motor parameters F-04, F-05, and
P-02 to P-08 correctly, since these form part of the Auto
Tune algorithm. An Auto Tune should be performed to
achieve optimum dynamic motor performance. It may take
up to 10 min, depending on the power rating of the
motor.
The default value corresponds to the
nominal rated output of the unit. This
parameter is visible in keypad if
K-03 Regional Settings is [1] US
P-03 Motor Current
Range:
7.20 A*
Function:
[0.10 - 10000.00
A]
Enter the nominal motor current
calculating torque, motor protection
etc.
P-04 Auto Tune
Function:
NOTE
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running.
The Auto Tune function optimises dynamic
motor performance by automatically
optimising the advanced motor parameters
56
Avoid generating external torque during Auto Tune.
value from the motor nameplate
data. The data are used for
Option:
NOTE
NOTE
If one of the settings in parameters F-04, F-05, or P-02 to
P-08 is changed, P-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to P-01 Motor
Poles, the advanced motor parameters, will return to
default setting.
NOTE
Auto Tune will work problem-free on 1 motor size down,
typically work on 2 motor sizes down, rarely work on 3
sizes down and never work on 4 sizes down. Keep in mind
that the accuracy of the measured motor data will be
poorer when operating on motors smaller than nominal
drive size.
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
P-05 Motor Cont. Rated Torque
NOTE
Range:
P-10 Slip Compensation Time Constant will not have effect
when P-20 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non salient SPM.
0.1 Nm*
Function:
[0.1 -
Enter the value from the motor nameplate
10000 Nm]
data. The default value corresponds to the
nominal rated output. This parameter is
3.6.2 P-2# Motor Selection
3 3
available when P-20 Motor Construction is
set to [1] PM, non salient SPM, i.e. the
parameter is valid for PM and non-salient
Parameters to configure the drive to work with
Asynchronous AC Motor or Permanent Magnet Motor
SPM motors only.
P-20 Motor Construction
Option:
P-06 Base Speed
Range:
Select the motor design type.
Function:
1420
RPM*
Function:
[10 - 60000
RPM]
Enter the nominal motor speed value
from the motor nameplate data. The
[0] * Asynchron
For asynchronous motors.
[1]
PM, non salient
For salient or non-salient PM motors.
SPM
PM motors are divided into two groups,
data are used for calculating motor
compensations. nm,n = ns - nslip.
with either surface mounted (non salient)
or interior (salient) magnets.
P-07 Motor Power [kW]
Range:
Function:
4.00
[0.09 -
kW*
3000.00
kW]
P-24 Damping Gain
NOTE
Range:
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
140
%*
Function:
[0 -
The damping gain will stabilize the PM machine
250 %] in order to run the PM machine smooth and
stable. The value of Damping gain will control
Enter the nominal motor power in kW
the dynamic performance of the PM machine.
according to the motor nameplate data.
High damping gain will give high dynamic
The default value corresponds to the
nominal rated output of the unit.
performance and low damping gain will give low
This parameter is visible in keypad if
is related to the machine data and load type. If
K-03 Regional Settings is [0] International.
the damping gain is too high or low the control
NOTE
will become unstable.
dynamic performance. The dynamic performance
Four sizes down, one size up from
nominal unit rating.
P-25 Low Speed Filter Time Const.
Range:
0.01 s*
Function:
[0.01 - 20 s] This time constant is used below 10%
P-09 Slip Compensation
rated speed. Obtain quick control through
Range:
a short damping time constant. However,
100
%*
Function:
[-500 500 %]
if this value is too short, the control gets
Enter the % value for slip compensation, to
unstable.
compensate for tolerances in the value of nM,N.
Slip compensation is calculated automatically,
i.e. on the basis of the rated motor speed nM,N.
This function is not active when H-40 Configuration Mode is set to [1] Speed closed loop or
P-26 High Speed Filter Time Const.
Range:
0.01 s*
Function:
[0.01 - 20 s] This time constant is used above 10%
[2] Torque Torque control with speed feedback
rated speed. Obtain quick control through
or when H-41 Motor Control Principle is set to
a short damping time constant. However,
if this value is too short, the control gets
[0] U/f special motor mode.
unstable.
P-10 Slip Compensation Time Constant
Range:
0.10 s*
P-27 Voltage filter time const.
Function:
[0.05 - 5 s] Enter the slip compensation reaction speed.
A high value results in slow reaction, and a
low value results in quick reaction. If lowfrequency resonance problems arise, use a
longer time setting.
DET-618C
Range:
0.001 s*
Function:
[0.001 - 1 s] Reduces the influence of high frequency
ripple and system resonance in the
calculation of supply voltage. Without
this filter, the ripples in the currents can
57
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
P-27 Voltage filter time const.
P-30 Stator Resistance (Rs)
Range:
Range:
Function:
distort the calculated voltage and affect
1.4000
the stability of the system.
Ohm*
Function:
[0.0140 -
Set the line to common stator resistance
140.0000
value. Enter the value from a motor data
Ohm]
sheet or perform an Auto Tune on a
cold motor.
3.6.3 P-3# Adv. Motor Data
NOTE
For PM motors:
Auto Tune is not available.
If only line-line data are available,
divide the line-line value by 2 to
achieve the line to common
(starpoint) value. Alternatively
measure the value with an
ohmmeter, this also takes the
resistance of the cable into account.
Divide the measured value by 2 and
enter the result.
Parameters for advanced motor data. The motor data in
P-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to P-39 Motor Poles must match
the relevant motor in order to run the motor optimally.
The default settings are figures based on common motor
parameter values from normal standard motors. If the
motor parameters are not set correctly, a malfunction of
the frequency converter system may occur. If the motor
data is not known, running an Auto Tune is recommended.
See the Auto Tune section. The Auto Tune sequence will
adjust all motor parameters except the moment of inertia
of the rotor and the iron loss resistance (P-36 Iron Loss
Resistance (Rfe)).
P-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr)
Range:
1.0000
Ohm*
Function:
[0.0100 100.0000
Ohm]
Fine-tuning Rr will improve shaft
performance. Set the rotor resistance value
using one of these methods:
1.
Run an Auto Tune on a cold
motor. The frequency converter
will measure the value from the
Illustration 3.20 Motor Equivalent Diagram for an Asynchronous
motor. All compensations are
Motor
reset to 100%.
2.
Enter the Rr value manually.
Obtain the value from the motor
supplier.
3.
Use the Rr default setting. The
frequency converter establishes
the setting on the basis of the
motor nameplate data.
NOTE
P-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) will not have effect when
P-20 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non salient SPM.
P-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1)
Range:
4.0000
Ohm*
Function:
[0.0400 400.0000
Ohm]
Set the stator leakage reactance of the
motor using one of these methods:
1.
Run an Auto Tune on a cold
motor. The frequency converter
will measure the value from the
motor.
Illustration 3.21 Motor Equivalent Circuit Diagram for a PM Non
2.
Salient Motor
Enter the X1 value manually.
Obtain the value from the motor
supplier.
58
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
P-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1)
P-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe)
Range:
Range:
Function:
3.
Function:
Use the X1 default setting. The
10000.000
frequency converter establishes
Ohm*
the setting on the basis of the
[0 -
Enter the equivalent iron loss
10000.000
resistance (RFe) value to
Ohm]
compensate for iron loss in the
motor name plate data.
motor.
The RFe value cannot be found by
See Illustration 3.20.
performing an Auto Tune.
NOTE
The RFe value is especially
P-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1) will not have effect
when P-20 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non salient SPM.
important in torque control
applications. If RFe is unknown,
leave P-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe)
on default setting.
P-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2)
Range:
4.0000
Ohm*
Function:
[0.0400 400.0000
Ohm]
P-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld)
Set the rotor leakage reactance of the
Range:
motor using one of these methods:
1.
0 mH*
Run an Auto Tune on a cold
2.
1000.000 mH]
Enter the value of the d-axis
inductance. Obtain the value from the
motor. The frequency converter
permanent magnet motor data sheet.
will measure the value from the
The d-axis inductance cannot be found
motor.
by performing an Auto Tune.
Enter the X2 value manually.
Obtain the value from the motor
P-46 Position Detection Gain
Range:
supplier.
3.
Function:
[0.000 -
Use the X2 default setting. The
100 %*
Function:
[20 - 200 %] Adjusts the amplitude of the test pulse
frequency converter establishes
the setting on the basis of the
during position detection at start. Adjust
motor name plate data.
measurement.
this parameter to improve the position
See Illustration 3.20.
NOTE
P-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2) will not have effect when
P-20 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non salient SPM.
P-35 Main Reactance (Xh)
Range:
100.0000
Ohm*
Function:
[1.0000 10000.0000
Ohm]
Set the main reactance of the motor
using one of these methods:
1.
Run an Auto Tune on a cold
motor. The frequency
converter will measure the
value from the motor.
2.
Enter the Xh value manually.
Obtain the value from the
motor supplier.
3.
Use the Xh default setting.
The frequency converter
establishes the setting on
the basis of the motor name
plate data.
DET-618C
59
3 3
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.7 H-## High Perf Parameters
H-04 Auto-Reset (Times)
Option:
Parameter group related to high performance functions in
the drive.
Function:
[0] * Manual reset
Select [0] Manual reset, to perform a
reset via [RESET] or via the digital
inputs.
3.7.1 H-0# High Perf Operations
[1]
Automatic reset x 1
Parameters to restore factory setting, configure auto reset,
fan operation, reverse lock and start mode (catch a
spinning load).
twenty automatic resets after
tripping.
[2]
Automatic reset x 2
[3]
Automatic reset x 3
[4]
Automatic reset x 4
[5]
Automatic reset x 5
[6]
Automatic reset x 6
Freezes the current settings and
[7]
Automatic reset x 7
prevents unwanted changes when
[8]
Automatic reset x 8
missing or defective options are
detected.
[9]
Automatic reset x 9
Enable Option
Changes drive settings and is used
[11] Automatic reset x 15
Change
when modifying the system configu-
[12] Automatic reset x 20
ration. This Parameter setting will
[13] Infinite auto reset
H-01 Option Detection
Selects the behaviour of the frequency converter when a change
in the option configuration is detected.
Option:
Function:
[0] * Protect Option
Config.
[1]
Select Automatic reset x 1…x20 [1][12] to perform between one and
[10] Automatic reset x 10
return to [0] Protect Option Config.
Select [13] Infinite Automatic Reset for
continuous resetting after tripping.
after an Option Change.
NOTE
H-02 Option Data Storage
Range:
0*
The motor may start without warning. If the specified
number of AUTOMATIC RESETs is reached within 10
minutes, the frequency converter enters Manual reset [0]
mode. After the Manual reset is performed, the setting of
H-04 Auto-Reset (Times) reverts to the original selection. If
the number of automatic resets is not reached within 10
minutes, or when a Manual reset is performed, the internal
AUTOMATIC RESET counter returns to zero.
Function:
[0 - 65535]
H-03 Restore Factory Settings
Option:
Function:
Use this parameter to specify normal
operation, to perform tests or to restore all
parameters except ID-03 Power Up's,
ID-04 Over Temp's and ID-05 Over Volt's. This
function is active only when the power is
H-05 Auto-Reset (Reset Interval)
cycled (power off-power on) to the frequency
converter.
[0] * Normal
operation
Range:
10 s*
Function:
[0 - 600 s] Enter the time interval from trip to start of
the automatic reset function. This parameter
Select [0] Normal operation for normal
is active when H-04 Auto-Reset (Times) is set
operation of the frequency converter with the
to [1] - [13] Automatic reset.
motor in the selected application.
[2]
Restore
Select [2] Restore Factory Settings to reset all
H-07 Accel/Decel Time 1 Type
Factory
Settings
parameter values to default settings, except
for ID-03 Power Up's, ID-04 Over Temp's and
Option:
Function:
Select the ramp type, depending on
ID-05 Over Volt's. The frequency converter will
requirements for acceleration/deceleration.
reset during the next power-up.
H-03 Restore Factory Settings will also revert to
A linear ramp will give constant acceleration
the default setting [0] Normal operation.
linear acceleration, compensating for jerk in
during ramping. An S-ramp will give nonthe application.
H-04 Auto-Reset (Times)
Option:
[0] * Linear
Function:
[1]
Select the reset function after
tripping. Once reset, the frequency
[2]
converter can be restarted.
60
S-ramp Const Acceleration with lowest possible jerk.
Jerk
S-ramp Const S-ramp based on the values set in F-07 Accel
Time
DET-618C
Time 1 and F-08 Decel Time 1.
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
NOTE
H-09 Start Mode
If [1] S-ramp Const Jerk is selected and the reference during
ramping is changed the ramp time may be prolonged in
order to realize a jerk free movement which may result in
a longer start or stop time.
Additional adjustment of the S-ramp ratios or switching
initiators may be necessary.
Option:
This function makes it possible to catch a
motor which is spinning freely due to a
mains drop-out.
No function
[1]
Enables the frequency converter to “catch”
Enabled
and control a spinning motor.
When H-09 Start Mode is enabled,
F-24 Holding Time and F-25 Start Function
have no function.
[2]
Start by setting the linear ramping times corresponding to
the figures.
[3]
Enabled Always
Enabled Ref.
Dir.
[4]
Enab. Always
Ref. Dir.
NOTE
This function is not recommended for hoisting
applications.
3.7.2 H-2# Motor Feedback Monitoring
H-08 Reverse Lock
Option:
3 3
[0] * Disabled
For each of four ramps (parameter groups F-0#, E-1#, H-0#,
SP-7#, SP-8# and SP-9#) configure the ramp parameters:
ramp type, ramping times (duration of acceleration and
deceleration) and level of jerk compensation for S ramps.
If S-ramps are selected then set the level of non-linear jerk
compensation required. Set jerk compensation by defining
the proportion of accel and decel times where acceleration
and deceleration are variable (i.e. increasing or decreasing).
The S-ramp acceleration and deceleration settings are
defined as a percentage of the actual ramp time.
Function:
Function:
Parameters to configure Motor Feedback Monitoring.
NOTE
H-20 Motor Feedback Loss Function
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running.
Option:
Function:
This function is used to monitor for
Use this parameter to prevent unwanted
consistency in feedback signal, i.e. if
the feedback signal is available.
reversing. When H-40 Configuration Mode is set
Select which reaction the frequency
to [3] Process, H-08 Reverse Lock is set to [0]
Clockwise as default. The setting in
converter should take if a feedback
fault is detected. The selected action
H-08 Reverse Lock does not limit options for
is to take place when the feedback
setting F-15 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] or
signal differs from the output speed
by the value set in H-21 Motor
Select the motor speed direction(s) required.
F-17 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM].
Feedback Speed Error for longer than
[0] * Clockwise
The reference is set to CW rotation. Reversing
the value set inH-22 Motor Feedback
Loss Timeout.
input (Default term 19) must be open.
[1]
Counter
The reference is set to CCW rotation.
clockwise
Reversing input (Default term 19) must be
closed. If Reversing is required with ‘Reverse’
changed by H-48 Clockwise Direction
Both
Disabled
[1]
Warning
[2] * Trip
input is open the motor direction can be
[2]
[0]
Allows the motor to rotate in both directions.
directions
[3]
Jog
[4]
Freeze Output
[5]
Max Speed
[6]
H-09 Start Mode
Option:
Switch to Open
Loop
Function:
NOTE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while motor is running.
[7]
Select Setup 1
[8]
Select Setup 2
[9]
Select Setup 3
[10] Select Setup 4
[11] stop & trip
Warning 90 is active as soon as the value in H-21 Motor
Feedback Speed Error is exceeded, regardless of the setting
DET-618C
61
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
of H-22 Motor Feedback Loss Timeout. Warning/Alarm 61
Feedback Error is related to the Motor Feedback Loss
Function.
H-24 Tracking Error Function
Option:
[1]
Function:
Warning
H-21 Motor Feedback Speed Error
[2]
Trip
Range:
[3]
Trip after
300 RPM*
Function:
stop
[1 - 600 RPM] Select the max allowed error in speed
(output speed vs. feedback).
Warning/Alarm 78 Tracking Error is related to the Tracking
Error Function.
H-25 Tracking Error
Range:
10 RPM*
Function:
[1 - 600
RPM]
Enter the maximum permissible speed
error between the motor speed and the
output of the ramp when not ramping. In
open loop the motor speed is estimated
and in closed loop it is the feedback from
encoder/resolver.
H-26 Tracking Error Timeout
Range:
1 s*
Function:
[0 - 60 s] Enter the time-out period during which an error
greater than the value set in H-25 Tracking Error
is permissible.
H-27 Tracking Error Ramping
Illustration 3.23 Motor Feedback Speed Error
Range:
100 RPM*
0.05 s*
[1 - 600
RPM]
H-22 Motor Feedback Loss Timeout
Range:
Function:
Enter the maximum permissible speed
error between the motor speed and the
output of the ramp when ramping. In
Function:
open loop the motor speed is estimated
[0 - 60 s] Set the timeout value allowing the speed
and in closed loop it is the feedback
error set in H-21 Motor Feedback Speed Error
from encoder/resolver.
to be exceeded before enabling the function
selected in H-20 Motor Feedback Loss
Function.
H-24 Tracking Error Function
Option:
H-28 Tracking Error Ramping Timeout
Range:
1 s*
Function:
[0 - 60 s] Enter the time-out period during which an error
greater than the value set in H-27 Tracking Error
Function:
Ramping while Ramping is permissible.
This function is used to monitor that the
application follows the expected speed profile.
In Closed loop the speed reference to the PID
is compared to the encoder feedback (filtered)
In open loop the speed reference to the PID is
H-29 Tracking Error After Ramping Timeout
Range:
5 s*
Function:
[0 - 60 s] Enter the time-out period after ramping where
H-27 Tracking Error Ramping and H-28 Tracking
compensated for slip and compared to the
Error Ramping Timeout are still active.
frequency that is sent to the motor
(DR-13 Frequency).
The reaction will be activated if the measured
3.7.3 H-4# Advanced Settings
difference is more than specified in
H-25 Tracking Error for the time specified in
H-26 Tracking Error Timeout.
A tracking error in closed loop does not imply
that there is a problem with the feedback
Parameters to configure advanced controls for Open/
Closed Loop, control principles: V/Hz, Adv. Vector,
Sensorless Vector, and Closed Loop Vector, Constant or
Variable Torque, and Overload Mode.
signal! A tracking error can be the result of
torque limit at too big loads.
[0] * Disable
62
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
H-40 Configuration Mode
H-41 Motor Control Principle
Option:
Option:
Function:
Select the application control principle to be
[0] * Speed open
loop
[0]
U/f
motors in special motor applications. When
analog input or Network) is active. A Remote
U/f is selected the characteristic of the
Reference can only be active when
control principle can be edited in H-55 U/f
F-02 Operation Method is set to [0] Linked to
Characteristic - U and H-56 U/f Characteristic
Hand/Auto or [1] Remote.
- F.
Enables speed control (without feedback
[1] * Advanced
Vector
most applications. The main benefit of
compensation for almost constant speed at
Control
Advanced Vector Control operation is that it
uses a robust motor model.
[2]
Control.
Speed
Enables Speed closed loop control with feed-
closed loop
back. Obtain full holding torque at 0 RPM.
[3]
For increased speed accuracy, provide a
feedback signal and set the speed PID
Flux
Flux Vector control without encoder
sensorless
feedback, for simple installation and
robustness against sudden load changes.
Flux w/
very high accuracy speed and torque
motor feedb
control, suitable for the most demanding
applications.
control. The speed control parameters are set
in parameter group PI-0# Speed PID Control.
Torque
Enables torque closed loop control with feedback. Only possible with “Flux with motor
The best shaft performance is normally achieved using
either of the two Flux Vector control modes [2] Flux
sensorless and [3] Flux with encoder feedback.
feedback” option, H-41 Motor Control
H-42 Flux Motor Feedback Source
Principle.
[3]
Process
Voltage Vector Control principle suitable for
signal from motor) with automatic slip
are set in parameter group PI-0# Speed PID
[2]
special motor mode, for parallel connected
used when a Remote Reference (i.e. via
varying loads. The speed control parameters
[1]
Function:
Option:
Enables the use of process control in the
NOTE
frequency converter. The process control
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
parameters are set in parameter groups PI-2#
and PI-3#.
[4]
Torque
Enables the use of torque open loop in Adv.
open loop
Vector Control mode (H-41 Motor Control
Select the interface at which to receive
feedback from the motor.
Principle). The torque PID parameters are set
[0]
in parameter group PI-1#.
[5]
Wobble
Motor feedback
par. H-42
Enables the wobble functionality in
[1] * 24V encoder
SF-00 Wobble Mode to SF-19 Wobble Delta
[7]
Surface
Enables the surface winder control specific
Winder
parameters in parameter group PI-2# and
PI-3#.
Extended
Specific parameters in parameter group PI-2#
PID Speed
to PI-5#.
terminals 32/33 only. Terminals 32/33
must be programmed to No operation.
[2]
OPCENC
[3]
OPCRES
Optional resolver interface module
which can be configured in parameter
Extended
Specific parameters in parameter group PI-2#
PID Speed
to PI-5#.
group RS-5#
[6]
CL
Analog Input 53
[7]
Analog Input 54
[8]
Frequency input
H-41 Motor Control Principle
Option:
Encoder module option which can be
configured in parameter group EC-1#.
OL
[8]
A and B channel encoder, which can
be connected to the digital input
Freq. Scaled.
[6]
Function:
29
Function:
[9]
NOTE
Frequency input
33
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
Select which motor control principle to
employ.
DET-618C
63
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
H-43 Torque Characteristics
H-45 Local Mode Configuration
Option:
Option:
3 3
Function:
Function:
NOTE
Select which application configuration
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running.
mode (H-40 Configuration Mode), i.e.
application control principle, to use when a
Local (keypad) Reference is active. A Local
Reference can be active only when
Select the torque characteristic required.
F-02 Operation Method is set to [0] Linked to
VT and Automatic Energy Savings are both
Hand/Auto or [2] Local. By default the local
reference is active in Hand Mode only.
energy saving operations.
[0]
Constant
Motor shaft output provides constant torque
*
torque
under variable speed control.
[1]
Variable
Motor shaft output provides variable torque
torque
under variable speed control. Set the variable
torque level in SP-40 VT Level.
[2]
Energy
Automatically optimises energy consumption by
Savings
minimising magnetisation and frequency via
CT
SP-41 Energy Savings Min. Magnetization and
SP-42 Energy Savings Min. Frequency.
[5]
Constant
The function provides a constant power in the
Power
field weakening area.
[0]
Speed open
loop
[1]
Speed Closed
Loop
[2] * As mode par
H-40
H-46 Back EMF at 1000 RPM
Range:
500
V*
Function:
[0 -
Set the nominal back EMF for the motor when
9000 V] running at 1000 RPM.
Back EMF is the voltage generated by a PM
The torque shape of motor mode is used as a
motor when no frequency converter is
limit in the generatoric mode. This is done to
connected and the shaft is turned externally.
limit the power in generatoric mode that
Back EMF is normally specified for nominal
otherwise becomes considerable larger than in
motor speed or for 1000 RPM measured
motor mode, due to the high DC link voltage
between two lines. If the value is not available
available in generatoric mode.
for a motor speed of 1000 RPM, calculate the
Pshaft W = ωmech rad / s × T Nm
correct value as follows. If back EMF is eg. 320 V
This relationship with the constant power is
at 1800 RPM, it can be calculated at 1000 RPM
illustrated in Illustration 3.24:
as follows:
Calculate RPM at 1000 RPM as follows: Back
EMF= (Voltage/RPM)*1000 = (320/1800)*1000 =
178.
This is the value that must be programmed for
H-46 Back EMF at 1000 RPM
This parameter is only active when P-20 Motor
Construction is set to [1] PM motor (Permanent
Illustration 3.24 Constant Power
Magnet Motor).
NOTE
When using PM motors, it is recommended
to use brake resistors.
H-44 Constant or Variable Torque OL
Option:
Function:
NOTE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
H-47 Motor Angle Offset
Range:
0*
[0] * High torque
[-32768 32767]
Allows up to 160% over torque.
Function:
Enter the correct offset angle between the PM
motor and the index position (single-turn) of the
attached encoder or resolver. The value range of
[1]
Normal torque For oversized motor - allows up to 110%
0 - 32768 corresponds to 0 - 2 * pi (radians). To
over torque.
obtain the offset angle value: After frequency
converter start-up apply DC-hold and enter the
value of DR-20 Motor Angle into this parameter.
64
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
H-47 Motor Angle Offset
H-51 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [RPM]
Range:
Range:
Function:
This parameter is only active when P-20 Motor
Function:
15 RPM*
[10 - 300
Construction is set to [1] PM, non-salient SPM
RPM]
Set the required speed for normal
magnetising current. If the speed is set
(Permanent Magnet Motor).
lower than the motor slip speed,
H-48 Clockwise Direction
H-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed
and H-51 Min Speed Normal Magnetising
Option:
[RPM] are of no significance.
Function:
3 3
Use this parameter along with H-50 Motor
Magnetisation at Zero Speed. See
NOTE
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the
motor is running.
Table 3.15.
NOTE
This parameter defines the term “Clockwise”
corresponding to the keypad direction arrow. Used
for easy change of direction of shaft rotation
H-51 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [RPM] will not have
effect when P-20 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non salient
SPM.
without swapping motor wires.
[0] * Normal Motor shaft will turn in clockwise direction when
the frequency converter is connected U ⇒ U; V⇒V,
and W ⇒ W to motor.
[1]
H-52 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [Hz]
Range:
Function:
12.5 Hz*
Inverse Motor shaft will turn in counter clockwise direction
[0 - 250.0
Hz]
Set the required frequency for normal
magnetising current. If the frequency is set
when the frequency converter is connected U⇒U;
lower than the motor slip frequency,
V⇒V, and W⇒ W to motor.
H-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed is
inactive.
Use this parameter along with H-50 Motor
3.7.4 H-5# Load Indep. Settings
Magnetisation at Zero Speed. See drawing
for H-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero
Parameters to configure the load-independent motor
settings.
Speed.
H-53 Model Shift Frequency
H-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed
Range:
Use this parameter along with H-51 Min Speed
4.0
300
Normal Magnetising [RPM] to obtain a different
Hz*
%]
thermal load on the motor when running at low
100
%*
Range:
Function:
[0 -
Function:
[4 -
18.0
Hz]
Flux Model shift
Enter the frequency value for shift between two
models for determining motor speed. Choose the
speed.
value based on settings in H-40 Configuration
Enter a value which is a percentage of the rated
magnetizing current. If the setting is too low, the
Mode and H-41 Motor Control Principle. There are
two options: shift between Flux model 1 and Flux
torque on the motor shaft may be reduced.
model 2; or shift between Variable Current mode
and Flux model 2.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the
motor is running.
Flux Model 1 – Flux model 2
This model is used when H-40 Configuration Mode
is set to [1] Speed closed loop or [2] Torque and
Illustration 3.25 Motor Magnetisation
H-41 Motor Control Principle is set to [3] Flux w/
motor feedback. With this parameter it is possible
to make an adjustment of the shifting point
NOTE
where AF-650 GP changes between Flux model 1
H-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed will not have effect
when P-20 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non salient SPM.
DET-618C
and Flux model 2, which is useful in some
sensitive speed and torque control applications.
65
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
H-53 Model Shift Frequency
H-56 U/f Characteristic - F
Range:
Range:
Function:
Function:
This parameter is an array parameter [0-5]
and is only accessible when H-41 Motor
Control Principle is set to [0] U/f.
3 3
Illustration 3.28 H-40 = [1] Speed closed loop or
[2] Torque and H-41 = [3] Flux w/motor
feedback
Variable Current - Flux model - Sensorless
This model is used when H-40 is set to [0]Speed
open loop and H-41 is set to [2] Flux sensorless.
In speed open loop in flux mode, the speed is
Illustration 3.30 U/f Characteristic
determined from the current measurement.
Below fnorm x 0.1, the drive runs on a Variable
Current model. Above fnorm x 0.125 the frequency
converter runs on a Flux model.
H-58 Flystart Test Pulses Current
Range:
0 %*
[0 0 %]
Function:
Sets the current level for the flystart test pulses
that are used to detect the motor direction. 100%
means Im,n. Adjust the value to be big enough to
avoid noise influence but low enough to avoid
affecting the accuracy (current must be able to
drop to zero before the next pulse). Reduce the
value to reduce the generated torque.
Default is 30% for asynchronous motors, but may
vary for PM motors. For PM motors adjusting the
Illustration 3.29 H-40 = [0] Speed open loop,
value will tune for back EMF and d-axis inductance
H-41 = [2] Flux sensorless
of the motor.
This parameter is only available in Advanced Vector
Control.
H-55 U/f Characteristic - U
Range:
0 V*
H-59 Flystart Test Pulses Frequency
Function:
[0 - 1000
V]
Range:
Enter the voltage at each frequency point to
0 %*
manually form a U/f characteristic matching
[0 - 0
%]
Function:
Sets the frequency of the flystart test pulses that
are used to detect the motor direction. 100%
the motor.
means means 2 x fslip. Increase this value to
The frequency points are defined in H-56 U/f
reduce the generated torque. For PM motors this
Characteristic - F.
value is the percentage nm,n of the free running
This parameter is an array parameter [0-5] and
PM motor. Above this value flystart is always
is only accessible when H-41 Motor Control
Principle is set to [0] U/f.
performed. Below this value, the start mode is
selected in F-20 PM Start Mode
This parameter is only available in Advanced
H-56 U/f Characteristic - F
Range:
0 Hz*
Function:
[0 - 1000.0
Hz]
Enter the frequency points to manually
form a U/f-characteristic matching the
motor.
The voltage at each point is defined in
H-55 U/f Characteristic - U.
66
Vector Control.
3.7.5 H-6# Load Depen. Settings
Parameters to configure the load-dependent motor
settings.
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
H-61 High Speed Load Compensation
H-66 Min. Current at Low Speed
Range:
Range:
Function:
100 %*
[0 - 300
%]
Function:
Enter the % value to compensate voltage in
highest value adjusts H-66 Min. Current at Low
relation to load when the motor is running
Speed. The current setting in H-66 Min. Current at
at high speed and obtain the optimum U/f
Low Speed is composed of the torque generating
characteristic. The motor size determines
the frequency range within which this
current and the magnetizing current.
Example: Set F-40 Torque Limiter (Driving) to 100%
parameter is active.
and set F-41 Torque Limiter (Braking) to 60%.
Motor size
Change-over
H-66 Min. Current at Low Speed automatically
adjusts to about 127%, depending on the motor
0.25 kW - 7.5 kW
> 10 Hz
size.
Table 3.14
3.7.6 H-7# Adjustable Warnings
H-64 Resonance Dampening
Parameters to configure the warnings limits for current,
speed, reference, and feedback.
Range:
100 %*
Function:
[0 - 500
%]
Enter the resonance dampening value. Set
H-64 Resonance Dampening and
H-65 Resonance Dampening Time Constant to
Warnings are shown on the keypad, and can be
programmed to be outputs or to be read out via serial bus
in the Extended Status Word.
help eliminate high-frequency resonance
problems. To reduce resonance oscillation,
increase the value of H-64 Resonance
Dampening.
NOTE
H-64 Resonance Dampening will not have effect when
P-20 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non salient SPM.
H-65 Resonance Dampening Time Constant
Range:
5 ms*
Function:
[5 - 50 ms] Set H-64 Resonance Dampening and
H-65 Resonance Dampening Time Constant to
help eliminate high-frequency resonance
Illustration 3.31 Adjustable Warnings
problems. Enter the time constant that
provides the best dampening.
NOTE
H-70 Warning Current Low
H-65 Resonance Dampening Time Constant will not have
effect when P-20 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non salient
SPM.
Range:
0 A*
Function:
[0 - par.
H-71 A]
Enter the ILOW value. When the motor current
falls below this limit, the display reads Current
Low. The signal outputs can be programmed
H-66 Min. Current at Low Speed
to produce a status signal on terminal 27 or
Range:
29 and on relay output 01 or 02. Refer to
100
%*
Function:
[1 -
Illustration 3.31.
Enter the minimum motor current at low speed,
200 %] see H-53 Model Shift Frequency. Increasing this
H-71 Warning Current High
current improves motor torque at low speed.
H-66 Min. Current at Low Speed is enabled when
Range:
H-40 Configuration Mode [0] Speed open loop only.
par.
The frequency converter runs with constant
DR-37 A*
current through motor for speeds below 10 Hz.
Function:
[par. H-70
Enter the IHIGH value. When the motor
- par. DR-37 current exceeds this limit, the display
A]
reads Current High. The signal outputs
For speeds above 10 Hz, the motor flux model in
can be programmed to produce a status
the frequency converter controls the motor.
signal on terminal 27 or 29 and on relay
F-40 Torque Limiter (Driving) and/or F-41 Torque
output 01 or 02. Refer to Illustration 3.31.
Limiter (Braking) automatically adjust H-66 Min.
Current at Low Speed. The parameter with the
DET-618C
67
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
H-72 Warning Speed Low
H-77 Warning Feedback High
Range:
Range:
Function:
0 RPM*
[0 - par.
H-73 RPM]
3 3
Function:
Enter the nLOW value. When the motor
999999.999
speed exceeds this limit, the display reads
ReferenceFeed-
999999.999
feedback limit. When
Speed Low. The signal outputs can be
backUnit*
ReferenceFeed-
the feedback exceeds
backUnit]
this limit, the display
programmed to produce a status signal on
[par. H-76 -
Enter the upper
terminal 27 or 29 and on relay output 01
reads Feedb High. The
or 02.
signal outputs can be
programmed to produce
H-73 Warning Speed High
a status signal on
Range:
terminal 27 or 29 and
Function:
par.
[par.
F-17
H-72 -
speed exceeds this limit, the display reads
RPM*
par. F-17
Speed High. The signal outputs can be
RPM]
programmed to produce a status signal on
on relay output 01 or
Enter the nHIGH value. When the motor
02.
H-78 Missing Motor Phase Function
terminal 27 or 29 and on relay output 01 or
Option:
Function:
02. Program the upper signal limit of the
Displays an alarm in the event of a
motor speed, nHIGH, within the normal
missing motor phase.
working range of the frequency converter.
[0] * Disabled
No alarm is displayed if a missing
Refer to Illustration 3.31.
motor phase occurs.
[1]
H-74 Warning Reference Low
Range:
Trip 100 ms
An alarm is displayed if a missing
motor phase occurs.
Function:
-999999.999*
[-999999.999 par. H-75]
Enter the lower reference limit.
[2]
When the actual reference falls
[3]
Trip 100 ms lim 3
phase detec.
below this limit, the display
[5]
indicates RefLOW. The signal
outputs can be programmed to
Motor Check
NOTE
produce a status signal on
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the motor is
running.
terminal 27 or 29 and on relay
output 01 or 02.
3.7.7 H-8# Stop Adjustments
H-75 Warning Reference High
Range:
Trip 1000 ms
Function:
999999.999*
[par. H-74 999999.999]
Parameters to configure the special stop features for the
motor and Load Type and Min/Max Inertia.
Enter the upper reference limit.
When the actual reference
exceeds this limit, the display
H-80 Function at Stop
reads Ref High. The signal outputs
Option:
can be programmed to produce a
Select the frequency converter function
status signal on terminal 27 or 29
after a stop command or after the speed is
and on relay output 01 or 02.
deceled to the settings in H-81 Min Speed
for Function at Stop [RPM].
H-76 Warning Feedback Low
Range:
-999999.999
[0]
Function:
[-999999.999 -
Function:
Coast
Enter the lower
ReferenceFeed-
par. H-77
feedback limit. When the
backUnit*
ReferenceFeed-
feedback falls below this
backUnit]
limit, the display reads
[1]
Leaves motor in free mode. The motor is
disconnected from the frequency converter.
*
DC hold
Energizes motor with a DC holding current
(see B-00 DC Hold Current).
[2]
Motor check
Checks if a motor has been connected.
[3]
Pre-
Builds up a magnetic field while the motor
magnetizing
is stopped. This allows the motor to
Feedb Low. The signal
outputs can be
programmed to produce
produce torque quickly at subsequent start
a status signal on
commands (asynchronous motors only). This
terminal 27 or 29 and
Pre-magnetizing function does not help the
on relay output 01 or
very first start command. Two different
02.
68
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
H-80 Function at Stop
H-83 Precise Stop Function
Option:
Option:
Function:
solutions are available to pre-magnetize the
open loop control. Achieves high repetitive
machine for the first start command:
precision at the stopping point.
1. Start the frequency converter
[1]
with a 0 RPM reference and wait 2
Cnt stop
to 4 rotor time constants (see
programmed number of pulses - H-84 Precise
below) before increasing the speed
Stop Counter Value - has been received at T29 or
reference.
T33 [30].
2a. Set F-24 Holding Time to the
This is a direct feedback with one-way closed
desired pre-mag time (2 to 4 rotor
loop control.
time constants - see below).
The counter function is activated (starts timing)
at the edge of the start signal (when it changes
from stop to start). After each precise stop the
[0] DC-hold or [1] DC-Brake.
number of pulses counted during decel to 0
Set the DC-hold or DC-brake
RPM is reset.
current magnitude (B-00 DC Hold
[2]
Current or B-01 DC Brake Current)
to be equal to I_pre-mag = Unom/
Cnt stop
Same as [1] but the number of pulses counted
w/o reset
during decel to 0 rpm is deducted from the
counter value entered in H-84 Precise Stop
(1.73 x Xh)
Counter Value.
Sample rotor time constants =
(Xh+X2)/(6.3*Freq_nom*Rr)
This reset function can for example be used to
compensate for the extra distance done during
1 kW = 0.2 s
ramping down and to reduce the impacts of
10 kW = 0.5 s
gradual wear of mechanical parts.
100 kW = 1.7 s
[3]
1000 kW = 2.5 s
[5]
Counts the number of pulses, typically from an
with reset encoder and generates a stop signal after a pre-
2b. Set F-25 Start Function to either
[4]
Function:
Speed
Stops at precisely the same point, regardless of
comp
the present speed, the stop signal is delayed
stop
internally when the present speed is lower than
DC Voltage
When the motor is stopped, the H-55 U/f
U0
Characteristic - U [0] parameter defines the
the maximum speed (set in F-03 Max Output
voltage at 0 Hz.
Frequency 1).
Coast at low
When the reference is below H-81 Min Speed
The delay is calculated on the basis of the
reference
for Function at Stop [RPM], the motor is
reference speed of the frequency converter and
disconnected from the frequency converter.
not on the basis of the actual speed. Please
therefore make sure that the frequency
[6]
Motor check,
converter has ramped up before you activate
alarm
the speed compensated stop.
H-81 Min Speed for Function at Stop [RPM]
Range:
3 RPM*
[4]
Function:
[5]
H-82 Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz]
Range:
Same as [3] but after each precise stop the
rpm is reset.
[0 - 600 RPM] Set the speed at which to activate
H-80 Function at Stop.
0.1 Hz*
Com cnt
stop w/rst number of pulses counted during decel to 0
Comp cnt Same as [3] but the number of pulses counted
stop w/o
during decel to 0 rpm is deducted from the
r
counter value entered in H-84 Precise Stop
Counter Value.
Function:
This reset function can for example be used to
[0 - 20.0 Hz] Set the output frequency at which to
compensate for the extra distance done during
activate H-80 Function at Stop.
ramping down and to reduce the impacts of
gradual wear of mechanical parts.
H-83 Precise Stop Function
Option:
Function:
NOTE
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running.
[0]
Precise
Only optimal when the operational speed - of
*
ramp
e.g. the conveyor belt - is constant. This is an
stop
The Precise Stop Functions are advantageous in
applications where high precision is required.
If you use a standard stop command the accuracy is
determined by the internal task time. That is not the case
when using the precise stop function; it eliminates the task
time dependence and increases the accuracy substantially.
The frequency converter tolerance is normally given by its
task time. However, by using its special precise stop
DET-618C
69
3 3
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
function the tolerance is independent of the task time
because the stop signal immediately interrupts the
execution of the frequency converter program. The precise
stop function gives a highly reproducible delay from the
stop signal is given until the ramping down starts. A test
must be done to find this delay as it is a sum of sensor,
PLC, frequency converter and mechanical parts.
To ensure optimum accuracy there should be at least 10
cycles during ramping down, see F-08 Decel Time 1,
E-11 Decel Time 2, E-13 Decel Time 3 and E-15 Decel Time 4.
The Precise Stop Function is set up here and enabled from
DI T29 or T33.
H-88 Minimum Inertia
Range:
Function:
Inertia and H-89 Maximum Inertia are
used for pre-adjustment of the Proportional Gain in the speed control, see
PI-02 Speed PID Proportional Gain.
H-89 Maximum Inertia
Range:
Function:
0.0048
[par. H-88 -
kgm2*
0.4800 kgm2]
H-84 Precise Stop Counter Value
Range:
Function:
100000*
[0 -
This parameter cannot be
adjusted while motor is running.
Active in Flux Open Loop only. Used
Enter the counter value to be used in
999999999]
NOTE
to compute the acceleration torque at
the integrated precise stop function,
H-83 Precise Stop Function.
low speed. Used in the torque limit
controller.
The maximum permissible frequency
at terminal 29 or 33 is 110 kHz.
3.7.8 H-9# Motor Temperature
NOTE
Not used for selection [0] and [3]
in H-83 Precise Stop Function
Parameters to configure the special KTY sensor when used
as a thermistor source and when Parameter F-12
Thermistor Source is enabled.
H-85 Precise Stop Speed Compensation Delay
Range:
KTY Sensor Connection
KTY sensors are used especially in Permanent Magnet
Servo Motors (PM motors) for dynamic adjusting of motor
parameters as stator resistance (P-30 Stator Resistance (Rs))
for PM motors and also rotor resistance (P-31 Rotor
Resistance (Rr)) for asynchronous motors, depending on
winding temperature. The calculation is:
Function:
10 ms*
[0 - 100
Enter the delay time for sensors, PLCs, etc.
ms]
for use in H-83 Precise Stop Function. In
speed compensated stop mode, the delay
time at different frequencies has a major
influence on the stop function.
NOTE
Not used for selection [0], [1] and [2] in
H-83 Precise Stop Function
H-87 Load Type
Option:
Function:
[0] * Passive load For conveyers, fan and pump applications.
[1]
Active load
Rs = Rs20° C x (1 + αcu x ΔT ) Ω where
αcu = 0.00393
KTY sensors can be used for motor protecting (H-97 KTY
Threshold level).
AF-650 GP can handle three types of KTY sensors, defined
in H-95 KTY Sensor Type. The actual sensor temperature can
be read out from DR-19 KTY sensor temperature.
For hoisting applications, used in slip
compensation at low speed. When [1] Active
Load is selected, set H-66 Min. Current at Low
Speed to a level which corresponds to
maximum torque.
H-88 Minimum Inertia
Range:
0.0048
kgm2*
Function:
[0.0001 par. H-89
kgm2]
NOTE
Illustration 3.32
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while motor is running.
Needed for average inertia calculation.
Enter the minimum moment of inertia of
the mechanical system. H-88 Minimum
70
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
NOTE
If the temperature of the motor is utilized through a
thermistor or KTY sensor the PELV is not complied with in
case of short circuits between motor windings and sensor.
In order to comply with PELV the sensor must be extra
isolated.
3 3
H-95 KTY Sensor Type
Option:
Function:
Select the used type of KTY sensor.
[0] *
KTY Sensor 1
1 kΩ at 100 °C
[1]
KTY Sensor 2
1 kΩ at 25 °C
[2]
KTY Sensor 3
2 kΩ at 25 °C
H-96 KTY Thermistor Input
Option:
Function:
Selecting analog input terminal 54 to be used
as KTY sensor input. Terminal 54 cannot be
selected as KTY source if otherwise used as
reference (see F-01 Frequency Setting 1 to
C-34 Frequency Command 3).
NOTE
Connection of KTY-sensor between term.
54 and 55 (GND). See Illustration 3.9.
[0] * None
[2]
Analog
Input 54
H-97 KTY Threshold level
Range:
80 °C*
Function:
[-40 - 140 °C] Select the KTY sensor threshold level for
motor thermal protection.
DET-618C
71
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.8 AN-## Analog In/Out
3.8.2 AN-1# Analog Input 53
Parameter group related to the Analog Inputs and
Outputs.
Parameters to configure the scaling and limits for Analog
Input 1 (terminal 53)
AN-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage
3.8.1 AN-0# Analog I/O Mode
Range:
0.07 V*
Parameters to configure the Analog Inputs and Output
time out period for lost signals.
Function:
[-10.00 - par.
AN-11 V]
Enter the low voltage value. This analog
input scaling value should correspond to
the minimum reference value, set in
AN-00 Live Zero Timeout Time
AN-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value.
Range:
See also the section Reference Handling.
10 s*
Function:
[1 -
99 s]
Enter the Live Zero Time-out time period. Live
AN-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage
Zero Time-out Time is active for analog inputs, i.e.
terminal 53 or terminal 54, used as reference or
Range:
feedback sources. If the reference signal value
10 V*
associated with the selected current input falls
below 50% of the value set in AN-10 Terminal 53
Function:
[par. AN-10 -
Enter the high voltage value. This analog
10 V]
input scaling value should correspond to
the high reference/feedback value set in
AN-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value.
Low Voltage, AN-12 Terminal 53 Low Current,
AN-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage or AN-22 Terminal
54 Low Current for a time period longer than the
AN-12 Terminal 53 Low Current
time set in AN-00 Live Zero Timeout Time, the
Range:
function selected in AN-01 Live Zero Timeout
Function will be activated.
Function:
0.14
[0 - par.
mA*
AN-13 mA]
Enter the low current value. This
reference signal should correspond to the
minimum reference value, set in
AN-01 Live Zero Timeout Function
Option:
F-52 Minimum Reference. The value must
Function:
Select the time-out function. The function set
be set at >2 mA in order to activate the
Live Zero Time-out Function in AN-01 Live
in AN-01 Live Zero Timeout Function will be
Zero Timeout Function.
activated if the input signal on terminal 53 or
54 is below 50% of the value in
AN-13 Terminal 53 High Current
AN-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage, AN-12 Terminal
53 Low Current, AN-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage
Range:
20 mA*
or AN-22 Terminal 54 Low Current for a time
corresponding to the high reference/
feedback set in AN-15 Terminal 53
the frequency converter prioritises the time-
High Ref./Feedb. Value.
1.
AN-01 Live Zero Timeout Function
2.
O-04 Control Word Timeout Function
AN-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
Range:
0*
[-999999.999 999999.999]
[0] * Off
Function:
Enter the analog input scaling value
that corresponds to the low
Frozen at the present value
voltage/low current set in
AN-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage and
AN-12 Terminal 53 Low Current.
output
[2]
Stop
Overruled to stop
[3]
Jogging
Overruled to jog speed
[4]
Max. speed Overruled to max. speed
[5]
Stop and
Overruled to stop with subsequent trip
trip
AN-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value
Range:
1500.000 ReferenceFeedbackUnit*
[20] Coast
Coast: Overruled to Coast
[21] Coast and
Coast and trip: Overruled to Coast with
trip
Enter the high current value
Time. If several time-outs occur simultaneously,
out functions as follows:
Freeze
[par. AN-12 20 mA]
period defined in AN-00 Live Zero Timeout
[1]
Function:
Function:
[-999999.999 -
Enter the analog input
999999.999
scaling value that
ReferenceFeedbackUnit]
corresponds to the
maximum reference
feedback value set in
subsequent trip.
AN-11 Terminal 53 High
Voltage and
72
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
AN-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value
AN-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
Range:
Range:
Function:
Function:
AN-13 Terminal 53 High
0 ReferenceFeed-
Current.
backUnit*
[-999999.999 -
AN-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant
Range:
0.001 s*
input scaling value
ReferenceFeed-
that corresponds to
backUnit]
the minimum
s]
3 3
reference feedback
Function:
[0.001 - 10
Enter the analog
999999.999
value set in
NOTE
F-52 Minimum
Reference.
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
AN-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value
Enter the time constant. This is a first-
Range:
order digital low pass filter time constant
Function:
1500.000 Referen-
for suppressing electrical noise in terminal
ceFeedbackUnit*
53. A high time constant value improves
dampening but also increases the time
delay through the filter.
[-999999.999 -
Enter the analog
999999.999
input scaling value
ReferenceFeed-
that corresponds to
backUnit]
the maximum
reference feedback
value set in
3.8.3 AN-2# Analog Input 54
F-53 Maximum
Reference.
Parameters to configure the scaling and limits for Analog
Input 2 (terminal 54)
AN-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant
Range:
AN-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage
Range:
0.07 V*
Function:
[-10.00 - par.
AN-21 V]
Function:
0.001 s*
[0.001 - 10
s]
Enter the low voltage value. This
analog input scaling value should
NOTE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
correspond to the minimum reference
value, set in F-52 Minimum Reference.
Enter the time constant. This is a first-
See also .
order digital low pass filter time constant
for suppressing electrical noise in terminal
54. A high time constant value improves
AN-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage
Range:
10 V*
dampening but also increases the time
Function:
[par. AN-20 -
10 V]
input scaling value should correspond to
the high reference/feedback value set in
AN-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value.
Range:
Function:
[0 - par.
mA*
AN-23 mA]
3.8.4 AN-3# Analog Input X30/11
Parameters to configure the scaling and limits for Analog
Input 1 associated with OPCGPIO General Purpose Field
Installed Option Module.
AN-22 Terminal 54 Low Current
0.14
delay through the filter.
Enter the high voltage value. This analog
Enter the low current value. This
AN-30 Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage
reference signal should correspond to the
minimum reference value, set in
F-52 Minimum Reference. The value must
Range:
Function:
0.07 V*
[0 - par. AN-31
V]
be set at >2 mA in order to activate the
Live Zero Time-out Function in AN-01 Live
X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. Value).
AN-31 Terminal X30/11 High Voltage
AN-23 Terminal 54 High Current
20 mA*
Range:
Function:
[par. AN-22 20 mA]
correspond to the low reference/
feedback value (set in AN-34 Term.
Zero Timeout Function.
Range:
Sets the analog input scaling value to
10 V*
Enter the high current value
corresponding to the high reference/
feedback value set in AN-25 Terminal
Function:
[par. AN-30 - 10 Sets the analog input scaling value to
V]
correspond to the high reference/
feedback value (set in AN-35 Term.
X30/11 High Ref./Feedb. Value).
54 High Ref./Feedb. Value.
DET-618C
73
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
AN-34 Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
AN-45 Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb. Value
Range:
Range:
0*
Function:
[-999999.999 999999.999]
3 3
Sets the analog input scaling value to
100*
correspond to the low voltage value
Function:
[-999999.999 -
Sets the analog input scaling value
999999.999]
to correspond to the high voltage
(set in AN-30 Terminal X30/11 Low
value set in AN-41 Terminal X30/12
Voltage).
High Voltage.
AN-35 Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb. Value
AN-46 Term. X30/12 Filter Time Constant
Range:
Range:
100*
Function:
[-999999.999 999999.999]
Sets the analog input scaling value
0.001 s*
Function:
[0.001 - 10 s]
to correspond to the high voltage
NOTE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
value (set in AN-31 Terminal X30/11
High Voltage).
A 1st order digital low pass filter time
AN-36 Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant
Range:
constant for suppressing electrical noise
Function:
0.001 s*
[0.001 - 10 s]
on terminal X30/12.
NOTE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
3.8.6 AN-5# Analog Output 42
A 1st order digital low pass filter time
Parameters to configure the scaling and limits for Analog
Output 1 (terminal 42)
constant for suppressing electrical noise
on terminal X30/11.
AN-50 Terminal 42 Output
Option:
3.8.5 AN-4# Analog Input X30/12
analog current output. Depending on the
selection the output is either a 0-20 mA or
Parameters to configure the scaling and limits for Analog
Input 2 associated with OPCGPIO General Purpose Field
Installed Option Module.
AN-40 Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage
Range:
4-20 mA output. The current value can be
read out in keypad in DR-65 Analog Output 42
[mA].
[0] *
Function:
0.07 V*
[0 - par. AN-41
V]
Sets the analog input scaling value to
Function:
Select the function of Terminal 42 as an
No
When no signal on the analog output.
operation
[100] Output
correspond to the low reference/
frequency
feedback value set in AN-44 Term.
[101] Reference
X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb. Value.
0 Hz = 0 mA; 100 Hz = 20 mA.
F-50 Reference Range [Min - Max] 0% = 0 mA;
100% = 20 mA
F-50 Reference Range [-Max - Max] -100% = 0
AN-41 Terminal X30/12 High Voltage
Range:
10 V*
Function:
mA; 0% = 10 mA; +100% = 20 mA
[102] Feedback
[par. AN-40 - 10 Sets the analog input scaling value to
V]
100% = 20 mA
correspond to the high reference/
F-50 Reference Range [-Max - Max] -100% = 0
feedback value set in AN-45 Term.
mA; 0% = 10 mA; +100% = 20 mA
X30/12 High Ref./Feedb. Value.
[103] Motor
Current
AN-44 Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
Range:
0*
[-999999.999 999999.999]
F-50 Reference Range [Min - Max] 0% = 0 mA;
0–20 mA is equal to the range of 0 A to
DR-37 Drive Max. Current (160% current) with
default scaling.
Function:
Example:
Sets the analog output scaling value
Inverter norm current (11 kW) = 24 A. 160%
to correspond to the low voltage
=38.4 A. Motor Current = 22 A.
value set in AN-40 Terminal X30/12
An analog output of 11.46 mA equals:
Low Voltage.
11.46 mA x 38.4A/20 mA = 22 A
In case 20 mA must be equal to a value
different than Imax e.g P-06 Base Speed Motor
74
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
AN-50 Terminal 42 Output
AN-50 Terminal 42 Output
Option:
Option:
Function:
Current, then the setting of AN-52 Terminal 42
Function:
[140] Bus ctrl.
Output Max Scale must be:
4-20 mA
Imotor x 100%/Imax = 22 A x 100%/38.4 A =
57%
[104] Torque rel
to limit
[105] Torq relate
to rated
An output value set from Network process
data. The output will work independently of
internal functions in the frequency converter.
[141] Bus ctrl
The torque setting is related to setting in
H-74 Warning Reference Low defines the
0-20mA t.o. behaviour of the analog output in case of bus
F-40 Torque Limiter (Driving)
time-out.
The torque is related to the motor torque
[142] Bus ctrl
setting.
H-74 Warning Reference Low defines the
4-20mA t.o. behaviour of the analog output in case of bus
time-out.
[106] Power
Taken from P-07 Motor Power [kW].
[107] Speed
Taken from F-53 Maximum Reference. 20 mA =
[149] Torque %
Analog output at zero torque = 12 mA.
lim 4-20mA Motoric torque will increase the output
value in F-53 Maximum Reference
current to max torque limit 20 mA (set in
[108] Torque
Torque reference related to 160% torque.
F-40 Torque Limiter (Driving)).
[109] Max Out
0 Hz = 0 mA,F-03 Max Output Frequency 1 =
Generative torque will decrease the output to
20 mA.
torque limit Generator Mode (set in
Freq
F-41 Torque Limiter (Braking))
[113] PID
Ex: F-40 Torque Limiter (Driving): 200% and
Clamped
F-41 Torque Limiter (Braking): 200%. 20 mA =
Output
[119] Torque %
Torque% lim: Torque reference. F-50 Reference
lim
Range [Min - Max] 0% = 0 mA; 100% = 20 mA
200% Motoric and 4 mA = 200% Generatoric.
F-50 Reference Range [-Max - Max] -100% = 0
mA; 0% = 10 mA; +100% = 20 mA
[130] Output
Illustration 3.33
0 Hz = 4 mA, 100 Hz = 20 mA
freq.
4-20mA
[131] Reference
4-20mA
[132] Feedback
4-20mA
F-50 Reference Range [Min-Max] 0% = 4 mA;
[150] Max Out Fr 0 Hz = 0 mA, F-03 Max Output Frequency 1 =
100% = 20 mA
F-50 Reference Range [-Max-Max] -100% = 4
4-20mA
mA; 0% = 12 mA; +100% = 20 mA
AN-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale
Feedback 4-20 mA: F-50 Reference Range [Min-
Range:
Max] 0% = 4 mA; 100% = 20 mA
0 %*
F-50 Reference Range [-Max-Max] -100% = 4
[133] Motor cur.
4-20mA
20 mA.
Function:
[0 - 200
%]
Scale for the minimum output (0 or 4 mA) of
the analog signal at terminal 42.
mA; 0% = 12 mA; +100% = 20 mA
Set the value to be the percentage of the full
Value is taken from DR-37 Drive Max. Current.
range of the variable selected in
Inverter max. current (160% current) is equal
AN-50 Terminal 42 Output.
to 20 mA.
AN-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale
[134] Torq.% lim
4-20 mA
[135] Torq.%
nom
The torque setting is related to setting in
Range:
F-40 Torque Limiter (Driving).
The torque setting is related to the motor
torque setting.
4-20mA
[138] Torque
0-20 mA
200 %]
analog signal at terminal 42. Set the value to
mA at full scale; or 20 mA at an output below
100% of the maximum signal value. If 20 mA is
Taken from F-53 Maximum Reference. 20 mA =
the desired output current at a value between 0
Value in F-53 Maximum Reference.
- 100% of the full-scale output, program the
Torque reference related to 160% torque.
percentage value in the parameter, i.e. 50% = 20
mA. If a current between 4 and 20 mA is desired
4-20mA
[139] Bus ctrl.
%*
Scale the maximum output of the selected
Scale the output to give a current lower than 20
Taken from P-07 Motor Power [kW]
4-20mA
[137] Speed
[0 -
the maximum value of the current signal output.
4-20mA
[136] Power
Function:
100
An output value set from Network process
at maximum output (100%), calculate the
data. The output will work independently of
percentage value as follows:
internal functions in the frequency converter.
DET-618C
75
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
20 mA / desired maximum current x 100 %
AN-60 Terminal X30/8 Output
i .e . 10 mA :
Option: Function:
20
x 100 = 200 %
10
X30/8 [mA]. See options under parameter AN-50
Terminal 42 Output.
AN-61 Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale
3 3
Range:
0 %*
Function:
[0 -
Scales the minimum output of the selected
200 %]
analog signal on terminal X30/8. Scale the
Illustration 3.34 Output Max Scale
minimum value as a percentage of the maximum
signal value, i.e. 0 mA (or 0 Hz) is desired at 25%
of the maximum output value and 25% is
AN-53 Terminal 42 Output Bus Control
programmed. The value can never be higher than
Range:
the corresponding setting in AN-62 Terminal X30/8
0 %*
Function:
Max. Scale if value is below 100%.
[0 - 100 %] Holds the level of Output 42 if controlled by
This parameter is active when option module
bus.
OPCGPIO General Purpose I/O Option Module is
mounted in the frequency converter.
AN-54 Terminal 42 Output Timeout Preset
Range:
0 %*
Function:
AN-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale
[0 - 100 %] Holds the preset level of Output 42.
In case of a bus timeout and a timeout
function is selected in AN-50 Terminal 42
Output the output will preset to this level.
Range:
100
%*
Function:
[0 -
Scales the maximum output of the selected
200 %] analog signal on terminal X30/8. Scale the value
to the desired maximum value of the current
signal output. Scale the output to give a lower
AN-55 Terminal 42 Output Filter
Option:
current than 20 mA at full scale or 20 mA at an
Function:
output below 100% of the maximum signal
The following readout analog parameters from
value. If 20 mA is the desired output current at a
selection in AN-50 Terminal 42 Output have a filter
value between 0 - 100% of the ful-scale output,
selected when AN-55 Terminal 42 Output Filter is on:
program the percentage value in the parameter,
Selection
0-20 mA
4-20 mA
Motor current (0 - Imax)
[103]
[133]
Torque limit (0 - Tlim)
[104]
[134]
i.e. 50% = 20 mA. If a current between 4 and 20
mA is desired at maximum output (100%),
calculate the percentage value as follows:
Rated torque (0 - Tnom)
[105]
[135]
20 mA / desired maximum current x 100 %
Power (0 - Pnom)
[106]
[136]
i .e . 10 mA :
Speed (0 - Speedmax)
[107]
[137]
Table 3.15 Readout Analog Parameters
AN-63 Terminal X30/8 Bus Control
Range:
0 %*
Function:
[0 - 100 %] Holds the level of Output X30/8 if controlled
[0] * Off Filter off
[1]
20 − 4
x 100 = 160 %
10
by bus.
On Filter on
AN-64 Terminal X30/8 Output Timeout Preset
3.8.7 AN-6# Analog Output X30/8
Range:
0 %*
In case of a bus timeout and a timeout
Parameters to configure the scaling and limits for Analog
Output 1 associated with OPCGPIO General Purpose Field
Installed Option Module.
function is selected in AN-60 Terminal X30/8
Output, the output will preset to this level.
AN-60 Terminal X30/8 Output
Option: Function:
Select the function of Terminal X30/8 as an analog
current output. Depending on the selection the output
is either a 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA output. The current
value can be read out in keypad, DR-77 Analog Out
76
Function:
[0 - 100 %] Holds the preset level of Output X30/8.
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.9 SP-## Special Functions
Parameter group related to special functions with regards
to Line Voltage, Reset Functions, Current Limit, Energy
Savings, Derating, and Accel/Decel Ramp Types.
SP-00 Fault Level
Option:
3 3
Function:
[0] * Off
Use this parameter to customize Fault levels. Use
[0] Off with caution as it will ignore all Warnings
& Alarms for the chosen source.
[1]
Warning
[2]
Trip
[3]
Trip Lock
Failure
Alarm
Off
Warning
10 V low
1
X
D
24 V low
47
X
1.8 V supply low
48
X
Voltage limit
64
X
Earth fault during ramping
14
D
X
Earth fault 2 during cont. operation
45
D
X
Torque Limit
12
X
Trip
Trip Lock
D
D
D
D
Over Current
13
X
D
Short Circuit
16
X
D
Heatsink temperature
29
X
D
Heatsink sensor
39
X
D
Control card temperature
65
Power card temperature
69
Heatsink temperature1)
Heatsink sensor
1)
Power card temperature 1)
X
D
X
D
244
X
D
245
X
D
1)
247
Table 3.16 Table for Selection of Choice of Action when Selected Alarm Appears
D = Default setting
x = possible selection
1) Only drives 125 HP and above. All others is just a warning.
DET-618C
77
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.9.1 SP-1# Line On/Off
SP-10 Line failure
Option:
Parameters to configure actions taken for Line Failures,
Input Fault, and Imbalance.
coast function at mains interruption, together with
a flying start which occurs when the mains is
restored.
SP-10 Line failure
Option:
Function:
Function:
[4] Kinetic
SP-10 Line failure is typically used where very short
back-up
Kinetic back-up ensures that the frequency
converter keeps running as long as there is
mains interruptions (voltage dips) are present. At
100% load and a short voltage interruption, the
energy in the system due to the inertia from
DC voltage on the main capacitors drops quickly.
mechanical energy to the DC-link and thereby
For larger drives it only takes a few milliseconds
before the DC level is down to about 373 V DC
maintaining control of the drive and motor. This
and the IGBTs cut off and looses the control over
on the inertia in the system. For fans it is typically
the motor. When the mains is restored, and the
IGBTs start again, the output frequency and
several seconds, for pumps up to 2 seconds and
voltage vector does not correspond to the speed/
Many industry applications can extend controlled
frequency of the motor, and the result is normally
an overvoltage or overcurrent, mostly resulting in
operation for many seconds, which is often
motor and load. This is done by converting the
can extend the controlled operation, depending
for compressors only for a fraction of a second.
enough time for the mains to return.
a trip lock. SP-10 Line failure can be programmed
to avoid this situation.
Select the function to which the frequency
converter must act when the threshold in
SP-11 Line Voltage at Input Fault has been reached.
SP-10 Line failure cannot be changed while motor
is running.
[0] No
*
function
Illustration 3.35 Kinetick Back-up
The frequency converter will not compensate for a
mains interruption. The voltage on the DC-link will
drop quickly and motor control will be lost within
milliseconds to seconds. Trip lock will be the
B Mains failure
result.
[1] Ctrl.
Decel
A Normal operation
C Kinetic back-up
The frequency converter will remain control of the
D Mains return
motor and do a controlled ramp down from
SP-11 Line Voltage at Input Fault level. If B-10 Brake
E Normal Operation: ramping
Table 3.17 Legend to Illustration 3.35
Function is [0] Off or [2] AC brake, the ramp will
follow the Over Voltage Ramping. If B-10 Brake
Function is [1] Resistor Brake the ramp will follow
The DC-level during [4] Kinetic back-up is
the setting in C-23 Quick Stop Decel Time. This
SP-11 Line Voltage at Input Fault * 1.35.
selection is particularly useful in pump
If the mains do not return UDC is maintained as
applications, where the inertia is low and the
long as possible by ramping the speed down
friction is high. When the mains is restored, the
towards 0 RPM. Finally the frequency converter
output frequency will ramp the motor up to the
coasts.
reference speed (if the mains interruption is
If the mains return while in kinetic back-up UDC
prolonged, the controlled ramp down might take
will increase above SP-11 Line Voltage at Input
the output frequency all the way down to 0 RPM,
Fault*1.35. This is detected in one of the following
and when the mains is restored, the application is
ways.
ramped up from 0rpm to the previous reference
1.
speed via the normal ramp up). If the energy in
Fault*1.35*1.05
the DC-link disappears before the motor is
2.
ramped to zero the motor will be coasted.
[2] Ctrl.
This selection is similar to selection [1] except that
Decel,
in [2] a reset is necessary for starting up after
trip
power-up.
[3] Coasting
If the speed is above the reference. This
is relevant if the mains come back at a
lower level than before, e.g. SP-11 Line
Voltage at Input Fault*1.35*1.02. This
does not fulfil the criterion in point one
Centrifuges can run for an hour without power
and the frequency converter will try to
supply. In those situations it is possible to select a
78
If UDC > SP-11 Line Voltage at Input
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
SP-10 Line failure
SP-10 Line failure
Option:
Option:
Function:
Function:
reduce UDC to SP-11 Line Voltage at Input
Fault*1.35 by increasing the speed. This
will not succeed as the mains cannot be
lowered.
3.
3 3
If running motoric. The same mechanism
as in point two, but where the inertia
will prevent that the speed goes above
Illustration 3.37 [7] Kinetic Back-Up, trip with
the reference speed. This will lead to the
recovery where mains return above SP-15 Kin.
motor running motoric until the speed is
Backup Trip Recovery Level.
above the reference speed and the
situation in point two occurs. Instead of
waiting for that criterion three is
A Normal Operation
introduced.
[5] Kinetic
B Mains failure
The difference between kinetic back-up with and
C Kinetic back-up
back-up,
without trip is that the latter will always ramp
D Mains return
trip
down to 0 RPM and trip, regardless of whether
mains return or not.
E Normal operation: ramping
Table 3.19 Legend to Illustration 3.37
The function is made so that it will not even
detect if mains return, this is the reason for the
relatively high level on the DC-link during ramp
If mains return while in kinetic back-up at a speed
down.
below SP-15 Kin. Backup Trip Recovery Level the
frequency converter ramps down to 0 RPM using
the ramp and then trips. If the ramp is slower
than the system will ramp down on its own, the
ramping will be done motoric and UDC will be at
the normal level (UDC, m*1.35).
Illustration 3.36 Kinetic Back-up Trip
A Normal Operation
B Mains failure
Illustration 3.38 [7] Kinetic Back-Up, trip with
C Kinetic back-up
recovery, trip slow ramp where mains return
D Trip
below SP-15 Kin. Backup Trip Recovery Level. In
this illustration a slow ramp is used.
Table 3.18 Legend to Illustration 3.36
[6] Alarm
[7] Kin.
A Normal Operation
Kinetic back-up with recovery combines the
B Mains failure
back-up,
features of kinetic back-up and kinetic back-up
trip w
with trip. This feature makes it possible to select
recovery
between kinetic back-up and kinetic back-up with
C Kinetic back-up
D Mains return
trip, based on a recovery speed, configurable in
E Kinetic back-up, ramping to trip
SP-15 Kin. Backup Trip Recovery Level to enable
F Trip
detection of mains returning. If mains do not
return, the frequency converter ramps down to 0
RPM and trips. If mains return while in kinetic
back-up at a speed above the value in SP-15 Kin.
Backup Trip Recovery Level, normal operation is
resumed. This is equal to [4] Kinetic Back-up. The
DC-level during [7] Kinetic back-up is SP-11 Line
Table 3.20 Legend to Illustration 3.38
If the ramp is quicker than the system’s ramp
down on, the ramping will be done generatoric.
This results in a higher UDC which is limited using
the brake chopper/resistor brake.
Voltage at Input Fault* 1,35.
DET-618C
79
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
SP-10 Line failure
SP-14 Kin. Backup Time Out
Option:
Range:
Function:
60 s*
[0 - 60
s]
Function:
This parameter defines the Kinetic Backup Time
Out in flux mode when running on low voltage
grids. If the supply voltage does not increase
3 3
above the value defined in SP-11 Line Voltage at
Input Fault +5% within the specified time, the
drive will then automatically run a controlled
ramp-down profile before stopping.
Illustration 3.39 [7] Kinetic Back-Up, trip with
SP-15 Kin. Backup Trip Recovery Level
recovery where mains return below SP-15 Kin.
Range:
Backup Trip Recovery Level. In this illustration a
quick ramp is used.
Function:
60000.000 ReferenceFeedbackUnit*
600 V]
B
Mains failure
unit is defined in
C
Kinetic back-up
K-02 Motor Speed
D
Mains return
Unit.
E
Kinetic back-up ramping to trip
F
Trip
3.9.2 SP-2# Reset Functions
Parameters to configure the trip delay do to Torque Limit
or Drive Fault.
SP-24 Trip Delay at Current Limit
Range:
This parameter defines the threshold voltage
60 s*
at which the selected function in SP-10 Line
Function:
[0 - 60 Enter the current limit trip delay in seconds.
s]
failure should be activated. It may be
When the current limit warning has been continuously present for the period specified in this
the supply quality. For a supply of 380 V
parameter, the frequency converter trips. Disable
SP-11 Line Voltage at Input Fault should thus
be set to 342 V. This results in a DC detection
the trip delay by setting the parameter to 60 s =
OFF. Thermal monitoring of the frequency
level of 462 V (SP-11 Line Voltage at Input Fault
converter will still remain active.
* 1.35)
SP-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit
SP-12 Function at Line Imbalance
Operation under severe main imbalance conditions reduces the
lifetime of the motor. Conditions are considered severe if the
Range:
60 s*
been continuously present for the period
converter
specified in this parameter, the frequency
converter trips. Disable the trip delay by setting
Warning
Issues a warning
[2]
Disabled
No action
SP-13 Mains Failure Step Factor
the parameter to 60 s = Off. Thermal monitoring
of the frequency converter will still remain active.
SP-26 Trip Delay at Drive Fault
Function:
[0 - 5]
triggered. When the torque limit warning has
Trips the frequency
[1]
1*
F-41 Torque Limiter (Braking)), a warning is
Function:
Range:
When the output torque reaches the torque
limits (F-40 Torque Limiter (Driving) and
or fan running near full speed).
Trip
Function:
[0 - 60 Enter the torque limit trip delay in seconds.
s]
motor is operated continuously near nominal load (e.g. a pump
Option:
When the output current reaches the current
limit (F-43 Current Limit), a warning is triggered.
considered to choose 90% of the nominal
mains as the detection level, depending on
[0] *
Backup Trip
Recovery Level. The
Function:
[180 -
specifies the Kinetic
backUnit]
Normal Operation
SP-11 Line Voltage at Input Fault
342 V*
This parameter
A
Table 3.21 Legend to Illustration 3.39
Range:
[0 - 60000.000
ReferenceFeed-
Range:
0 s*
Function:
[0 - 35 s] When the frequency converter detects an overvoltage in the set time trip will be effected after
the set time.
80
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.9.4 SP-4# Energy Savings
SP-26 Trip Delay at Drive Fault
Range:
Function:
Parameters to configure the energy optimization level in
both the Variable Torque and Energy Savings modes.
If value = 0, protection mode is disabled
NOTE
SP-40 VT Level
It is recommended to disable protection
mode in hoisting applications.
Range:
66 %*
%]
SP-29 Service Code
Range:
0*
3 3
Function:
[40 - 90
NOTE
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running.
Function:
[-2147483647 - 2147483647]
For internal service only.
Enter the level of motor magnetisation at low
speed. Selection of a low value reduces
energy loss in the motor, but also reduces
3.9.3 SP-3# Current Limit Ctrl.
load capability.
Parameters to configure the Current Limit Control which is
activated when the motor current, and thus the torque, is
higher than the torque limits set in F-40 Torque Limiter
(Driving) and F-41 Torque Limiter (Braking).
NOTE
This parameter is not active when P-20 Motor Construction
is set to [1] PM non salient SPM.
SP-30 Current Lim Ctrl, Proportional Gain
Range:
100 %*
SP-41 Energy Savings Min. Magnetization
Function:
Range:
[0 - 500 %] Enter the proportional gain value for the
40 %*
Function:
[40 - 75 %] Enter the minimum allowable magnetisation
current limit controller. Selection of a high
for Automatic Energy Savings. Selection of a
low value reduces energy loss in the motor,
value makes the controller react faster. Too
high a setting leads to controller
but can also reduce resistance to sudden
instability.
load changes.
SP-31 Current Lim Ctrl, Integration Time
NOTE
Range:
This parameter is not active when P-20 Motor Construction
is set to [1] PM non salient SPM.
0.020 s*
Function:
[0.002 - 2 s] Controls the current limit control
integration time. Setting it to a lower
value makes it react faster. A setting too
SP-42 Energy Savings Min. Frequency
low leads to control instability.
Range:
10 Hz*
SP-32 Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time
Range:
1.0 ms*
Automatic Energy Savings is to be active.
Function:
[1 - 100 ms]
NOTE
This parameter is not active when P-20 Motor Construction
is set to [1] PM non salient SPM.
SP-35 Stall Protection
Option:
Function:
[5 - 40 Hz] Enter the minimum frequency at which the
Function:
SP-35 Stall Protection is active in Flux mode only.
[0]
Disabled Disables stall protection in field-weakening flux
mode and might cause the motor to be lost.
SP-43 Motor Cosphi
Range:
0.66*
[1] * Enabled
Enables stall protection in field-weakening flux
[0.40 0.95]
mode.
Function:
The Cos(phi) setpoint is automatically set for
optimum Automatic Energy Savings
performance. This parameter should normally
not be altered. However in some situations it
may be necessary to enter a new value to
fine-tune.
DET-618C
81
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.9.5 SP-5# Environment
SP-52 Fan Operation
Select minimum speed of the main fan.
Parameters to enable/disable the optional factory installed
A1/B1 RFI Filter, and Fan Monitor and to configure an
output filter if installed.
Option:
[0] * Auto
Option:
[0]
Function:
Select [0] Auto to run fan only when internal
temperature in frequency converter is in range
35 °C to approx. 55 °C.
SP-50 RFI Filter
Fan will run at low speed below 35 °C, and at
Function:
full speed at approx. 55 °C.
Off Select [0] Off if the frequency converter is fed by an
[1]
isolated mains source (IT mains).
On 50%
The fan will always run at 50% speed or above.
If a filter is used, select [0] Off during charging to
The fan will run at 50% speed at 35 °C, and at
prevent a high leakage current making the RCD
full speed at approx. 55 °C.
switch.
In this mode, the internal RFI filter capacitors between
[2]
On 75%
The fan will always run at 75% speed or above.
The fan will run at 75% speed at 35 °C, and at
chassis and the mains RFI filter circuit are cut-out to
full speed at approx. 55 °C.
reduce the ground capacity currents.
[1] * On Select [1] On to ensure that the frequency converter
complies with EMC standards.
[3]
On 100% The fan will run at 100% speed always.
[4]
Auto
This selection is the same as [0] Auto but with
(Low
special considerations around and below 0°C. In
temp
selection [0] Auto there is a risk that the fan will
130BB908.10
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
env.)
start running around 0°C as the frequency
converter will fear a sensor fault and thus
protect the frequency converter while reporting
warning 66 "Heatsink Temperature Low".
Selection [4] Auto (Low temp env.) can be used in
very cold environments and prevent the
negative effects of this further cooling and avoid
warning 66.
SP-53 Fan Monitor
Illustration 3.40 RFI Filter
Option:
Function:
Select which reaction the frequency converter
should take in case a fan fault is detected.
SP-51 DC Link Compensation
Option:
Function:
[0]
Disabled
The rectified AC-DC voltage at the frequency
[1] * Warning
converter's DC link is associated with voltage ripples.
[2]
These ripples can increase in magnitude with
Trip
SP-55 Output Filter
increased load. These ripples are undesirable because
Option:
they can generate current and torque ripples. A
Function:
compensation method is used to reduce these voltage
NOTE
ripples at DC link. In general, DC link compensation is
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
motor is running.
recommended for most applications, but care must be
taken when operating in field weakening as it can
generate speed oscillations at the motor shaft. In field
Select if a Sine-Wave output filter connected.
weakening, it is recommended to turn DC link
compensation off.
[0] * Off Select [0] Off to disable DC Link Compensation. this
[0]
No
This is the default setting and should be used with
*
Filter
dU/dt filters or high-frequency common-mode (HFCM) filters.
disables compensation for ripple in the DC bus and
may be set when harmonic filters are used with the
[1]
drive.
[1]
On Select [1] On to enable DC Link Compensation. This
This setting is only for backwards compatibility. It
Wave
enables operation with FLUX control principle
Filter
when the parameters SP-56 Capacitance Output
Filter and SP-57 Inductance Output Filter are
function compensates for lower or higher DC bus
programmed with the output filter capacitance
voltages to recreate a more perfect sine wave. May
and inductance. It DOES NOT limit the range of
overcompensate when harmonic filters are used.
82
Sine-
the switching frequency.
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
SP-55 Output Filter
Option:
[2]
Function:
Sine-
This parameter sets a minimum allowed limit to
Wave
the switching frequency and ensures that the filter
Filter
will be operated within the safe range of switching
Fixed
frequencies. Operation is possible with all control
principles. For FLUX control principle the
If S-ramps are selected then set the level of non-linear jerk
compensation required. Set jerk compensation by defining
the proportion of ramp-up and ramp-down times where
acceleration and deceleration are variable (i.e. increasing or
decreasing). The S-ramp acceleration and deceleration
settings are defined as a percentage of the actual ramp
time.
parameters SP-56 Capacitance Output Filter and
SP-71 Accel Time 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start
SP-57 Inductance Output Filter have to be
programmed (these parameters have no effect in
Range:
50 %*
Function:
[1 - 99 %] Enter the proportion of the total accel time
Advanced Vector Control and U/f). The modulation
(F-07 Accel Time 1) in which the acceleration
pattern will be set to SFAVM which gives the
lowest acoustic noise in the filter. Always set
torque increases. The larger the percentage
value, the greater the jerk compensation
SP-55 Output Filter to [2] Sine-wave fixed when
achieved, and thus the lower the torque jerks
using a sine-wave filter.
occurring in the application.
SP-56 Capacitance Output Filter
Range:
2.0 uF*
SP-72 Accel Time 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End
Function:
[0.1 - 6500
uF]
Range:
Set the capacitance of the output filter.
50 %*
Function:
[1 - 99 %] Enter the proportion of the total accel time
The value can be found on the filter label.
(F-07 Accel Time 1) in which the acceleration
NOTE
torque decreases. The larger the percentage
This is required for correct compensation in Flux mode (H-41 Motor
Control Principle)
value, the greater the jerk compensation
achieved, and thus the lower the torque jerks
in the application.
SP-73 Decel Time 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start
SP-57 Inductance Output Filter
Range:
7.000
[0.001 - 65
mH*
Range:
Function:
mH]
50 %*
Function:
[1 - 99 %] Enter the proportion of the total decel time
Set the inductance of the output filter.
(F-08 Decel Time 1) where the deceleration
The value can be found on the filter
torque increases. The larger the percentage
label.
value, the greater the jerk compensation
NOTE
achieved, and thus the lower the torque jerks
in the application.
This is required for correct
compensation in Flux mode
(H-41 Motor Control Principle)
SP-74 Decel Time 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End
Range:
50 %*
Function:
[1 - 99 %] Enter the proportion of the total decel time
SP-59 Actual Number of Inverter Units
(F-08 Decel Time 1) where the deceleration
Range:
torque decreases. The larger the percentage
1*
[1 - 1]
Function:
value, the greater the jerk compensation
Set the actual number of power units.
achieved, and thus the lower the torque jerks
in the application.
3.9.6 SP-7# Additional ADD/DEC Settings
SP-76 Accel/Decel Time 2 Type
Parameters to configure the jerk compensations for SRamps settings on Accel/Decel Ramps 1 through 4.
Option:
Function:
Select the ramp type, depending on
requirements for acceleration/deceleration. A
For each of four ramps (parameter groups F-0#, E-1#, H-0#,
SP-7#, SP-8# and SP-9#) configure the ramp parameters:
ramp type, ramping times (duration of acceleration and
deceleration) and level of jerk compensation for S ramps.
linear ramp will give constant acceleration
during ramping. An S-ramp will give nonlinear acceleration, compensating for jerk in
the application.
[0] * Linear
Start by setting the linear ramping times corresponding to
the figures.
DET-618C
[1]
S-ramp Const Acceleration with lowest possible jerk
Jerk
83
3 3
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
SP-76 Accel/Decel Time 2 Type
SP-84 Accel/Decel Ramp 3 Type
Option:
Option:
[2]
Function:
Function:
S-ramp Const S-ramp based on the values set in E-10 Accel
constant acceleration during ramping. An S-
Time
ramp will give non-linear acceleration,
Time 2 and E-11 Decel Time 2
compensating for jerk in the application.
NOTE
[0] * Linear
If [1] S-ramp Const Jerk is selected and the reference during
ramping is changed the ramp time may be prolonged in
order to realize a jerk free movement which may result in
a longer start or stop time.
Additional adjustment of the S-ramp ratios or switching
initiators may be necessary.
[1]
[2]
Range:
S-ramp Const S-ramp based on the values set in E-12 Accel
Time
Time 3 and E-13 Decel Time 3
NOTE
If [1] S-ramp Const Jerk is selected and the reference during
ramping is changed the ramp time may be prolonged in
order to realize a jerk free movement which may result in
a longer start or stop time.
Additional adjustment of the S-ramp ratios or switching
initiators may be necessary.
SP-79 Accel Time 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start
50 %*
S-ramp Const Accelerates with lowest possible jerk.
Jerk
Function:
[1 - 99 %] Enter the proportion of the total accel time
(E-10 Accel Time 2) in which the acceleration
torque increases. The larger the percentage
value, the greater the jerk compensation
achieved, and thus the lower the torque jerks
SP-87 Accel Time 3 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start
in the application.
Range:
50 %*
SP-80 Accel Time 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End
Range:
50 %*
Function:
[1 - 99 %] Enter the proportion of the total accel time
(E-12 Accel Time 3) in which the acceleration
Function:
torque increases. The larger the percentage
[1 - 99 %] Enter the proportion of the total accel time
value, the greater the jerk compensation
(E-10 Accel Time 2) in which the acceleration
achieved, and thus the lower the torque jerks
torque decreases. The larger the percentage
in the application.
value, the greater the jerk compensation
achieved, and thus the lower the torque jerks
SP-88 Accel Time 3 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End
in the application.
Range:
50 %*
SP-81 Decel Time 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start
Range:
50 %*
50 %*
torque decreases. The larger the percentage
[1 - 99 %] Enter the proportion of the total decel time
value, the greater the jerk compensation
(E-11 Decel Time 2) where the deceleration
achieved, and thus the lower the torque jerks
torque increases The larger the percentage
value, the greater the jerk compensation
in the application.
achieved, and thus the lower the torque jerks
SP-89 Decel Time 3 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start
in the application.
Range:
50 %*
[1 - 99 %] Enter the proportion of the total decel time
torque increases. The larger the percentage
[1 - 99 %] Enter the proportion of the total decel time
value, the greater the jerk compensation
(E-11 Decel Time 2) where the deceleration
achieved, and thus the lower the torque jerks
torque decreases. The larger the percentage
value, the greater the jerk compensation
in the application.
in the application.
SP-84 Accel/Decel Ramp 3 Type
84
Function:
(E-13 Decel Time 3) where the deceleration
Function:
achieved, and thus the lower the torque jerks
Option:
[1 - 99 %] Enter the proportion of the total accel time
(E-12 Accel Time 3) in which the acceleration
Function:
SP-82 Decel Time 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End
Range:
Function:
SP-90 Decel Time 3 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End
Range:
50 %*
Function:
[1 - 99 %] Enter the proportion of the total decel time
(E-13 Decel Time 3) where the deceleration
Function:
torque decreases. The larger the percentage
Select the ramp type, depending on
value, the greater the jerk compensation
requirements for acceleration and
achieved, and thus the lower the torque jerks
deceleration. A linear ramp will give
in the application.
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
SP-92 Accel/Decel Ramp 4 Type
SP-98 Decel Time 4 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End
Option:
Range:
Function:
Select the ramp type, depending on
50 %*
Function:
[1 - 99 %] Enter the proportion of the total decel time
requirements for acceleration and
(E-15 Decel Time 4) where the deceleration
deceleration. A linear ramp will give
torque decreases. The larger the percentage
constant acceleration during ramping. An S-
value, the greater the jerk compensation
ramp will give non-linear acceleration,
achieved, and thus the lower the torque jerks
compensating for jerk in the application
in the application.
[0] * Linear
[1]
S-ramp Const Accelerates with lowest possible jerk.
[2]
S-ramp Const S-ramp based on the values set in E-14 Accel
Jerk
Time
Time 4 and E-15 Decel Time 4.
NOTE
If [1] S-ramp Const Jerk is selected and the reference during
ramping is changed the ramp time may be prolonged in
order to realize a jerk free movement which may result in
a longer start or stop time.
Additional adjustment of the S-ramp ratios or switching
initiators may be necessary.
SP-95 Accel Time 4 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start
Range:
50 %*
Function:
[1 - 99 %] Enter the proportion of the total accell time
(E-14 Accel Time 4) in which the acceleration
torque increases. The larger the percentage
value, the greater the jerk compensation
achieved, and thus the lower the torque jerks
in the application.
SP-96 Accel Time 4 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End
Range:
50 %*
Function:
[1 - 99 %] Enter the proportion of the total accell time
(E-14 Accel Time 4) in which the acceleration
torque decreases. The larger the percentage
value, the greater the jerk compensation
achieved, and thus the lower the torque jerks
in the application.
SP-97 Decel Time 4 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start
Range:
50 %*
Function:
[1 - 99 %] Enter the proportion of the total decel time
(E-15 Decel Time 4) where the deceleration
torque increases. The larger the percentage
value, the greater the jerk compensation
achieved, and thus the lower the torque jerks
in the application.
DET-618C
85
3 3
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.10 O-## Options/Comms
O-03 Control Word Timeout Time
Range:
Parameter group related to communications and options.
1 s*
3.10.1 O-0# General Settings
Function:
[0.1 -
Enter the maximum time expected to pass
18000 s]
between the reception of two consecutive
messages. If this time is exceeded, it indicates
that the serial communication has stopped.
Parameters to configure the general settings for communications and options.
The function selected in O-04 Control Word
Timeout Functionis then carried out. A valid
control word triggers the time-out counter.
O-01 Control Site
Option:
Function:
O-04 Control Word Timeout Function
The setting in this parameter overrides
Select the time-out function. The time-out function activates
the settings in O-50 Coasting Select to
O-56 Preset Reference Select.
[0] * Digital and
when the control word fails to be updated within the time
period specified in O-03 Control Word Timeout Time.
Control by using both digital input and
Option:
Function:
ctrl.word
control word.
[1]
Digital only
Control by using digital inputs only.
standard) using the most recent control
[2]
Controlword only
Control by using control word only.
word.
[0] * Off
[1]
Freeze output Freezes output frequency until communi-
O-02 Control Word Source
Option:
cation resumes.
Function:
[2]
Stop
NOTE
[3]
Jogging
[4]
Max. speed
During initial power-up, the frequency converter
[5]
Stop and trip
automatically sets this parameter to [3] Option A
if it detects a valid fieldbus option module
[Reset], or via a digital input.
[7]
Select setup 1 Changes the set-up upon reestablishment of
frequency converter detects a change in the
communication following a control word
time-out. If communication resumes after a
configuration, sets O-02 Control Word Source
back to default setting RS-485, and the
time-out, O-05 End-of-Timeout Function
frequency converter trips. If an option is
installed after initial power-up, the setting of
defines whether to resume the set-up used
before the time-out, or to retain the set-up
O-02 Control Word Source does not change, but
Drive
RS485
USB
[3] * Option A
[4]
Option B
endorsed by the time-out function.
the frequency converter trips and displays:
Alarm 67 Option Changed.
[8]
Select setup 2 See [7] Select setup 1
When retrofitting a bus option into a frequency
[9]
Select setup 3 See [7] Select setup 1
converter, that did not have a bus option
installed to begin with, take an ACTIVE decision
[10] Select setup 4 See [7] Select setup 1
to move the control to Bus based. This is done
[26] Trip
for safety reasons to avoid an accidental
change.
[2]
Stops the motor, then resets the frequency
converter to restart: via the fieldbus, via
installed in slot A. If the option is removed, the
Drive
Runs the motor at maximum frequency
until communication resumes.
two serial interfaces or four installed options.
[1]
Runs the motor at JOG frequency until
communication resumes.
Select the source of the control word: one of
None
Stops with auto restart when communication resumes.
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running.
[0]
Resumes control via serial bus (fieldbus or
NOTE
To change the set-up after a time-out, the following
configuration is required:
Set K-10 Active Set-up to [9] Multi set-up and select the
relevant link in K-12 This Set-up Linked to.
O-05 End-of-Timeout Function
Option:
Function:
Select the action after receiving a valid
control word following a time-out. This
parameter is active only when O-04 Control
86
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
O-05 End-of-Timeout Function
O-07 Diagnosis Trigger
Option:
Option:
Function:
Word Timeout Function is set to [7] Set-up 1,
Function:
0-5
[8] Set-up 2, [9]Set-up 3 or [10] Set-up 4.
[0]
Hold set-up
Retains the set-up selected in O-04 Control
6
warning, until O-06 Reset Control Word
7
Timeout toggles. Then the frequency
[1] * Resume set- Resumes the set-up active before the time-
Header of extended
xx
diagnostic data
diagnostic data
Slot = 0
Header of extended
9
Status info =
Header of extended
0
diagnostic data
10 - 13 DR-92 Warnin
g Word
selected in O-05 End-of-Timeout Function.
14 - 17 DR-03 Status
Function:
18 - 21 DR-90 Alarm
Word Timeout Function, following a control
Word
word time-out.
22 - 23 PB-53 Profibus Communication
Warning Word warning word
Returns the frequency converter to the
(Profibus)
original set-up following a control word timeout. The frequency converter performs the
reset and then immediately reverts to the [0]
Table 3.22
Do not reset setting
Enabling diagnosis may cause increased bus
traffic. Diagnosis functions are not supported by
O-07 Diagnosis Trigger
all network types.
Function:
[0]
This parameter enables and controls the
[1]
permits expansion of the diagnosis data to 24
byte.
alarms
[2]
This is only valid for Profibus.
[0] Disable: Do not send extended
O-08 Readout Filtering
If the speed feedback value readouts on fieldbus are fluctuating,
the frequency converter.
this function is used. Select filtered if the function is required. A
[1] Trigger on alarms: Send extended
diagnosis data when one or more
power-cycle is required for changes to take effect.
Option:
alarms appear in alarm DR-90 Alarm
[0]
Function:
Motor Data Std-
Select [0] for normal bus
Filt.
readouts.
Motor Data LP-
Select [1] for filtered bus
Filter
Word, PB-53 Profibus Warning Word, or
readouts of the following
parameters:
warning DR-92 Warning Word.
DR-10 Power [kW]
Word or PB-53 Profibus Warning Word.
[2] Trigger alarms/warn.: Send extended
diagnosis data if one or more alarms or
warnings appear in alarm DR-90 Alarm
The content of the extended diagnosis frame is
as follows:
Byte
Trigger
alarm/
warn.
diagnosis data even if they appear in
•
Trigger
on
NOTE
•
Disable
*
frequency converter diagnosis function and
•
status word
Word
[0] * Do not reset Retains the set-up specified in O-04 Control
Option:
3 3
Status type = Header of extended
0x81
This parameter is active only when [0] Hold set-up has been
Do reset
PDU length
diagnostic data
out.
O-06 Reset Control Word Timeout
[1]
Data
8
converter resumes its original set-up.
Option:
Standard DP Diagnose
Data
Word Timeout Function and displays a
up
Standard DP
Diagnose
Content
[1]
DR-11 Power [hp]
DR-12 Motor Voltage
DR-14 Motor current
DR-16 Torque [Nm]
DR-17 Speed [RPM]
Description
DR-22 Torque [%]
DR-25 Torque [Nm] High
DET-618C
87
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.10.2 O-1# Control Settings
3.10.3 O-3# Drive Port Settings
Parameters to configure the option control word profile.
Parameters to configure the GE drive port.
O-10 Control Word Profile
O-30 Protocol
Option:
Select the interpretation of the control and status words
corresponding to the installed fieldbus. Only the selections valid
[0]
Function:
Drive
Communication according to the Drive
for the fieldbus installed in slot A will be visible in the keypad
Protocol.
display.
[1]
For guidelines in selection of GE Drive profile and [1] PROFIdrive
Drive MC
Select the protocol for the drive (standard)
port.
profile refer to the design guide of the related product.
[2] * Modbus RTU
For additional guidelines in the selection of [1] PROFIdrive profile
and [5] ODVA , see Operating Instructions for the installed
O-31 Address
fieldbus.
Option:
[0] *
Range:
Function:
1*
Drive Profile
[1]
PROFIdrive profile
[5]
ODVA
[1 - 255]
Enter the address for the Drive (standard) port.
Valid range: 1-126.
O-32 Drive Port Baud Rate
O-13 Configurable Status Word STW
Option:
Function:
Option:
Function:
[0]
2400 Baud
port.
This parameter enables configuration of bits
12–15 in the status word.
[0]
[1]
4800 Baud
[2] * 9600 Baud
No function
[3]
19200 Baud
[4]
38400 Baud
[5]
57600 Baud
O-14 Configurable Control Word CTW
[6]
76800 Baud
Option:
[7]
115200 Baud
[1] * Profile Default Function corresponds to the profile default
selected in O-10 Control Word Profile.
Function:
Selection of control word bit 10 if it is active
low or active high.
[0]
Function:
Baud rate selection for the Drive (standard)
O-33 Drive Port Parity
Option:
Function:
None
Parity and Stop Bits for the protocol
[1] * Profile
[2]
O-30 Protocol using the Drive Port.
default
For some of the protocols, not all
CTW Valid,
options are visible. Default depends
active low
[4]
on the protocol selected.
PID error
When enabled, it inverts the resulting error
inverse
from the process PID controller. Available
[0] * Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit
[1]
only if "Configuration Mode" is set to
[5]
"Surface Winder", "Extended PID Speed OL"
No Parity, 1 Stop Bit
or "Extended PID Speed CL".
[3]
No Parity, 2 Stop Bits
O-34 Estimated cycle time
PID reset I
When enabled, resets the I-part of the
part
Process PID controller. Equivalent to
PI-40 Process PID I-part Reset. Available only if
"Configuration Mode" is set to "Surface
Range:
0 ms*
PID enable
be blocked by due to overload of bad
frames. This parameter specifies the time
between two consecutive frames on the
When enabled, enables the extended process
network. If the interface does not detect
PID controller. Equivalent to PI-50 Process PID
valid frames in that time it flushes the
Extended PID. Available only if "Configuration
receive buffer.
Mode" is set "Extended PID Speed OL" or
"Extended PID Speed CL".
88
Function:
[0 - 1000000 In noisy environments, the interface may
ms]
Winder", "Extended PID Speed OL" or
"Extended PID Speed CL".
[6]
Odd Parity, 1 Stop Bit
[2]
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
O-35 Minimum Response Delay
O-41 Parameters for Signals
Range:
Option:
10 ms*
Function:
for selection in O-42 PCD
[1 - 10000 ms] Specify the minimum delay time
between receiving a request and
Write Configuration and
transmitting a response. This is used for
O-43 PCD Read Configu-
overcoming modem turnaround delays.
ration.
[7]
O-36 Max Response Delay
Range:
Function:
10001 ms*
[11 - 10001 Specify the maximum permissible
ms]
[16]
Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]
Function:
[0.00 -
Specify the maximum permissible time
35.00 ms]
interval between receipt of two bytes.
This parameter activates time-out if
transmission is interrupted.
This parameter is active only when
O-30 Protocol is set to [1] Drive MC
protocol.
3.10.4 O-4# Drive MC Port Settings
Parameters to configure the standard telegram or custom
telegram for the GE drive port.
O-40 Telegram Selection
Option:
Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
[18]
O-37 Max Inter-Char Delay
[1] *
Decel Time 1
[15]
[17]
will be discarded.
25.00 ms*
[8]
request and receiving a response. If a
is exceeding the time setting then it
3 3
Accel Time 1
delay time between transmitting a
response from the frequency converter
Range:
Function:
[40]
Torque Limiter (Driving)
[41]
Torque Limiter (Braking)
[52]
Minimum Reference
[53]
Maximum Reference
[62]
Catch up/slow Down Value
[110]
Accel Time 2
[111]
Decel Time 2
[190]
Digital & Relay Bus Control
[193]
Pulse Out #27 Bus Control
[195]
Pulse Out #29 Bus Control
[197]
Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control
[222]
Jog Accel/Decel Time
[223]
Quick Stop Decel Time
[515]
Readout: actual setup
[653]
Terminal 42 Output Bus Control
[663]
Terminal X30/8 Bus Control
[748]
PCD Feed Forward
[890]
Bus Jog 1 Speed
[891]
Bus Jog 2 Speed
[1201] Reference [Unit]
Function:
[1202] Reference %
Standard telegram 1 Enables use of freely configurable
messages or standard messages for
the Drive port.
[1203] Status Word
[1205] Main Actual Value [%]
[1209] Custom Readout
[100] None
[1210] Power [kW]
[101] PPO 1
[1211] Power [hp]
[102] PPO 2
[1212] Motor Voltage
[103] PPO 3
[1213] Frequency
[104] PPO 4
[1214] Motor current
[105] PPO 5
[1215] Frequency [%]
[106] PPO 6
[1216] Torque [Nm]
[107] PPO 7
[1217] Speed [RPM]
[108] PPO 8
[200] Custom telegram 1
[1218] Motor Thermal
Enables use of freely configurable
[1219] KTY sensor temperature
messages or standard messages for
the Drive port.
[1221] Torque [%] High Res.
[202] Custom telegram 3
[1222] Torque [%]
[1225] Torque [Nm] High
O-41 Parameters for Signals
Option:
[0] *
None
[1220] Motor Angle
[1230] DC Link Voltage
Function:
[1232] Brake Energy /s
This parameter contains
a list of signals available
DET-618C
[1233] Brake Energy /2 min
[1234] Heatsink Temp.
89
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
O-41 Parameters for Signals
Option:
O-42 PCD Write Configuration
Function:
Range:
Function:
[1235] Drive Thermal
[41]
Torque Limiter (Braking)
[1238] Logic Controller State
[52]
Minimum Reference
[1239] Control Card Temp.
[53]
Maximum Reference
[1248] Speed Ref. After Ramp [RPM]
[62]
Catch up/slow Down Value
[1250] External Reference
[110]
Accel Time 2
[1251] Pulse Reference
[111]
Decel Time 2
[1252] Feedback[Unit]
[190]
Digital & Relay Bus Control
[1253] Digi Pot Reference
[193]
Pulse Out #27 Bus Control
[1257] Feedback [RPM]
[195]
Pulse Out #29 Bus Control
[1260] Digital Input
[197]
Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control
[1261] Terminal 53 Switch Setting
[222]
Jog Accel/Decel Time
[1262] Analog Input 53
[223]
Quick Stop Decel Time
[1263] Terminal 54 Switch Setting
[653]
Terminal 42 Output Bus Control
[1264] Analog Input 54
[663]
Terminal X30/8 Bus Control
[1265] Analog Output 42 [mA]
[748]
PCD Feed Forward
[1266] Digital Output [bin]
[890]
Bus Jog 1 Speed
[1267] Freq. Input #29 [Hz]
[891]
Bus Jog 2 Speed
[1268] Freq. Input #33 [Hz]
[1280]
Fieldbus CTW 1
[1269] Pulse Output #27 [Hz]
[1282]
Fieldbus REF 1
[1270] Pulse Output #29 [Hz]
O-43 PCD Read Configuration
[1271] Relay Output [bin]
Range:
[1272] Counter A
Function:
[1273] Counter B
[0] *
[1274] Prec. Stop Counter
[515]
Readout: actual setup
[1275] Analog In X30/11
[1200]
Control Word
[1276] Analog In X30/12
[1201]
Reference [Unit]
[1277] Analog Out X30/8 [mA]
[1202]
Reference %
[1280] Fieldbus CTW 1
[1203]
Status Word
[1282] Fieldbus REF 1
[1205]
Main Actual Value [%]
[1284] Comm. Option STW
[1209]
Custom Readout
[1285] Drive Port CTW 1
[1210]
Power [kW]
[1287] Bus Readout Alarm/Warning
[1211]
Power [hp]
[1290] Alarm Word
[1212]
Motor Voltage
[1291] Alarm Word 2
[1213]
Frequency
[1292] Warning Word
[1214]
Motor current
[1293] Warning Word 2
[1215]
Frequency [%]
[1294] Ext. Status Word
[1216]
Torque [Nm]
[1500] Operating hours
[1217]
Speed [RPM]
[1501] Running Hours
[1218]
Motor Thermal
[1502] kWh Counter
[1219]
KTY sensor temperature
[1600] Control Word
[1220]
Motor Angle
[1221]
Torque [%] High Res.
O-42 PCD Write Configuration
Range:
Function:
None
[1222]
Torque [%]
[1225]
Torque [Nm] High
[0] *
None
[1230]
DC Link Voltage
[7]
Accel Time 1
[1232]
Brake Energy /s
[8]
Decel Time 1
[1233]
Brake Energy /2 min
[15]
Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
[1234]
Heatsink Temp.
[16]
Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
[1235]
Drive Thermal
[17]
Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
[1238]
Logic Controller State
[18]
Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]
[1239]
Control Card Temp.
[40]
Torque Limiter (Driving)
[1248]
Speed Ref. After Ramp [RPM]
90
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
O-43 PCD Read Configuration
Range:
O-50 Coasting Select
Function:
Option:
[1250]
External Reference
[1251]
Pulse Reference
serial communication port OR via one of the
[1252]
Feedback[Unit]
digital inputs.
[1253]
Digi Pot Reference
[1257]
Feedback [RPM]
O-51 Quick Stop Select
[1260]
Digital Input
Select control of the Quick Stop function via the terminals
[1261]
Terminal 53 Switch Setting
(digital input) and/or via the network.
[1262]
Analog Input 53
Option:
[1263]
Terminal 54 Switch Setting
[0]
Digital input
[1264]
Analog Input 54
[1]
Bus
[1265]
Analog Output 42 [mA]
[2]
Logic AND
[1266]
Digital Output [bin]
[3] *
Logic OR
[1267]
Freq. Input #29 [Hz]
[1268]
Freq. Input #33 [Hz]
O-52 DC Brake Select
[1269]
Pulse Output #27 [Hz]
Option:
[1270]
Pulse Output #29 [Hz]
Select control of the DC brake via the terminals
[1271]
Relay Output [bin]
(digital input) and/or via the fieldbus.
[1272]
Counter A
[1273]
Counter B
NOTE
[1274]
Prec. Stop Counter
[1275]
Analog In X30/11
[1276]
Analog In X30/12
[1277]
Analog Out X30/8 [mA]
[1284]
Comm. Option STW
[1285]
Drive Port CTW 1
[1287]
Bus Readout Alarm/Warning
[1290]
Alarm Word
[1291]
Alarm Word 2
[1292]
Warning Word
[1293]
Warning Word 2
[1294]
Ext. Status Word
[1500]
Operating hours
[1501]
Running Hours
[1502]
kWh Counter
[3] * Logic OR
Function:
[0] * Digital
[1]
Bus
[2]
Bus
Logic AND
ActivatesDC Brake command via the serial
serial communication port, AND additionally via
one of the digital inputs.
[3]
Logic OR
ActivatesDC Brake command via the network/
serial communication port OR via one of the
digital inputs.
O-53 Start Select
Option:
Function:
Select control of the frequency converter start
function via the terminals (digital input) and/or
via the network.
[0]
Digital
Activates Start command via a digital input.
input
Function:
[1]
Bus
Activates Start command via the serial
Select control of the coasting function via the
communication port or network option
terminals (digital input) and/or via the network.
module.
Activates Coast command via a digital input.
[2]
Logic AND
Activates Start command via the network/serial
communication port, AND additionally via one
Activates Coast command via the serial
of the digital inputs.
communication port or network option
module.
[2]
ActivatesDC Brake command via a digital input.
Logic AND ActivatesDC Brake command via the network/
input
[1]
Function:
communication port or network option module.
O-50 Coasting Select
Digital
Function:
input
Parameters to configure the control word Digital/Bus
merging.
[0]
3 3
Only selection [0] Digital input is available
when P-20 Motor Construction is set to [1]
PM non-salient SPM.
3.10.5 O-5# Digital/Bus
Option:
Activates Coast command via the network/
[3] * Logic OR
Activates Start command via the network/serial
communication port OR via one of the digital
Activates Coast command via the network/
inputs.
serial communication port, AND additionally
via one of the digital inputs.
DET-618C
91
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.10.6 O-8# Drive Port Diagnostics
O-54 Reversing Select
Option:
[0]
Function:
Digital
Select control of the frequency converter
input
reverse function via the terminals (digital
O-80 Bus Message Count
Range:
input) and/or via the fieldbus.
[1]
Bus
0*
Function:
[0 - 0] This parameter shows the number of valid
messages detected on the network.
Activates the Reverse command via the serial
communication port or fieldbus optionmodule.
[2]
Logic AND
O-81 Bus Error Count
Activates the Reverse command via the
Range:
fieldbus/serial communication port, AND
0*
additionally via one of the digital inputs.
[3] * Logic OR
faults (e.g. CRC fault), detected on the network.
Activates the Reverse command via the
fieldbus/serial communication port OR via one
O-82 Slave Messages Rcvd
of the digital inputs.
Range:
0*
O-55 Set-up Select
Option:
messages addressed to the slave, sent by the
Function:
frequency converter.
up selection via the terminals (digital input)
O-83 Slave Error Count
and/or via the network.
[1]
Digital
Activates the set-up selection via a digital
input
input.
Bus
Activates the set-up selection via the serial
Function:
[0 - 0] This parameter shows the number of valid
Select control of the frequency converter set-
[0]
Function:
[0 - 0] This parameter shows the number of messages with
Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - 0] This parameter shows the number of error
messages, which could not be executed by the
frequency converter.
communication port or network option
module.
[2]
3.10.7 O-9# Bus Jog Feedback
Logic AND Activates the set-up selection via the network/
serial communication port, AND additionally via
one of the digital inputs.
[3] * Logic OR
Activate the set-up selection via the network/
Parameters to configure the Jog Speed when drive is in
Bus Control.
O-90 Bus Jog 1 Speed
serial communication port OR via one of the
digital inputs.
Range:
100 RPM*
Range:
(digital input) and/or via the network.
[1]
Activates Preset Reference selection via a
input
digital input.
Bus
Activates Preset Reference selection via the
200 RPM*
Activates Preset Reference selection via the
network/serial communication port, AND
additionally via one of the digital inputs.
[3] * Logic OR
Activates the Preset Reference selection via the
network/serial communication port OR via one
of the digital inputs.
92
[0 - par. F-17
Enter the jog speed. Activate this
fixed jog speed via the serial port
or network option.
module.
Logic AND
Function:
RPM]
serial communication port or network option
[2]
fixed jog speed via the serial port
O-91 Bus Jog 2 Speed
Preset Reference selection via the terminals
Digital
Enter the jog speed. Activate this
or network option.
Function:
Select control of the frequency converter
[0]
[0 - par. F-17
RPM]
O-56 Preset Reference Select
Option:
Function:
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.11.2 DN-1# DeviceNet
3.11 DN-## DeviceNet Fieldbus
Parameters to configure the Process Data Type, Config
Write, Config Read, Warnings, and keypad control of
DeviceNet.
Parameter group related to Field Installed DeviceNet
Network Communications Option Module.
3 3
DN-10 Process Data Type Selection
3.11.1 DN-0# Common Settings
Option:
Function:
Select the Instance (message) for data
Parameters to configure the commom settings for
DeviceNet.
transmission. The Instances available are
dependent upon the setting of O-10 Control
DN-00 DeviceNet Protocol
Word Profile.
Option:
When O-10 Control Word Profile is set to [0]
[0] Drive protocol, DN-10 Process Data Type
[1] *
Function:
DeviceNet
View the active CAN protocol.
Selection options [0] INSTANCE 100/150 and
[1] INSTANCE 101/151 are available.
NOTE
When O-10 Control Word Profile is set to [5]
The options depend on installed option.
ODVA, DN-10 Process Data Type Selection
options [2] INSTANCE 20/70 and [3] INSTANCE
DN-01 Baud Rate Select
21/71 are available.
Select the network transmission speed. The selection must
Instances 100/150 and 101/151 are GE-
correspond to the transmission speed of the master and the
specific. Instances 20/70 and 21/71 are
other network nodes.
ODVA-specific AC Drive profiles.
Option:
For guidelines in message selection, refer to
Function:
[16]
10 Kbps
[17]
20 Kbps
[18]
50 Kbps
[19]
100 Kbps
[20] *
125 Kbps
[21]
250 Kbps
[22]
500 Kbps
the DeviceNet Operating Instructions.
NOTE
A change to this parameter will be
executed immediately.
[0] * INSTANCE
100/150
[1]
DN-02 MAC ID
Range:
63*
INSTANCE
101/151
Function:
[2]
INSTANCE
20/70
[0 - 63] Selection of station address. Every station
connected to the same network must have an
[3]
unambiguous address.
INSTANCE
21/71
DN-05 Readout Transmit Error Counter
DN-11 Process Data Config Write
Range:
Select the process write data for I/O Assembly Instances 101/151.
0*
Function:
Elements [2] and [3] of this array can be selected. Elements [0]
[0 - 255] View the number of CAN control transmission
and [1] of the array are fixed.
errors since the last power-up.
Option:
Function:
DN-06 Readout Receive Error Counter
[0] *
None
Range:
[7]
Accel Time 1
[8]
Decel Time 1
0*
Function:
[0 - 255] View the number of CAN control receipt errors
since the last power-up.
[15]
Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
[16]
Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
DN-07 Readout Bus Off Counter
[17]
Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
Range:
[18]
Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]
[40]
Torque Limiter (Driving)
[41]
Torque Limiter (Braking)
0*
Function:
[0 - 255] View the number of Bus Off events since the last
power-up.
DET-618C
[52]
Minimum Reference
[53]
Maximum Reference
[62]
Catch up/slow Down Value
93
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
DN-11 Process Data Config Write
DN-12 Process Data Config Read
Select the process write data for I/O Assembly Instances 101/151.
Select the process read data for I/O Assembly Instances 101/151.
Elements [2] and [3] of this array can be selected. Elements [0]
Elements [2] and [3] of this array can be selected. Elements [0]
and [1] of the array are fixed.
and [1] of the array are fixed.
Option:
Function:
Option:
Function:
[110]
Accel Time 2
[1233]
Brake Energy /2 min
[111]
Decel Time 2
[1234]
Heatsink Temp.
[190]
Digital & Relay Bus Control
[1235]
Drive Thermal
[193]
Pulse Out #27 Bus Control
[1238]
Logic Controller State
[195]
Pulse Out #29 Bus Control
[1239]
Control Card Temp.
[197]
Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control
[1248]
Speed Ref. After Ramp [RPM]
[222]
Jog Accel/Decel Time
[1250]
External Reference
[223]
Quick Stop Decel Time
[1251]
Pulse Reference
[653]
Terminal 42 Output Bus
[1252]
Feedback[Unit]
Control
[1253]
Digi Pot Reference
[663]
Terminal X30/8 Bus Control
[1257]
Feedback [RPM]
[748]
PCD Feed Forward
[1260]
Digital Input
[890]
Bus Jog 1 Speed
[1261]
Terminal 53 Switch Setting
[891]
Bus Jog 2 Speed
[1262]
Analog Input 53
[1280]
Fieldbus CTW 1
[1263]
Terminal 54 Switch Setting
[1282]
Fieldbus REF 1
[1264]
Analog Input 54
[1265]
Analog Output 42 [mA]
[1266]
Digital Output [bin]
[1267]
Freq. Input #29 [Hz]
[1268]
Freq. Input #33 [Hz]
DN-12 Process Data Config Read
[1269]
Pulse Output #27 [Hz]
Select the process read data for I/O Assembly Instances 101/151.
[1270]
Pulse Output #29 [Hz]
Elements [2] and [3] of this array can be selected. Elements [0]
[1271]
Relay Output [bin]
and [1] of the array are fixed.
[1272]
Counter A
[1273]
Counter B
Select the process write data for I/O Assembly Instances
101/151. Elements [2] and [3] of this array can be selected.
Elements [0] and [1] of the array are fixed.
Option:
Function:
[0] *
None
[1274]
Prec. Stop Counter
[515]
Readout: actual setup
[1275]
Analog In X30/11
[1200]
Control Word
[1276]
Analog In X30/12
[1201]
Reference [Unit]
[1277]
Analog Out X30/8 [mA]
[1202]
Reference %
[1284]
Comm. Option STW
[1203]
Status Word
[1285]
Drive Port CTW 1
[1205]
Main Actual Value [%]
[1287]
Bus Readout Alarm/Warning
[1209]
Custom Readout
[1290]
Alarm Word
[1210]
Power [kW]
[1291]
Alarm Word 2
[1211]
Power [hp]
[1292]
Warning Word
[1212]
Motor Voltage
[1293]
Warning Word 2
[1213]
Frequency
[1294]
Ext. Status Word
[1214]
Motor current
[1500]
Operating hours
[1215]
Frequency [%]
[1501]
Running Hours
[1216]
Torque [Nm]
[1502]
kWh Counter
[1217]
Speed [RPM]
[1218]
Motor Thermal
[1219]
KTY sensor temperature
[1220]
Motor Angle
[1221]
Torque [%] High Res.
[1222]
Torque [%]
[1225]
Torque [Nm] High
[1230]
DC Link Voltage
[1232]
Brake Energy /s
94
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.11.3 DN-2# COS Filters
DN-13 Warning Parameter
Range:
0*
Function:
[0 -
View a DeviceNet-specific Warning word. One bit
65535]
is assigned to every warning. Please refer to the
Parameters to configure the filtering of Change of State
data.
DeviceNet Operating Instructions for further
DN-20 COS Filter 1
information.
Range:
0*
3 3
Function:
[0 - 65535] Enter the value for COS Filter 1 to set up the
Bit
Meaning
0
not active
1
Explicit connection timeout
filter mask for the Status Word. When operating
in COS (Change-Of-State), this function filters
2
I/O connection
out bits in the Status Word that should not be
3
Retry limit reached
4
Actual is not updated
5
CAN bus off
6
I/O send error
7
Initialization error
8
No bus supply
9
Bus off
10
Error passive
11
Error warning
12
Duplicate MAC ID Error
13
RX queue overrun
14
TX queue overrun
15
CAN overrun
sent if they change.
DN-21 COS Filter 2
Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - 65535] Enter the value for COS Filter 2, to set up the
filter mask for the Main Actual Value. When
operating in COS (Change-Of-State), this
function filters out bits in the Main Actual Value
that should not be sent if they change.
DN-22 COS Filter 3
Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - 65535] Enter the value for COS Filter 3, to set up the
filter mask for PCD 3. When operating in COS
(Change-Of-State), this function filters out bits in
Table 3.25
PCD 3 that should not be sent if they change.
DN-14 Net Reference
DN-23 COS Filter 4
Read only from keypad
Range:
Option:
Function:
0*
[0 - 65535] Enter the value for COS Filter 4 to set up the
Select the reference source in Instance 21/71 and
filter mask for PCD 4. When operating in COS
20/70.
(Change-Of-State), this function filters out bits in
PCD 4 that should not be sent if they change.
[0] * Off Enables reference via analog/digital inputs.
[1]
Function:
On Enables reference via the network.
3.11.4 DN-3# Parameter Access
DN-15 Net Control
Parameters to configure the acces to indexed parameters
and defining programming set-up.
Read only from keypad
Option:
Function:
Select the control source in Instance 21/71 and 20/70.
Range:
[0] * Off Enables control via analog/digital inputs.
[1]
DN-30 Array Index
0*
On Enable control via the network.
Function:
[0 - 255] View array parameters. This parameter is valid only
when a DeviceNet fieldbus is installed.
DET-618C
95
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
DN-31 Store Data Values
Option:
Function:
Parameter values changed via DeviceNet are
not automatically stored in non-volatile
memory. Use this parameter to activate a
3 3
function that stores parameter values in the
EEPROM non-volatile memory, so changed
parameter values will be retained at powerdown.
[0] * Off
Deactivates the non-volatile storage function.
[1]
Store edit
Stores all parameter values from the active set-
setup
up in the non-volatile memory. The selection
returns to [0] Off when all values have been
stored.
[2]
Store all
Stores all parameter values for all set-ups in the
setups
non-volatile memory. The selection returns to
[0] Off when all parameter values have been
stored.
DN-32 Devicenet Revision
Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - 65535] View the DeviceNet revision number. This
parameter is used for EDS file creation.
DN-33 Store Always
Option:
Function:
[0] * Off Deactivates non-volatile storage of data.
[1]
On Stores parameter data received via DeviceNet in
EEPROM non-volatile memory as default.
DN-39 Devicenet F Parameters
Array [1000]
No keypad access
Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - 0] This parameter is used to configure the frequency
converter via DeviceNet and build the EDS-file.
96
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.12 PB-## Profibus
PB-15 PCD Write Configuration
Array [10]
Parameter group related to Field Installed Profibus DP
Network Communications Option Module.
Option:
[653]
PB-00 Setpoint
Range:
0*
Control
Function:
[663]
Terminal X30/8 Bus Control
[748]
PCD Feed Forward
Master Class 2. If the control priority is set to
[890]
Bus Jog 1 Speed
Master Class 2, the reference for the frequency
[891]
Bus Jog 2 Speed
converter is taken from this parameter, whereas
[1280] Fieldbus CTW 1
the cyclical reference will be ignored.
[1282] Fieldbus REF 1
[0 - 65535] This parameter receives cyclical reference from a
PB-07 Actual Value
PB-16 PCD Read Configuration
Range:
[10] Array
0*
Function:
Terminal 42 Output Bus
Function:
[0 - 65535] This parameter delivers the MAV for a Master
Option:
3 3
Function:
Class 2. The parameter is valid if the control
Select the parameters to be
priority is set to Master Class 2.
assigned to PCD 3 to 10 of
the messages. The number
PB-15 PCD Write Configuration
of available PCDs depends
Array [10]
on the message type. PCDs
Option:
3 to 10 contain the actual
Function:
data values of the selected
Select the parameters to
parameters. For standard
be assigned to PCD 3 to
Profibus messages, see
10 of the messages. The
PB-22 Telegram Selection.
number of available PCDs
depends on the message
[0] *
None
type. The values in PCD 3
[515]
Readout: actual setup
to 10 will then be written
[1200] Control Word
to the selected
[1201] Reference [Unit]
parameters as data
[1202] Reference %
values. Alternatively,
[1203] Status Word
specify a standard
[1205] Main Actual Value [%]
Profibus message in
PB-22 Telegram Selection.
[1209] Custom Readout
[1210] Power [kW]
[0] *
None
[1211] Power [hp]
[7]
Accel Time 1
[1212] Motor Voltage
[8]
Decel Time 1
[1213] Frequency
[15]
Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
[1214] Motor current
[16]
Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
[1215] Frequency [%]
[17]
Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
[1216] Torque [Nm]
[18]
Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]
[1217] Speed [RPM]
[40]
Torque Limiter (Driving)
[1218] Motor Thermal
[41]
Torque Limiter (Braking)
[1219] KTY sensor temperature
[52]
Minimum Reference
[1220] Motor Angle
[53]
Maximum Reference
[1221] Torque [%] High Res.
[62]
Catch up/slow Down Value
[1222] Torque [%]
[110]
Accel Time 2
[1225] Torque [Nm] High
[111]
Decel Time 2
[1230] DC Link Voltage
[190]
Digital & Relay Bus Control
[1232] Brake Energy /s
[193]
Pulse Out #27 Bus Control
[1233] Brake Energy /2 min
[195]
Pulse Out #29 Bus Control
[1234] Heatsink Temp.
[197]
Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control
[1235] Drive Thermal
[222]
Jog Accel/Decel Time
[1238] Logic Controller State
[223]
Quick Stop Decel Time
[1239] Control Card Temp.
DET-618C
97
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
PB-16 PCD Read Configuration
PB-22 Telegram Selection
[10] Array
Displays the Profibus message configuration.
Option:
Function:
Option:
Function:
[1248] Speed Ref. After Ramp [RPM]
[101]
PPO 1
[1250] External Reference
[102]
PPO 2
[1251] Pulse Reference
[103]
PPO 3
[1252] Feedback[Unit]
[104]
PPO 4
[1253] Digi Pot Reference
[105]
PPO 5
[1257] Feedback [RPM]
[106]
PPO 6
[1260] Digital Input
[107]
PPO 7
[1261] Terminal 53 Switch Setting
[108]
PPO 8
[1262] Analog Input 53
[200]
Custom telegram 1
[1263] Terminal 54 Switch Setting
[202]
Custom telegram 3
Read only.
[1264] Analog Input 54
[1265] Analog Output 42 [mA]
PB-23 Parameters for Signals
[1266] Digital Output [bin]
Array [1000]
[1267] Freq. Input #29 [Hz]
Read only
[1268] Freq. Input #33 [Hz]
Option: Function:
[1269] Pulse Output #27 [Hz]
This parameter contains a list of signals available for
[1270] Pulse Output #29 [Hz]
selection in PB-15 PCD Write Configuration and
PB-16 PCD Read Configuration.
[1271] Relay Output [bin]
[1272] Counter A
[1273] Counter B
PB-27 Parameter Edit
[1274] Prec. Stop Counter
Option:
Function:
[1275] Analog In X30/11
Parameters can be edited via Profibus, the
[1276] Analog In X30/12
standard RS-485 interface, or the keypad.
[1277] Analog Out X30/8 [mA]
[0]
[1284] Comm. Option STW
Disabled Disables editing via Profibus.
[1] * Enabled
[1285] Drive Port CTW 1
[1287] Bus Readout Alarm/Warning
PB-28 Process Control
[1290] Alarm Word
Option:
[1291] Alarm Word 2
reference, and process data) is possible via
[1293] Warning Word 2
either Profibus or standard Network but not
both simultaneously. Local control is always
[1294] Ext. Status Word
[1500] Operating hours
possible via the keypad. Control via process
[1501] Running Hours
control is possible via either terminals or
Network depending on the settings in
[1502] kWh Counter
O-50 Coasting Select to O-56 Preset Reference
PB-18 Node Address
126*
[0 126]
Function:
Process control (setting of Control Word, speed
[1292] Warning Word
Range:
Enables editing via Profibus.
Select.
Function:
[0]
Enter the station address in this parameter or
Disable
Disables process control via Profibus, and
alternatively in the hardware switch. In order to
enables process control via standard Network or
adjust the station address in PB-18 Node Address,
Profibus Master class 2.
the hardware switch must be set to 126 or 127
[1] * Enable
Enables process control via Profibus Master Class
(that is, all switches set to ‘on’). Otherwise this
cyclic
1, and disables process control via standard
parameter displays the actual setting of the
master
Network or Profibus Master class 2.
switch.
PB-44 Fault Message Counter
PB-22 Telegram Selection
Range:
Displays the Profibus message configuration.
Option:
Function:
[1]
Standard telegram 1
[100] *
None
98
0*
Function:
[0 - 65535] This parameter displays the number of error
events stored in PB-45 Fault Code and
PB-47 Fault Number. The maximum buffer
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
PB-44 Fault Message Counter
PB-63 Actual Baud Rate
Range:
Option:
Function:
Function:
capacity is eight error events. The buffer and
This parameter displays the actual
counter are set to 0 upon reset or power-up.
Profibus baud rate. The Profibus
Master automatically sets the baud
PB-45 Fault Code
Range:
0*
[0 - 0] This buffer contains the alarm word for all alarms
0*
[0]
9,6 kbit/s
[1]
19,2 kbit/s
and warnings that have occurred since last reset or
[2]
93,75 kbit/s
power-up. The maximum buffer capacity is eight
[3]
187,5 kbit/s
error events.
[4]
500 kbit/s
[6]
1500 kbit/s
[7]
3000 kbit/s
PB-47 Fault Number
Range:
3 3
rate.
Function:
Function:
[8]
6000 kbit/s
[9]
12000 kbit/s
live zero error, 4 for mains phase loss) for all alarms
[10]
31,25 kbit/s
and warnings that have occurred since last reset or
[11]
45,45 kbit/s
power-up. The maximum buffer capacity is eight
[255] * No baudrate found
[0 - 0] This buffer contains the alarm number (e.g. 2 for
error events.
PB-64 Device Identification
PB-52 Fault Situation Counter
Range:
0*
Range:
Function:
0*
Function:
[0 - 0] This parameter displays the device identification.
Refer to the Operating Instructions for Profibus, for
[0 - 1000] This parameter displays the number of error
further explanation.
events which have occurred since last reset of
power-up.
PB-65 Profile Number
PB-53 Profibus Warning Word
Range:
0*
Range:
Function:
0*
Function:
[0 - 0] This parameter contains the profile identification.
Byte 1 contains the profile number and byte 2 the
[0 - 65535] This parameter displays Profibus communication
version number of the profile.
warnings. Refer to the Profibus Operating
Instructions for further information.
NOTE
Read only
This parameter is not visible via keypad.
Bit
Meaning
0
Connection with DP-master is not ok
1
Not used
2
(Network Data link Layer) is not ok
3
Clear data command received
4
Actual value is not updated
5
Baudrate search
6
PROFIBUS ASIC is not transmitting
7
Restore of PROFIBUS is not ok
8
Frequency converter is tripped
9
Internal CAN error
10
Wrong configuration data from PLC
11
Wrong ID sent by PLC
12
Internal error occured
13
Not configured
14
Timeout active
15
Warning 34 active
PB-67 Control Word 1
Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - 65535] This parameter accepts the Control Word from a
Master Class 2 in the same format as PCD 1.
PB-68 Status Word 1
Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - 65535] This parameter delivers the Status Word for a
Master Class 2 in the same format as PCD 2.
Table 3.26
DET-618C
99
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
PB-71 Profibus Save Data Values
PB-82 Defined Parameters (3)
Option:
Array [116]
Function:
Parameter values changed via Profibus are not
No keypad access
automatically stored in non-volatile memory.
Read only
Use this parameter to activate a function that
3 3
Range:
stores parameter values in the EEPROM non-
0*
volatile memory, so changed parameter values
frequency converter parameters available for
Profibus.
will be retained at power-down.
[0] * Off
Deactivates the non-volatile storage function.
[1]
Store edit
Stores all parameter values for all set-ups in the
setup
non-volatile memory. The selection returns to
No keypad access
Read only
stored.
Store all
setups
Stores all parameter values for all set-ups in the
non-volatile memory. The selection returns to
Range:
0*
frequency converter parameters available for
stored.
Profibus.
Option:
Function:
PB-84 Defined Parameters (5)
Range:
0*
[0] * No action
Power-on reset
frequency converter parameters available for
Profibus.
Resets frequency converter upon power-
Power-on reset
PB-90 Changed Parameters (1)
prep
[3]
Function:
[0 - 9999] This parameter displays a list of all the defined
up, as for power-cycle.
[2]
Function:
[0 - 9999] This parameter displays a list of all the defined
[0] Off when all parameter values have been
PB-72 ProfibusDriveReset
[1]
PB-83 Defined Parameters (4)
Array [116]
[0] Off when all parameter values have been
[2]
Function:
[0 - 9999] This parameter displays a list of all the defined
Array [116]
Comm option
Resets the Profibus option only, useful
reset
after changing certain settings in
parameter group PB-##, for example,
PB-18 Node Address.
When reset, the frequency converter
No keypad access
Read only
Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - 9999] This parameter displays a list of all the frequency
disappears from the Network, which may
converter parameters deviating from default
cause a communication error from the
setting.
master.
PB-91 Changed Parameters (2)
PB-80 Defined Parameters (1)
Array [116]
Array [116]
No keypad access
No keypad access
Read only
Range:
Read only
Range:
0*
Function:
0*
Function:
[0 - 9999] This parameter displays a list of all the frequency
converter parameters deviating from default
[0 - 9999] This parameter displays a list of all the defined
setting.
frequency converter parameters available for
Profibus.
PB-92 Changed Parameters (3)
PB-81 Defined Parameters (2)
Array [116]
Array [116]
No keypad access
No keypad access
Read only
Read only
Range:
0*
Function:
Range:
0*
converter parameters deviating from default
[0 - 9999] This parameter displays a list of all the defined
setting.
frequency converter parameters available for
Profibus.
100
Function:
[0 - 9999] This parameter displays a list of all the frequency
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
PB-94 Changed Parameters (5)
Array [116]
No keypad Address
Read only
Range:
0*
Function:
3 3
[0 - 9999] This parameter displays a list of all the frequency
converter parameters deviating from default
setting.
DET-618C
101
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.13 EN-## Ethernet
EN-07 Domain Name
The parameters in this group are common for Ethernet IP
and Modbus TCP.
Range:
0
Function:
[0 - 2147483647] Domain name of the attached network.
Can be automatically assigned when using
DHCP network.
EN-00 IP Address Assignment
Option:
Function:
EN-08 Host Name
Selects the IP Address assignment method.
[0] * Manual IP-address can be set in EN-01 IP Address IP
Range:
Blank
Function:
[0-19 characters]
Logical (given) name of option.
Address.
[1]
DHCP
[2]
BOOTP IP-address is assigned via BOOTP server.
IP-address is assigned via DHCP server.
EN-09 Physical Address
Range:
0*
EN-01 IP Address
Function:
[0 - 0] Read only. Displays the Physical (MAC) address of
the option.
Range:
Function:
[000.000.000.000 -
Configure the IP address of the
255.255.255.255]
option. Read-only if EN-00 IP Address
EN-1# Ethernet Link parameters
Assignment set to DHCP or BOOTP.
Option:
Function:
Applies for whole parameter group.
EN-02 Subnet Mask
Range:
Function:
[000.000.000.000 -
Configure the IP subnet mask of the
255.255.255.255]
option. Read-only if EN-00 IP Address
Assignment set to DHCP or BOOTP.
[0]
Port 1
Index [0] goes for Port 1.
[1]
Port 2
Index [1] goes for Port 2.
EN-10 Link Status
Option:
Function:
EN-03 Default Gateway
Range:
Read only. Displays the link status of the Ethernet
ports.
Function:
[000.000.000.000 –
255.255.255.255]
Configure the IP default gateway of
[0] * No Link
the option. Read-only if EN-00 IP
[1]
Link
Address Assignment set to DHCP or
BOOTP.
EN-11 Link Duration
Range:
EN-04 DHCP Server
0*
Range:
Function:
[0 - 0] Read only. Displays the duration of the present link
Function:
[000.000.000.000 –
on each port in dd:hh:mm:ss.
Read only. Displays the IP address
255.255.255.255]
of the found DHCP or BOOTP
server.
EN-12 Auto Negotiation
Option: Function:
NOTE
Configures Auto Negotiation of Ethernet link
A power-cycle is necessary after setting the IP parameters
manually.
parameters, for each port: ON or OFF.
[0] Off Link Speed and Link Duplex can be configured in
EN-13 Link Speed and EN-14 Link Duplex.
EN-05 Lease Expires
Range:
0*
[1] On
Function:
[0 - 0] Read only. Displays the lease-time left for the
current DHCP-assigned IP address.
EN-13 Link Speed
Option:
Function:
Forces the link speed for each port in 10 or 100
EN-06 Name Servers
Range:
0*
Mbps. If EN-12 Auto Negotiation is set to: [ON],
this parameter is read only and displays the
Function:
actual link speed. “None” is displayed if no link
[0 - 2147483647] IP addresses of Domain Name Servers.
is present.
Can be automatically assigned when
using DHCP.
102
[0] * None
[1]
10 Mbps
[2]
100 Mbps
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
EN-14 Link Duplex
EN-30 Warning parameter
Option:
Range:
Function:
Function:
[0000–
Forces the duplex for each port to Full or Half
Read only. Displays the Ethernet/IP specific 16-bit
FFFF hex]
duplex. If EN-12 Auto Negotiation is set to:
Status-word.
[ON], this parameter is read only.
Bit
[0]
Half Duplex
Description
0
Owned
1
Not used
2
Configured
EN-20 Control Instance
3
Not used
Range:
4
Not used
Read only. Displays the connection to
5
Not used
the master. In Ethernet/IP: If no CIP
6
Not used
connection is present, “None” is
7
Not used
displayed.
8
Minor recoverable fault
9
Minor unrecoverable fault
[1] * Full Duplex
Function:
[None, 20, 21, 23,
100, 101, 103]
EN-21 Process Data Config Write
Range:
Function:
[[0 - 9] PCD read 0 - 9] Configuration of readable process
data.
EN-22 Process Data Config Read
Range:
Function:
[[0 - 9] PCD read 0 - 9] Configuration of readable process
10
Major recoverable fault
11
Major unrecoverable fault
12
Not used
13
Not used
14
Not used
15
Not used
3 3
Table 3.27
data.
EN-28 Store Data Values
Option:
EN-31 Net Reference
Function:
This parameter activates a function that stores
Option:
all parameter values in the non-volatile
Function:
Read only. Displays the reference source in Instance
memory (EEPROM) thus retaining parameter
21/71.
values at power-down.
[0] * Off Reference from the network is not active.
The parameter returns to “Off”.
[1]
On Reference from the network is active.
[0] * Off
The store function is inactive.
[1]
Store All
All parameter value will be stored in the non-
EN-32 Net Control
set-ups
volatile memory, in all four setups.
Option:
EN-29 Store Always
Option:
Function:
Read only. Displays the control source in Instance
21/71.
Function:
[0] * Off Control via the network is not active.
Activates function that always stores received
[1]
On Control via the network is active
parameter data in non-volatile memory (EEPROM).
[0] * Off
EN-33 CIP Revision
[1]
Option:
On
Function:
Read only. Displays the CIP-version of
the option software.
[0] Major version (00 - 99)
[1] Minor version (00-99)
EN-34 CIP Product Code
Range:
1100 (AF-650 GP) 1110
(AF-650 GP)*
DET-618C
Function:
[0–9999] Read only. Displays the CIP
product code.
103
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
EN-37 COS Inhibit Timer
EN-89 Transent Socket Channel Port
Range:
Range:
Function:
[0–65.535
Read only Change-Of-State inhibit timer. If the
ms]
3 3
0*
Function:
[0–9999] Configures the TCP port-number for the transent
option is configured for COS operation, this
socket channel. This enables Drive-messages to be
inhibit timer can be configured in the Forward
sent transently on Ethernet via TCP. Default value
Open telegram to prevent that continuously
is 4000, 0 means disabled.
changing PCD data generates extensive network
traffic. The inhibit time is in milliseconds,
0=disabled.
EN-90 Cable Diagnostic
Option:
Function:
Enables/disables advanced Cable diagnosis
EN-38 COS Filters
function. If enabled, the distance to cable errors
Range:
can be read out in EN-93 Cable Error Length. The
parameter resumes to the default setting of
Function:
[[0-9] Filter 0–9
Change-Of-State PCD filters. Sets up a filter
(0000-FFFFhex)]
[0] * Disabled
PCD’s can be filtered in/out.
[1]
Range:
Enabled
NOTE
EN-40 Status Parameter
Function:
0*
Disable after the diagnostics have finished.
mask for each word of process data when
operating in COS-mode. Single bits in the
[0 - 0]
The cable diagnostics function is only issued on ports
where there is no link (see EN-10 Link Status, Link Status)
NOTE
This parameter is for Modbus TCP only
Option:
EN-41 Slave Message Count
Range:
Function:
0*
EN-91 Auto Cross-Over
[0 - 0]
Function:
[0]
Disable
Disables the auto cross-over function.
[1] *
Enable
Enables the auto cross-over function.
NOTE
NOTE
This parameter is for Modbus TCP only
Disabling of the auto cross-over function requires crossed
Ethernet cables for daisy-chaining the options.
EN-42 Slave Exception Message Count
Range:
Function:
0*
[0 - 0]
EN-92 IGMP Snooping
Option:
NOTE
stack by only forwarding multicast packets to ports
This parameter is for Modbus TCP only
that are a member of the multicast group.
[0]
EN-80 FTP Server
Option:
Disable Disables the IGMP snooping function.
[1] * Enable
Function:
[0] *
Disabled
Disables the built-in FTP server.
[1]
Enabled
Enables the built-in FTP server.
0*
Disabled
[1]
Enabled
[0 65535]
EN-81 HTTP Server
[0] *
Enables the IGMP snooping function.
EN-93 Cable Error Length
Range:
Option:
Function:
This prevents flooding of the Ethernet protocol
Function:
If Cable Diagnostics is enabled in EN-90 Cable
Diagnostic, the built-in switch is possible via Time
Domain Reflectometry (TDR). This measurement
Function:
technique detects common cabling problems
such as open circuits, short circuits, and
Enables the built-in HTTP (web) server.
impedance mismatches or breaks in transmission
cables. The distance from the option to the error
EN-82 SMTP Service
is displayed in meters with an accuracy of ±2 m.
Option:
The value 0 means that no errors detected.
Function:
[0] * Disabled
[1]
104
Enabled
Enables the SMTP (e-mail) service on the option.
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
EN-94 Broadcast Storm Protection
Range:
-1 %*
Function:
[-1 -
20 %]
The built-in switch is capable of protecting the
switch system from receiving too many
broadcast packages, which can use up network
3 3
resources. The value indicates a percentage of
the total bandwidth that is allowed for broadcast
messages.
Example:
The “OFF” means that the filter is disabled - all
broadcast messages passes through. The value
“0%” means that no broadcast messages passes
through. A value of “10%” means that 10% of
the total bandwidth is allowed for broadcast
messages, if the amount of broadcast messages
increases above the 10% threshold, they will be
blocked.
[-1 -
-1 %*
20 %]
EN-95 Broadcast Storm Filter
Option:
Function:
Applies to EN-94 Broadcast Storm
Protection; if the Broadcast Storm
Protection should also include
Multicast messages.
[0] * Broadcast only
[1]
Broadcast &
Multicast
EN-98 Interface Counters
Range:
4000*
Function:
[0 - 4294967295] Read only. Advanced Interface
counters, from built-in switch, can be
used for low-level troubleshooting,
The parameter shows a sum of port
1+port 2.
EN-99 Media Counters
Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - 4294967295] Read only. Advanced Interface counters,
from built-in switch, can be used for lowlevel troubleshooting, The parameter
shows a sum of port 1+port 2.
DET-618C
105
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.14 EC-## Feedback Option
EC-25 Clock Rate
Range:
3.14.1 EC-1# Inc. Enc. Interface
Function:
260 kHz*
[100 - 260
Set the SSI clock rate. With long
kHz]
encoder cables the clock rate must
EC-10 Signal Type
be reduced.
Select the incremental type (A/B channel) of the encoder in use.
Find the information on the encoder data sheet.
EC-26 SSI Data Format
Select [0] None if the feedback sensor is an absolute encoder
Option:
only.
Function:
[0] * Gray code
Option:
Function:
[0]
None
[1] *
RS422 (5V TTL)
[2]
Sinusoidal 1Vpp
1024*
Binary code Set the data format of the SSI data. Choose
between Gray or Binary format.
EC-11 Resolution (PPR)
Range:
[1]
EC-34 HIPERFACE Baudrate
Option:
Function:
NOTE
Function:
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the
motor is running.
[10 - 10000] Enter the resolution of the incremental
track, i.e. the number of pulses or periods
per revolution.
Select the baud rate of the attached encoder.
The parameter is only accessible when
3.14.2 EC-2# Abs. Enc. Interface
EC-20 Protocol Selection is set to [1] HIPERFACE.
[0]
600
EC-20 Protocol Selection
[1]
1200
Option:
[2]
2400
NOTE
[3]
4800
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running.
[4] * 9600
Function:
[5]
19200
[6]
38400
Select [1] HIPERFACE if the encoder is absolute
3.14.3 EC-6# Monitoring and App.
only.
Select [0] None if the feedback sensor is an
incremental encoder only.
[0] * None
EC-60 Feedback Direction
Option:
[1]
HIPERFACE
[2]
EnDat
[4]
SSI
Function:
NOTE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
EC-21 Resolution (Positions/Rev)
Range:
8192*
Change the detected encoder rotation
Function:
direction without changing the wiring to
the encoder.
[4 - 131072] Select the resolution of the absolute
encoder, i.e. the number of counts per
revolution.
[0] * Clockwise
The value depends on setting in
[1]
EC-24 SSI Data Length
Range:
13*
Function:
[13 - 25] Set the number of bits for the SSI telegram.
Choose 13 bits for single-turn encoders and 25
bits for multi-turn encoder.
Counter
clockwise
EC-20 Protocol Selection.
EC-61 Feedback Signal Monitoring
Select which reaction the frequency converter should take in
case a faulty encoder signal is detected.
The encoder function in EC-61 Feedback Signal Monitoring is an
electrical check of the hardware circuit in the encoder system.
Option:
106
Function:
[0]
Disabled
[1] *
Warning
[2]
Trip
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
EC-61 Feedback Signal Monitoring
Select which reaction the frequency converter should take in
case a faulty encoder signal is detected.
The encoder function in EC-61 Feedback Signal Monitoring is an
electrical check of the hardware circuit in the encoder system.
Option:
[3]
3 3
Function:
Jog
[4]
Freeze Output
[5]
Max Speed
[6]
Switch to Open Loop
[7]
Select Setup 1
[8]
Select Setup 2
[9]
Select Setup 3
[10]
Select Setup 4
[11]
stop & trip
DET-618C
107
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.15 RS-## Resolver Interface
3.17 ID-## Drive Information
RS-50 Poles
Range:
2*
Function:
[2 - 8]
3 3
Set the number of poles on the resolver.
The value is stated in the data sheet for resolvers.
3.17.1 ID-0# Operating Data
RS-51 Input Voltage
Range:
7 V*
Function:
[2 - 8 V] Set the input voltage to the resolver. The
voltage is stated as RMS value.
The value is stated in the data sheet for
resolvers
Range:
Parameters to view operating hours. kWh counters, power
ups, etc.
ID-00 Operating hours
Range:
0 h*
RS-52 Input Frequency
10 kHz*
Parameter group related to drive information such as
operating data, hardware configuration and software
version.
Function:
[0 - 2147483647 h] View how many hours the frequency
converter has run. The value is saved
Function:
when the frequency converter is
[2 - 15 kHz] Set the input frequency to the resolver.
turned off.
The value is stated in the data sheet for
resolvers.
ID-01 Running Hours
Range:
RS-53 Transformation Ratio
Range:
0.5*
0 h*
Function:
Function:
[0 - 2147483647
View how many hours the motor has
h]
[0.1 - 1.1] Set the transformation ratio for the resolver.
run. Reset the counter in ID-07 Reset
Running Hours Counter. The value is
The transformation ration is:
T ratio =
saved when the frequency converter is
V Out
turned off.
V In
The value is stated in the data sheet for
resolvers.
ID-02 kWh Counter
Range:
0 kWh*
RS-59 Resolver Interface
Function:
[0 - 2147483647
kWh]
Registering the power consumption
of the motor as a mean value over
Activate the OPCRES resolver option when the resolver
one hour. Reset the counter in
parameters are selected.
ID-06 Reset kWh Counter.
To avoid damage to resolvers RS-50 Poles – RS-53 Transformation
Ratio must be adjusted before activating this parameter.
Option:
Function:
[0] *
Disabled
[1]
Enabled
3.16 Parameter Data Check
ID-03 Power Up's
Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - 2147483647] View the number of times the frequency
converter has been powered up.
ID-04 Over Temp's
Range:
3.16.1 Last 10 Changes
0*
Function:
[0 - 65535] View the number of frequency converter
temperature faults which have occurred.
Displays a list of the 10 last changes made to the
parameters in the present parameter setup. This allows for
any corrections of the last 10 changes.
ID-05 Over Volt's
Range:
0*
[0 - 65535] View the number of frequency converter
3.16.2 Since Factory Settings
Displays a list of all the parameter changes since the
factory settings of the drive or since the last factory restore
of parameters.
Function:
overvoltages which have occurred.
ID-06 Reset kWh Counter
Option:
[0] * Do not reset
[1]
Function:
Nno reset of the kWh counter is desired.
Reset counter Press [OK] to reset the kWh counter to zero
(see ID-02 kWh Counter).
108
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
NOTE
ID-10 Trending Source
The reset is carried out by pressing [OK].
Array [4]
Option:
Function:
ID-07 Reset Running Hours Counter
[1225] Torque [Nm] High
Option:
[1230] DC Link Voltage
Function:
3 3
[0] * Do not reset
[1232] Brake Energy /s
[1]
[1233] Brake Energy /2 min
Reset counter Select [1] Reset and press [OK] to reset the
Running Hours counter to zero (see
[1234] Heatsink Temp.
ID-01 Running Hours). This parameter cannot
[1235] Drive Thermal
be selected via the serial port, RS-485.
[1248] Speed Ref. After Ramp [RPM]
Select [0] Do not reset if no reset of the
[1250] External Reference
Running Hours counter is desired.
[1251] Pulse Reference
[1252] Feedback[Unit]
ID-08 Number of Starts
[1257] Feedback [RPM]
Range:
[1260] Digital Input
0*
Function:
[0 - 2147483647] This is a read out parameter only. The
[1262] Analog Input 53
counter shows the numbers of starts and
[1264] Analog Input 54
stops caused by a normal Start/Stop
command and/or when entering/leaving
[1265] Analog Output 42 [mA]
sleep mode.
[1275] Analog In X30/11
[1266] Digital Output [bin]
[1276] Analog In X30/12
NOTE
[1277] Analog Out X30/8 [mA]
This parameter will be reset when resetting ID-07 Reset
Running Hours Counter.
[1290] Alarm Word
[1292] Warning Word
[1294] Ext. Status Word
3.17.2 ID-1# Data Trending Settings
ID-11 Trending Interval
Data Log Settings enables continous logging of up to 4
data sources (ID-10 Trending Source) at individual rates
(ID-11 Trending Interval). A trigger event (ID-12 Trigger
Event) and window (ID-14 Samples Before Trigger) are used
to start and stop the logging conditionally.
Array [4]
Range:
0.000*
Function:
[0.000 - 0.000] Enter the interval in milliseconds
between each sampling of the variables
to be logged.
ID-10 Trending Source
ID-12 Trigger Event
Array [4]
Option:
Select the trigger event. When the trigger event occurs, a
Function:
Select which variables are
to be logged.
window is applied to freeze the log. The log will then retain a
specified percentage of samples before the occurrence of the
trigger event (ID-14 Samples Before Trigger).
[0] *
None
Choices are described under E-## Digital Output.
[515]
Readout: actual setup
Option:
[1200] Control Word
[1201] Reference [Unit]
[1202] Reference %
[1203] Status Word
[1210] Power [kW]
[1211] Power [hp]
[1212] Motor Voltage
[1213] Frequency
[1214] Motor current
[1216] Torque [Nm]
[1217] Speed [RPM]
[1218] Motor Thermal
[1221] Torque [%] High Res.
[1222] Torque [%]
DET-618C
Function:
[0] *
False
[1]
True
[2]
Running
[3]
In range
[4]
On reference
[5]
Torque limit
[6]
Current Limit
[7]
Out of current range
[8]
Below I low
[9]
Above I high
[10]
Out of speed range
[11]
Below speed low
[12]
Above speed high
[13]
Out of feedb. range
109
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.17.3 ID-2# Historic Log
ID-12 Trigger Event
Select the trigger event. When the trigger event occurs, a
View up to 50 data items logged up to the last reported
trip. The data is stored in array parameters, where [0] is the
most recent data and [49] is the oldest data.
window is applied to freeze the log. The log will then retain a
specified percentage of samples before the occurrence of the
trigger event (ID-14 Samples Before Trigger).
Choices are described under E-## Digital Output.
Option:
ID-20 Historic Log: Event
Function:
[14]
Below feedb. low
[15]
Above feedb. high
[16]
Thermal warning
[17]
Line voltage out of range
[18]
Reversing
[19]
Warning
[20]
Alarm (trip)
Array [50]
Range:
0*
[0 - 255]
Function:
View the event type of the logged events.
ID-21 Historic Log: Value
Array [50]
Range:
0*
[0 -
Function:
View the value of the logged event.
[21]
Alarm (trip lock)
[22]
Comparator 0
[23]
Comparator 1
[24]
Comparator 2
[25]
Comparator 3
DR-60 Digital Input for
[26]
Logic rule 0
description after
[27]
Logic rule 1
converting to binary
[28]
Logic rule 2
[29]
Logic rule 3
[33]
Digital input DI18
DR-66 Digital Output [bin]
[34]
Digital input DI19
[35]
Digital input DI27
for description after
converting to binary
[36]
Digital input DI29
[37]
Digital input DI32
[38]
Digital input DI33
[50]
Comparator 4
[51]
Comparator 5
[60]
Logic rule 4
[61]
Logic rule 5
2147483647]
Interpret the event values according to this
table:
Digtal input
Decimal value. See
value.
Digital output
Decimal value. See
value.
Warning word Decimal value. See
DR-92 Warning Word for
description.
Alarm word
Decimal value. See
DR-90 Alarm Word for
description.
Status word
Decimal value. See
ID-13 Trending Mode
DR-03 Status Word for
Option:
description after
Function:
[0] * Trend always
converting to binary
value.
Select [0] Log always for continuous
logging.
Control word
[1]
Trend once on
Select [1] Log once on trigger to
trigger
conditionally start and stop logging using
Decimal value. See
DR-00 Control Word for
description.
ID-12 Trigger Event and ID-14 Samples
Extended
Decimal value. See
Before Trigger.
status word
DR-94 Ext. Status Word for
description.
ID-14 Samples Before Trigger
Range:
50*
Table 3.29
Function:
[0 - 100] Enter the percentage of all samples prior to a
trigger event which are to be retained in the log.
See also ID-12 Trigger Event and ID-13 Trending
Mode.
110
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
ID-22 Historic Log: Time
ID-42 Voltage
Array [50]
Range:
Range:
0 ms*
0*
Function:
[0 - 2147483647
ms]
Function:
[0 - 0]
View the voltage.
View the time at which the logged
event occurred. Time is measured in
ms since frequency converter start.
The max. value corresponds to
ID-43 Software Version
Range:
0*
approx. 24 days which means that the
count will restart at zero after this
time period.
3 3
Function:
[0 - 0]
View the SW version
ID-46 GE Product No.
Range:
0*
[0 - 0]
Function:
View the 8-digit number.
3.17.4 ID-3# Alarm Log
ID-47 GE Power Card Model No
Range:
View up to 10 alarm logs. The data is stored in array
parameters, where [0] is the most recent and [9] is the
oldest data. Error codes, values, and time stamp can be
viewed for all logged data.
0*
Range:
0*
Array [10]
Range:
Function:
View the power card model number.
ID-48 Keypad ID Number
ID-30 Fault Log: Error Code
0*
[0 - 0]
Function:
[0 - 255] View the error code and look up its meaning in
5 Troubleshooting.
[0 - 0]
Function:
View the keypad ID number.
ID-49 SW ID Control Card
Range:
0*
[0 - 0]
Function:
View the control card software version number.
ID-31 Alarm Log: Value
ID-50 SW ID Power Card
Array [10]
Range:
0*
Range:
Function:
[-32767 - 32767] View an extra description of the error. This
parameter is mostly used in combination
with alarm 38 ‘internal fault’.
0*
[0 - 0]
View the power card software version number.
ID-51 Drive Serial Number
Range:
0*
ID-32 Alarm Log: Time
Function:
[0 - 0]
Function:
View the frequency converter serial number.
Array [10]
Range:
0 s*
ID-53 Power Card Serial Number
Function:
[0 - 2147483647 s] View the time when the logged event
occurred. Time is measured in seconds
Range:
0*
[0 - 0]
Function:
View the power card serial number.
from frequency converter start-up.
3.17.6 ID-6# Option Ident
3.17.5 ID-4# Drive Identification
Parameters to view the information about the hardware
and software configuration of the field installed I/O and
network option modules.
Parameters to view the information about the hardware
and software configuration of the drive.
ID-40 Drive Type
ID-60 Option Mounted
Range:
Array [8]
0*
Function:
[0 - 0]
Range:
View the frequency converter type.
0*
[0 - 0]
Function:
View the installed option type.
ID-41 Power Section
Range:
0*
[0 - 0]
Function:
ID-61 Option SW Version
View the power section.
Array [8]
Range:
0*
DET-618C
[0 - 0]
Function:
View the installed option software version.
111
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
ID-62 Option Ordering No
Array [8]
Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - 0] Shows the ordering number for the installed options.
ID-63 Option Serial No
Array [8]
Range:
0*
[0 - 0]
Function:
View the installed option serial number.
3.17.7 ID-9# Parameter Info
Parameters to view defined parameters and modified
parameters.
ID-92 Defined Parameters
Array [1000]
Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - 9999] View a list of all defined parameters in the
frequency converter. The list ends with 0.
ID-93 Modified Parameters
Array [1000]
Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - 9999] View a list of the parameters that have been
changed from their default setting. The list ends
with 0. Changes may not be visible until up to
30 s after implementation.
ID-99 Parameter Metadata
Array [30]
Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - 9999] This parameter contains data used by the DCT10
software tool.
112
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.18 DR-## Data Read-outs
3.18.2 DR-1# Motor Status
Parameter group related to data readouts in the drive for
references, voltages, control, alarms, warnings, and status
words.
Parameters to view the motor status values.
DR-10 Power [kW]
Range:
3.18.1 DR-0# General Status
0 kW*
Function:
[0 -
3 3
Displays motor power in kW. The value
10000 kW] shown is calculated on the basis of the actual
motor voltage and motor current. The value
Parameters to view the calculated references, the active
control word, and status word.
is filtered, and therefore approx. 30 ms may
DR-00 Control Word
pass from when an input value changes to
when the data read-out values change. The
Range:
resolution of read-out value on fieldbus is in
0*
Function:
10 W steps.
[0 - 65535] View the Control word sent from the frequency
converter via the serial communication port in
hex code.
DR-11 Power [hp]
Range:
DR-01 Reference [Unit]
Range:
0 hp*
Function:
0 ReferenceFeed-
Function:
[0 - 10000 View the motor power in HP. The value
hp]
shown is calculated on the basis of the
actual motor voltage and motor current. The
[-999999 - 999999 View the present
backUnit*
ReferenceFeed-
reference value applied
value is filtered, and therefore approximately
backUnit]
on impulse or analog
30 ms may pass from when an input value
basis in the unit
changes to when the data read-out values
resulting from the
change.
configuration selected
in H-40 Configuration
DR-12 Motor Voltage
Mode (Hz, Nm or RPM).
Range:
0 V*
Function:
[0 - 6000 V] View the motor voltage, a calculated value
DR-02 Reference [%]
Range:
0 %*
used for controlling the motor.
Function:
[-200 - 200
%]
View the total reference. The total
DR-13 Frequency
reference is the sum of digital, analog,
Range:
preset, bus, and freeze references, plus
0 Hz*
Function:
[0 - 6500 Hz] View the motor frequency, without
catch-up and slow-down.
resonance dampening.
DR-03 Status Word
Range:
0*
DR-14 Motor current
Function:
Range:
[0 - 65535] View the Status word sent from the frequency
0 A*
converter via the serial communication port in
[0 - 10000
A]
hex code.
Function:
View the motor current measured as a mean
value, IRMS. The value is filtered, and thus
approximately 30 ms may pass from when
an input value changes to when the data
DR-05 Main Actual Value [%]
Range:
0 %*
read-out values change.
Function:
DR-15 Frequency [%]
[-100 - 100 %] View the two-byte word sent with the
Status word to the bus Master reporting
the Main Actual Value.
Range:
0 %*
[-100 100 %]
DR-09 Custom Readout
Range:
0 CustomReadoutUnit*
motor frequency (without resonance
dampening) as a percentage (scale 0000-4000
Function:
Hex) of F-03 Max Output Frequency 1. Set
PB-16 PCD Read Configuration index 1 to send
[0 - 0 CustomRea- View the value of
doutUnit]
Function:
View a two-byte word reporting the actual
it with the Status Word instead of the MAV.
custom readout from
K-30 Unit for Custom
Readout to K-32 Max
Value of Custom Readout
DET-618C
113
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
DR-16 Torque [Nm]
DR-25 Torque [Nm] High
Range:
Range:
0 Nm*
Function:
Function:
show higher values than the standard
[-3000 - View the torque value with sign, applied to
3000
the motor shaft. Linearity is not exact between
Nm]
160% motor current and torque in relation to
3 3
the rated torque. Some motors supply more
readout in DR-16 Torque [Nm].
3.18.3 DR-3# Drive Status
than 160% torque. Consequently, the min.
value and the max. value will depend on the
Parameters to view the drive status values.
max. motor current as well as the motor used.
The value is filtered, and thus approx. 30 ms
DR-30 DC Link Voltage
may pass from when an input changes value
Range:
to when the data read-out values change.
0 V*
Function:
[0 - 10000 V] View a measured value. The value is filtered
with an 30 ms time constant.
DR-17 Speed [RPM]
Range:
0 RPM*
Function:
[-30000 -
DR-32 Brake Energy /s
View the actual motor RPM. In open
30000 RPM]
Range:
loop or closed loop process control the
0 kW*
motor RPM is estimated. In speed
Function:
[0 - 10000 kW] View the brake power transmitted to an
external brake resistor, stated as an
closed loop modes the motor RPM is
instantaneous value.
measured.
DR-33 Brake Energy /2 min
DR-18 Motor Thermal
Range:
0 %*
[0 - 100
%]
Range:
Function:
0 kW*
View the calculated thermal load on the
Function:
[0 - 10000
View the brake power transmitted to an
kW]
motor. The cut-out limit is 100%. The basis for
external brake resistor. The mean power
is calculated on an average basis for the
calculation is the Electronic Thermal Overload
most recent 120 s.
function selected in F-10 Electronic Overload.
DR-34 Heatsink Temp.
DR-19 KTY sensor temperature
Range:
0 °C*
Range:
Function:
0 °C*
[0 - 0 °C] Returning the actual temperature on KTY
Function:
[0 - 255 °C] View the frequency converter heatsink
temperature. The cut-out limit is 90 ±5 °C,
sensor buil into the motor.
and the motor cuts back in at 60 ±5 °C.
See parameter group F-1#.
DR-35 Drive Thermal
DR-20 Motor Angle
Range:
0*
Range:
Function:
0 %*
[0 - 65535] View the current encoder/resolver angle offset
relative to the index position. The value range
Function:
[0 - 100 %]
DR-36 Drive Nominal Current
of 0-65535 corresponds to 0-2*pi (radians).
Range:
DR-22 Torque [%]
Range:
0 %*
View the percentage load on the inverter.
10.00 A*
Function:
[0.01 - 10000 View the inverter nominal current,
A]
Function:
which should match the nameplate
data on the connected motor. The data
[-200 - 200 %] Value shown is the torque in percent of
nominal torque, with sign, applied to the
are used for calculation of torque,
motor shaft.
motor protection, etc.
DR-25 Torque [Nm] High
DR-37 Drive Max. Current
Range:
Range:
0 Nm*
Function:
[-200000000 -
View the torque value with sign, applied
16.00 A*
[0.01 - 10000 View the inverter maximum current,
A]
200000000 Nm] to the motor shaft. Some motors supply
which should match the nameplate
more than 160% torque. Consequently,
the min. value and the max. value will
data on the connected motor. The data
depend on the max. motor current as
motor protection, etc.
are used for calculation of torque,
well as the motor used. This specific
readout has been adapted to be able to
114
Function:
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
DR-38 Logic Controller State
DR-52 Feedback[Unit]
Range:
Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - 100] View the state of the event under execution by
the LC controller.
Function:
0 ReferenceFeed-
[-999999.999 -
backUnit*
DR-39 Control Card Temp.
Range:
0 °C*
resulting from the
ReferenceFeed-
selection of unit and
backUnit]
scaling in F-50 Reference
Range, F-51 Reference/
Function:
Feedback Unit,
[0 - 100 °C] View the temperature on the control card,
F-52 Minimum Reference
and F-53 Maximum
stated in °C
Reference.
DR-40 Trending Buffer Full
Option:
View the feedback unit
999999.999
Function:
DR-53 Digi Pot Reference
View whether the logging buffer is full (see parameter
group ID-1#). The logging buffer will never be full
Range:
0*
when ID-13 Trending Mode is set to [0] Log always.
Function:
[-200 - 200] View the contribution of the Digital Potentiometer to the actual reference.
[0] * No
[1]
Yes
DR-57 Feedback [RPM]
Range:
DR-48 Speed Ref. After Ramp [RPM]
Range:
0 RPM*
0 RPM*
Function:
[-30000 - 30000
RPM]
This parameter specifies the
reference given to the frequency
converter after the speed ramp.
0*
Read-out parameter where the actual
30000 RPM]
motor RPM from the feed-back source
can be read in both closed loop and
open loop. The feed-back source is
selected by PI-00 Speed PID Feedback
Source.
DR-49 Current Fault Source
Range:
Function:
[-30000 -
Function:
[0 - 8] Value indicates source of current faults including
short circuit, over current, and phase imbalance
(from left):
1-4 Inverter
5-8 Rectifier
0 No fault recorded
3.18.4 DR-5# Ref. & Feedb.
Parameters to view the reference and feedback status
values.
DR-50 External Reference
Range:
0*
Function:
[-200 - 200] View the total reference, the sum of digital,
analog, preset, bus and freeze references, plus
catch-up and slow-down.
DR-51 Pulse Reference
Range:
0*
Function:
[-200 - 200] View the reference value from programmed
digital input(s). The read-out can also reflect
the impulses from an incremental encoder.
DET-618C
115
3 3
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.18.5 DR-6# Inputs/Outputs
DR-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting
Option:
Function:
Parameters to view the digital and analog I/O status
values.
View the setting of input terminal 54.
[0] *
Current
DR-60 Digital Input
[1]
Voltage
Range:
[2]
Pt 1000 [°C]
0*
Function:
[0 -
View the signal states from the active digital inputs.
[3]
Pt 1000 [°F]
1023]
Example: Input 18 corresponds to bit no. 5, ‘0’ = no
signal, ‘1’ = connected signal.
[4]
Ni 1000 [°C]
[5]
Ni 1000 [°F]
Bit 0
Digital input term. 33
DR-64 Analog Input 54
Bit 1
Digital input term. 32
Range:
Bit 2
Digital input term. 29
Bit 3
Digital input term. 27
Bit 4
Digital input term. 19
Bit 5
Digital input term. 18
Bit 6
Digital input term. 37
Bit 7
Digital input GP I/O term. X30/4
0*
[-20 - 20]
View the actual value at input 54.
DR-65 Analog Output 42 [mA]
Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - 30] View the actual value at output 42 in mA. The
value shown reflects the selection in
(OPCGPIO)
Bit 8
Function:
AN-50 Terminal 42 Output.
Digital input GP I/O term. X30/3
(OPCGPIO)
Bit 9
Digital input GP I/O term. X30/2
(OPCGPIO)
Bit 10-63
Reserved for future terminals
Table 3.30 Active Digital Inputs
DR-66 Digital Output [bin]
Range:
0*
[0 - 15]
Function:
View the binary value of all digital outputs.
DR-67 Freq. Input #29 [Hz]
Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - 130000] View the actual frequency rate on terminal 29.
DR-68 Freq. Input #33 [Hz]
Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - 130000] View the actual value of the frequency applied
at terminal 33 as an impulse input.
DR-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz]
Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - 40000] View the actual value of pulses applied to
terminal 27 in digital output mode.
Illustration 3.41 Relay Settings
DR-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz]
Range:
DR-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting
Option:
0*
Function:
[0 - 40000] View the actual value of pulses at terminal 29 in
digital output mode.
Function:
View the setting of input terminal 53.
DR-71 Relay Output [bin]
[0] *
Current
[1]
Voltage
[2]
Pt 1000 [°C]
[3]
Pt 1000 [°F]
[4]
Ni 1000 [°C]
[5]
Ni 1000 [°F]
Range:
0*
DR-62 Analog Input 53
Range:
0*
116
[-20 - 20]
[0 - 511]
Function:
View the settings of all relays.
Illustration 3.43 Relay Settings
Function:
View the actual value at input 53.
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
DR-72 Counter A
Range:
0*
DR-82 Fieldbus REF 1
Function:
[-2147483648 2147483647]
Range:
View the present value of Counter A.
0*
Function:
[-200 - 200] View the two-byte word sent with the control
Counters are useful as comparator
word form the Bus-Master to set the reference
operands, see LC-10 Comparator Operand.
value.
The value can be reset or changed either
For more information, refer to the relevant
via digital inputs (parameter group E-##
network manual.
3 3
Digital Inputs) or by using an LC action
DR-84 Comm. Option STW
(LC-52 Logic Controller Action).
Range:
DR-73 Counter B
Range:
0*
0*
[0 - 65535] View the extended Fieldbus comm. option
Function:
[-2147483648 2147483647]
status word.
View the present value of Counter B.
DR-85 Drive Port CTW 1
Counters are useful as comparator
operands (LC-10 Comparator Operand).
Range:
The value can be reset or changed either
0*
from the Bus-Master. Interpretation of the
by using an Logic Controller action
control word depends on the Fieldbus option
(LC-52 Logic Controller Action).
installed and the Control word profile selected
in O-10 Control Word Profile.
DR-74 Prec. Stop Counter
Range:
Function:
DR-86 Drive Port REF 1
[0 - 2147483647] Returns the actual counter value of
Range:
precise counter (H-84 Precise Stop Counter
Value).
0*
0*
Function:
[-200 - 200] View the two-byte Status word (STW) sent to
the Bus-Master. Interpretation of the Status
word depends on the network option installed
DR-75 Analog In X30/11
Range:
Function:
[0 - 65535] View the two-byte Control word (CTW) received
via digital inputs (parameter group E-0#) or
0*
Function:
and the Control word profile selected in
Function:
O-10 Control Word Profile.
[-20 - 20] View the actual value at input X30/11 of
OPCGPIO General Purpose I/O Option Module.
3.18.7 DR-9# Diagnosis Readout
DR-76 Analog In X30/12
Range:
0*
Parameters to view the alarms, warnings, and extended
status words.
Function:
[-20 - 20] View the actual value at input X30/12 of
DR-90 Alarm Word
OPCGPIO General Purpose I/O Option Module.
Range:
DR-77 Analog Out X30/8 [mA]
Range:
0*
[0 - 30]
0*
Function:
[0 - 4294967295] View the alarm word sent via the serial
Function:
communication port in hex code.
View the actual value at input X30/8 .
DR-91 Alarm Word 2
Range:
3.18.6 DR-8# Fieldbus & Drive Port
0*
communication port in hex code.
Parameters to view the bus references and control words.
DR-80 Fieldbus CTW 1
Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - 4294967295] View the alarm word sent via the serial
DR-92 Warning Word
Function:
Range:
[0 - 65535] View the two-byte Control word (CTW) received
0*
Function:
[0 - 4294967295] View the warning word sent via the serial
communication port in hex code.
from the Bus-Master. Interpretation of the
Control word depends on the Fieldbus option
installed and the Control word profile selected
in O-10 Control Word Profile.
DR-93 Warning Word 2
Range:
For more information, refer to the relevant
0*
Fieldbus manual.
Function:
[0 - 4294967295] View the warning word sent via the serial
communication port in hex code.
DET-618C
117
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
DR-94 Ext. Status Word
Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - 4294967295] Returns the extended warning word sent
via the serial communication port in hex
code.
3 3
118
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.19 LC-## Logic Controller
LC-01 Start Event
Parameter group related to programming the drive's builtin Logic Controller. The Logic Controller consists of a series
of user defined actions (see LC-52 Logic Controller Action)
that are executed when the corresponding user-defined
events are met.
3.19.1 LC-0# LC Settings
Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to activate Logic
Controller.
Option:
[13]
Function:
Out of feedb. range The feedback is outside the range set
in H-76 Warning Feedback Low and
H-77 Warning Feedback High.
[14]
Below feedb. low
The feedback is below the limit set in
H-76 Warning Feedback Low.
Parameters to configure the activation, deactivations and
reset of the Logic Controller (LC).
LC-00 Logic Controller Mode
Option:
[15]
Above feedb. high
The feedback is above the limit set in
H-77 Warning Feedback High.
[16]
Thermal warning
The thermal warning turns on when
the temperature exceeds the limit in
Function:
[0] *
Off
Disables the Logic Controller.
[1]
On
Enables the Logic Controller.
the motor, the frequency converter,
the brake resistor or the thermistor.
[17]
LC-01 Start Event
[18]
Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to activate Logic
Line voltage out of
The mains voltage is outside the
range
specified voltage range.
Reversing
The output is high when the
frequency converter is running
Controller.
Option:
[0] *
False
counter clockwise (the logical product
Function:
of the status bits “running” AND
Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE)
“reverse”).
input to activate Logic Controller.
Enters the fixed value - FALSE
[19]
Warning
A warning is active.
[1]
True
Enters the fixed value - TRUE.
[20]
Alarm (trip)
A (trip) alarm is active.
[2]
Running
The motor is running.
[21]
Alarm (trip lock)
A (Trip lock) alarm is active.
[3]
In range
The motor is running within the
[22]
Comparator 0
Use the result of comparator 0.
programmed current and speed
[23]
Comparator 1
Use the result of comparator 1.
Low to H-73 Warning Speed High.
[24]
Comparator 2
Use the result of comparator 2.
ranges set in H-70 Warning Current
[4]
On reference
The motor is running on reference.
[25]
Comparator 3
Use the result of comparator 3.
[5]
Torque limit
The torque limit, set in F-40 Torque
[26]
Logic rule 0
Use the result of logic rule 0.
Limiter (Driving) or F-41 Torque Limiter
[27]
Logic rule 1
Use the result of logic rule 1.
[28]
Logic rule 2
Use the result of logic rule 2.
[29]
Logic rule 3
Use the result of logic rule 3.
exceeded.
[33]
Digital input DI18
Use the result of digital input 18.
Out of current
The motor current is outside the
[34]
Digital input DI19
Use the result of digital input 19.
range
range set in F-43 Current Limit.
[35]
Digital input DI27
Use the result of digital input 27.
Below I low
The motor current is lower than set
[36]
Digital input DI29
Use the result of digital input 29.
[37]
Digital input DI32
Use the result of digital input 32.
[38]
Digital input DI33
Use the result of digital input 33.
[39]
Start command
A start command is issued.
[40]
Drive stopped
A stop command (Jog, Stop, Qstop,
(Braking), has been exceeded.
[6]
Current Limit
The motor current limit, set in
F-43 Current Limit, has been
[7]
[8]
in H-70 Warning Current Low.
[9]
Above I high
The motor current is higher than set
in H-71 Warning Current High.
[10]
Out of speed range The speed is outside the range set in
H-72 Warning Speed Low and
H-73 Warning Speed High.
[11]
[12]
Below speed low
Above speed high
Coast) is issued – and not from the
Logic Controller itself.
The output speed is lower than the
setting in H-72 Warning Speed Low.
[41]
Reset Trip
A reset is issued
The output speed is higher than the
[42]
Auto-reset Trip
An Auto reset is performed.
[43]
Ok key
[OK] is pressed.
setting in H-73 Warning Speed High.
DET-618C
119
3 3
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
LC-01 Start Event
LC-02 Stop Event
Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to activate Logic
Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to deactivate Logic
Controller.
Controller.
Option:
Function:
[44]
Reset key
[Reset] is pressed.
[45]
Left key
[◄] is pressed.
Option:
[13]
Out of feedb. range
[14]
Below feedb. low
[15]
Above feedb. high
[46]
Right key
[►] is pressed.
[16]
Thermal warning
[47]
Up key
[▲] is pressed.
[17]
Line voltage out of range
Reversing
[19]
Warning
[48]
Down key
[▼] is pressed.
[18]
[50]
Comparator 4
Use the result of comparator 4.
[20]
Alarm (trip)
[21]
Alarm (trip lock)
[22]
Comparator 0
[23]
Comparator 1
[51]
Comparator 5
Use the result of comparator 5.
[60]
Logic rule 4
Use the result of logic rule 4.
[61]
Logic rule 5
Use the result of logic rule 5.
[24]
Comparator 2
[94]
RS Flipflop 0
See parameter group LC-1#
[25]
Comparator 3
Comparators
[26]
Logic rule 0
[27]
Logic rule 1
[28]
Logic rule 2
[95]
RS Flipflop 1
See parameter group LC-1#
Comparators
[96]
RS Flipflop 2
See parameter group LC-1#
Comparators
[97]
[98]
[99]
RS Flipflop 3
RS Flipflop 4
RS Flipflop 5
[101] RS Flipflop 7
Logic rule 3
[30]
Logic Controller Time-out 0
[31]
Logic Controller Time-out 1
See parameter group LC-1#
[32]
Logic Controller Time-out 2
Comparators
[33]
Digital input DI18
See parameter group LC-1#
[34]
Digital input DI19
Comparators
[35]
Digital input DI27
[36]
Digital input DI29
[37]
Digital input DI32
[38]
Digital input DI33
See parameter group LC-1#
[39]
Start command
Comparators
[40]
Drive stopped
See parameter group LC-1#
[41]
Reset Trip
Comparators
[42]
Auto-reset Trip
[43]
Ok key
See parameter group LC-1#
Comparators
[100] RS Flipflop 6
[29]
LC-02 Stop Event
[44]
Reset key
Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to deactivate Logic
[45]
Left key
Controller.
[46]
Right key
Option:
[47]
Up key
[0] *
False
[1]
True
[2]
Running
[3]
In range
[4]
On reference
[5]
Torque limit
[6]
Current Limit
[7]
Out of current range
[8]
Below I low
[9]
Above I high
[10]
Out of speed range
[11]
Below speed low
[12]
Above speed high
120
Function:
Function:
For descriptions [0]-[61], see
[48]
Down key
LC-01 Start Event Start Event
[50]
Comparator 4
[51]
Comparator 5
[60]
Logic rule 4
[61]
Logic rule 5
[70]
Logic Controller Time-out 3 Logic Controller timer 3 is
timed out.
[71]
Logic Controller Time-out 4 Logic Controller timer 4 is
timed out.
[72]
Logic Controller Time-out 5 Logic Controller timer 5 is
timed out.
[73]
Logic Controller Time-out 6 Logic Controller timer 6 is
timed out.
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
LC-02 Stop Event
LC-10 Comparator Operand
Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to deactivate Logic
Array [6]
Controller.
Option:
Option:
[74]
Function:
LC-11 Comparator Operator.
Logic Controller Time-out 7 Logic Controller timer 7 is
Select the variable to be monitored by
the comparator.
timed out.
[75]
Start command given
[76]
Digital input x30 2
[0] *
DISABLED
[77]
Digital input x30 3
[1]
Reference
[78]
Digital input x30 4
[94]
RS Flipflop 0
[96]
[97]
See parameter group LC-1#
Feedback
In the unit [RPM] or [Hz]
RS Flipflop 1
[3]
Motor speed
[RPM] or [Hz]
Comparators
[4]
Motor Current
[A]
See parameter group LC-1#
[5]
Motor torque
[Nm]
Comparators
[6]
Motor power
[kW] or [hp]
See parameter group LC-1#
[7]
Motor Rated
[V]
See parameter group LC-1#
RS Flipflop 2
RS Flipflop 3
RS Flipflop 4
Voltage
[8]
DC-link voltage
[V]
[9]
Motor Thermal
Expressed as a percentage.
[10]
Drive thermal
Expressed as a percentage.
[11]
Heat sink temp.
Expressed as a percentage.
Comparators
[12]
Analog input AI53
Expressed as a percentage.
See parameter group LC-1#
[13]
Analog input AI54
Expressed as a percentage.
Comparators
[14]
Analog input
[V]. AIFB10 is internal 10 V supply.
See parameter group LC-1#
Comparators
[99]
The resulting remote reference (not
[2]
Comparators
[98]
The comparator is disabled.
local) as a percentage.
Comparators
[95]
Function:
TRUE or FALSE, respectively. See
RS Flipflop 5
See parameter group LC-1#
Comparators
[100] RS Flipflop 6
See parameter group LC-1#
[101] RS Flipflop 7
AIFB10
LC-03 Reset Logic Controller
Option:
[0] * Do not reset Logic
Controller
[15]
Function:
[V] Analog input AICCT [17] [°]. AIS24V
AIS24V
is switch mode power supply: SMPS
24V.
Retains programmed settings in all
parameter group LC-## Logic
[17]
Controller.
[1]
Analog input
Analog input
[°]. AICCT is control card temperature.
AICCT
Reset Logic
Resets all parameters in parameter
[18]
Pulse input FI29
Expressed as a percentage.
Controller
group LC-## Logic Controller to default
[19]
Pulse input FI33
Expressed as a percentage.
[20]
Alarm number
The error number.
settings.
3.19.2 LC-1# Comparators
Warning number
[22]
Analog input x30
[23]
Analog input x30
11
Parameters to configure the Logic Controller (LC)
comparators. Comparators are used for comparing
variables with fixed preset values.
12
LC-10 Comparator Operand
Array [6]
Option:
[21]
[30]
Counter A
Number of counts
[31]
Counter B
Number of counts
[50]
FALSE
Function:
Enters the fixed value of false in the
comparator.
Choices [1] to [31] are variables which
will be compared based on their
[51]
TRUE
values. Choices [50] to [186] are digital
[52]
values (TRUE/FALSE) where the
comparison is based on the amount
Enters the fixed value of true in the
comparator.
Control ready
The control board receives supply
voltage
of time during which they are set to
DET-618C
121
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
LC-10 Comparator Operand
LC-10 Comparator Operand
Array [6]
Array [6]
Option:
[53]
Drive ready
3 3
[54]
Running
[55]
Reversing
[56]
In range
Function:
Option:
Function:
The frequency converter is ready for
the motor, the frequency converter,
operation and applies a supply signal
on the control board.
the brake resistor or thermistor.
[82]
Mains out of range The mains voltage is outside the
specified voltage range.
The motor is running.
The output is high when the
[85]
Warning
A warning is active.
frequency converter is running
counter clockwise (the logical product
[86]
Alarm (trip)
A (trip) alarm is active.
of the status bits “running” AND
[87]
Alarm (trip lock)
A (Trip lock) alarm is active.
“reverse”).
[90]
Bus OK
The motor is running within the
programmed current and speed
Active communication (no time-out)
via the serial communication port.
[91]
ranges set in H-70 Warning Current
Torque limit &
If the frequency converter has
stop
received a stop signal and is at the
torque limit, the signal is logic “0”.
Brake fault (IGBT)
The brake IGBT is short circuited.
Mech. brake
The mechanical brake is active.
Low to H-73 Warning Speed High.
[60]
On reference
The motor is running on reference.
[92]
[61]
Below reference,
The motor is running below the value
[93]
low
given in H-74 Warning Reference Low.
Above ref, high
The motor is running above the value
[94]
given in H-75 Warning Reference High
[100] Comparator 0
The result of comparator 0.
The torque limit, set in F-40 Torque
[101] Comparator 1
The result of comparator 1.
Limiter (Driving) or F-41 Torque Limiter
[102] Comparator 2
The result of comparator 2.
[103] Comparator 3
The result of comparator 3.
[104] Comparator 4
The result of comparator 4.
[105] Comparator 5
The result of comparator 5.
[62]
[65]
Torque limit
control
Safe stop active
(Braking), has been exceeded.
[66]
Current Limit
The motor current limit, set in
F-43 Current Limit, has been exceeded.
[67]
[68]
Out of current
The motor current is outside the
range
range set in F-43 Current Limit.
[110] Logic rule 0
The result of Logic rule 0.
The motor current is lower than set in
[111] Logic rule 1
The result of Logic rule 1.
[112] Logic rule 2
The result of Logic rule 2.
[113] Logic rule 3
The result of Logic rule 3.
[114] Logic rule 4
The result of Logic rule 4.
Below I low
H-70 Warning Current Low.
[69]
Above I high
The motor current is higher than set
in H-71 Warning Current High.
[70]
[71]
Out of speed
The speed is outside the range set in
range
H-72 Warning Speed Low and
[115] Logic rule 5
The result of Logic rule 5.
H-73 Warning Speed High.
[120] Logic Controller
The result of LC timer 0.
Below speed low
The output speed is lower than the
setting in H-72 Warning Speed Low.
[72]
Above speed high
The output speed is higher than the
setting in H-73 Warning Speed High.
[75]
Out of feedback
The feedback is outside the range set
range
in H-76 Warning Feedback Low and
H-77 Warning Feedback High.
[76]
[77]
[80]
Below feedback
The feedback is below the limit set in
low
H-76 Warning Feedback Low.
Above feedback
The feedback is above the limit set in
high
H-77 Warning Feedback High.
Thermal warning
Time-out 0
The thermal warning turns on when
[121] Logic Controller
[122] Logic Controller
The result of LC timer 2.
Time-out 2
[123] Logic Controller
The result of LC timer 3.
Time-out 3
[124] Logic Controller
The result of LC timer 4.
Time-out 4
[125] Logic Controller
The result of LC timer 5.
Time-out 5
[126] Logic Controller
The result of LC timer 6.
Time-out 6
[127] Logic Controller
the temperature exceeds the limit in
The result of LC timer 7.
Time-out 7
[130] Digital input DI18
122
The result of LC timer 1.
Time-out 1
DET-618C
Digital input 18. High = True.
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
LC-10 Comparator Operand
LC-11 Comparator Operator
Array [6]
Array [6]
Option:
Function:
Option:
Digital input 19. High = True.
[132] Digital input DI27
Digital input 27. High = True.
be TRUE, when the variable selected in
LC-10 Comparator Operand is smaller than
[133] Digital input DI29
Digital input 29. High = True.
the fixed value in LC-12 Comparator Value.
[134] Digital input DI32
Digital input 32. High = True.
[135] Digital input DI33
Digital input 33. High = True.
The result will be FALSE, if the variable
selected in LC-10 Comparator Operand is
[150] Logic Controller
Use the result of the Logic Controller
digital output A
[151] Logic Controller
[0]
Function:
[131] Digital input DI19
<
Select [0] < for the result of the evaluation to
greater than the fixed value in
output A.
LC-12 Comparator Value.
[1] * ≈ (equal)
be TRUE, when the variable selected in
Use the result of the LC output C.
equal to the fixed value in LC-12 Comparator
Value.
digital output B
[152] Logic Controller
LC-10 Comparator Operand is approximately
digital output C
[153] Logic Controller
Use the result of the LC output D.
[2]
>
Select [2] > for the inverse logic of option [0]
digital output D
[154] Logic Controller
<.
Use the result of the LC output E.
[5]
digital output E
[155] Logic Controller
TRUE longer
than..
Use the result of the LC output F.
[6]
digital output F
[160] Relay 1
Relay 1 is active
[161] Relay 2
Relay 2 is active
FALSE longer
than..
[7]
[180] Local referecnce
active
High when F-02 Operation Method =
FALSE
shorter
than..
LC-12 Comparator Value
High when F-02 Operation Method= [1]
Remote or [0] Linked to hand/auto,
Array [6]
Range:
0*
while the keypad is in Auto mode.
[182] Start command
[8]
[2] Local or when F-02 Operation
Method is [0] Linked to hand Auto, at
Hand mode.
active
TRUE shorter
than..
the same time as the keypad is in
[181] Remote reference
Select [1] ≈ for the result of the evaluation to
Use the result of the LC output B.
Function:
[-100000 100000]
High when there is an active start
A stop command (Jog, Stop, Qstop,
Coast) is issued – and not from the
Logic Controller itself.
[185] Drive in hand
mode
[186] Drive in auto
mode
that is monitored by this comtor. This is
an array parameter containing comtor
values 0 to 5.
command, and no stop command.
[183] Drive stopped
Enter the ‘trigger level’ for the variable
LC-15 RS-FF Operand S
Option:
Function:
High when the frequency converter is
[0] *
False
in hand mode.
[1]
True
High when the frequency converter is
[2]
Running
in auto mode.
[3]
In range
[4]
On reference
[5]
Torque limit
[187] Start command
given
[190] Digital input x30 2
[191] Digital input x30 3
[192] Digital input x30 4
DET-618C
[6]
Current Limit
[7]
Out of current range
[8]
Below I low
[9]
Above I high
[10]
Out of speed range
[11]
Below speed low
[12]
Above speed high
[13]
Out of feedb. range
[14]
Below feedb. low
[15]
Above feedb. high
123
3 3
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
LC-15 RS-FF Operand S
Option:
LC-15 RS-FF Operand S
Function:
Option:
Function:
[16]
Thermal warning
[96]
RS Flipflop 2
[17]
Line voltage out of range
[97]
RS Flipflop 3
[18]
Reversing
[98]
RS Flipflop 4
[19]
Warning
[99]
RS Flipflop 5
[20]
Alarm (trip)
[100]
RS Flipflop 6
[21]
Alarm (trip lock)
[101]
RS Flipflop 7
[22]
Comparator 0
[23]
Comparator 1
[24]
Comparator 2
[25]
Comparator 3
[0] *
False
[26]
Logic rule 0
[1]
True
Logic rule 1
[2]
Running
Logic rule 2
[3]
In range
[29]
Logic rule 3
[4]
On reference
[30]
Logic Controller Time-out 0
[5]
Torque limit
[31]
Logic Controller Time-out 1
[6]
Current Limit
[32]
Logic Controller Time-out 2
[7]
Out of current range
[33]
Digital input DI18
[8]
Below I low
[34]
Digital input DI19
[9]
Above I high
[35]
Digital input DI27
[10]
Out of speed range
[36]
Digital input DI29
[11]
Below speed low
[37]
Digital input DI32
[12]
Above speed high
[38]
Digital input DI33
[13]
Out of feedb. range
[39]
Start command
[14]
Below feedb. low
[40]
Drive stopped
[15]
Above feedb. high
[41]
Reset Trip
[16]
Thermal warning
[42]
Auto-reset Trip
[17]
Line voltage out of range
Ok key
[18]
Reversing
Reset key
[19]
Warning
[45]
Left key
[20]
Alarm (trip)
[46]
Right key
[21]
Alarm (trip lock)
[47]
Up key
[22]
Comparator 0
[48]
Down key
[23]
Comparator 1
Comparator 4
[24]
Comparator 2
Comparator 5
[25]
Comparator 3
Logic rule 4
[26]
Logic rule 0
[61]
Logic rule 5
[27]
Logic rule 1
[70]
Logic Controller Time-out 3
[28]
Logic rule 2
[71]
Logic Controller Time-out 4
[29]
Logic rule 3
[72]
Logic Controller Time-out 5
[30]
Logic Controller Time-out 0
[73]
Logic Controller Time-out 6
[31]
Logic Controller Time-out 1
Logic Controller Time-out 7
[32]
Logic Controller Time-out 2
[75]
Start command given
[33]
Digital input DI18
[76]
Digital input x30 2
[34]
Digital input DI19
Digital input x30 3
[35]
Digital input DI27
Digital input x30 4
[36]
Digital input DI29
ATEX OL cur. warning
[37]
Digital input DI32
ATEX OL cur. alarm
[38]
Digital input DI33
[92]
ATEX OL freq. warning
[39]
Start command
[93]
ATEX OL freq. alarm
[40]
Drive stopped
[94]
RS Flipflop 0
[41]
Reset Trip
RS Flipflop 1
[42]
Auto-reset Trip
[27]
[28]
[43]
[44]
[50]
[51]
[60]
[74]
[77]
[78]
[90]
[91]
[95]
124
LC-16 RS-FF Operand R
Option:
DET-618C
Function:
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.19.4 LC-4# Logic Rules
LC-16 RS-FF Operand R
Option:
Function:
[43]
Ok key
[44]
Reset key
Parameters to configure the Logic Controller (LC) Logic
Rules. Logic Rules are used to define what conditions need
to be met for the LC to step to the next event.
[45]
Left key
[46]
Right key
LC-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1
[47]
Up key
Array [6]
[48]
Down key
[50]
Comparator 4
[51]
Comparator 5
[60]
Logic rule 4
See LC-01 Start Event ([0] - [61]) and LC-02 Stop Event
[61]
Logic rule 5
([70] - [75]) for further description.
[70]
Logic Controller Time-out 3
[71]
Logic Controller Time-out 4
LC-41 Logic Rule Operator 1
[72]
Logic Controller Time-out 5
Array [6]
[73]
Logic Controller Time-out 6
Option:
[74]
Logic Controller Time-out 7
Select the first logical operator to use on
[75]
Start command given
the Boolean inputs from LC-40 Logic Rule
[76]
Digital input x30 2
Boolean 1 and LC-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2.
[77]
Digital input x30 3
[LC-##] signifies the boolean input of
[78]
Digital input x30 4
parameter group LC-## Logic Controller.
[90]
ATEX OL cur. warning
[91]
ATEX OL cur. alarm
[92]
ATEX OL freq. warning
[93]
ATEX OL freq. alarm
[94]
RS Flipflop 0
[95]
RS Flipflop 1
[96]
RS Flipflop 2
[2]
OR
Evaluates the expression [LC-40] OR [LC-42].
[97]
RS Flipflop 3
[3]
AND NOT
Evaluates the expression [LC-40] AND NOT
[98]
RS Flipflop 4
[99]
RS Flipflop 5
[100]
RS Flipflop 6
[101]
RS Flipflop 7
Option:
Function:
[0] * False Select the first boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input for the
selected logic rule.
Function:
[0] * DISABLED
[1]
AND
Evaluates the expression [LC-40] AND
[LC-42].
[LC-42].
[4]
OR NOT
NOT AND
NOT OR
Evaluates the expression NOT [LC-40] OR
[LC-42].
Parameters to configure the Logic Controller (LC) timers.
Timers are used to define when an event can occur.
[7]
NOT AND NOT Evaluates the expression NOT [LC-40] AND
NOT [LC-42].
LC-20 Logic Controller Timer
[8]
Function:
[0.000 -
Evaluates the expression NOT [LC-40] AND
[LC-42].
[6]
0.000]
Evaluates the expression [LC-40] OR NOT
[LC-42].
3.19.3 LC-2# Timers
0.000*
Ignores LC-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2,
LC-43 Logic Rule Operator 2, and LC-44 Logic
Rule Boolean 3.
[5]
Range:
3 3
NOT OR NOT
Enter the value to define the duration of the
FALSE output from the programmed timer.
A timer is only FALSE if it is started by an
action (i.e. [29] Start timer 1) and until the
LC-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2
Array [6]
Option:
given timer value has elapsed.
Evaluates the expression NOT [LC-40] OR
NOT [LC-42].
Function:
[0] * False Select the second boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input for
the selected logic rule. See LC-01 Start Event ([0] [61]) and LC-02 Stop Event ([70] - [75]) for further
description.
DET-618C
125
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
LC-43 Logic Rule Operator 2
LC-52 Logic Controller Action
Array [6]
Array [20]
Option:
Function:
3 3
Option:
Function:
Select the second logical operator to be
LC-51 Logic Controller Event) is evaluated
used on the boolean input calculated in
LC-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1, LC-41 Logic Rule
as true. The following actions are
Operator 1, and LC-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2,
[0] *DISABLED
available for selection:
and the boolean input coming from
LC-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2.
[1]
No action
[LC-44] signifies the boolean input of
[2]
Select set-up 1
Changes the active set-up (K-10 Active
LC-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3.
[LC-40/LC-42] signifies the boolean input
Set-up) to ‘1’.
calculated in LC-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1,
with other set-up commands coming
LC-41 Logic Rule Operator 1, and LC-42 Logic
from either the digital inputs or via a
Rule Boolean 2. [0] DISABLED (factory
Network.
If the set-up is changed, it will merge
setting). select this option to ignore
[3]
Select set-up 2
LC-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3.
Changes the active set-up K-10 Active Setup) to ‘2’.
[0] * DISABLED
If the set-up is changed, it will merge
[1]
with other set-up commands coming
from either the digital inputs or via a
AND
[2]
OR
[3]
AND NOT
[4]
OR NOT
[5]
NOT AND
Set-up) to ‘3’.
[6]
NOT OR
If the set-up is changed, it will merge
[7]
NOT AND NOT
with other set-up commands coming
[8]
NOT OR NOT
from either the digital inputs or via a
Network.
[4]
Select set-up 3
Changes the active set-up (K-10 Active
Network.
LC-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3
[5]
Select set-up 4
Array [6]
Option:
Changes the active set-up (K-10 Active
Set-up) to ‘4’.
If the set-up is changed, it will merge
Function:
with other set-up commands coming
[0] * False Select the third boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input for
from either the digital inputs or via a
Network.
the selected logic rule. See LC-01 Start Event ([0] [61]) and LC-02 Stop Event ([70] - [75]) for further
description.
[10] Select preset ref Selects preset reference 0.
0
3.19.5 LC-5# States
If the active preset reference is changed,
it will merge with other preset reference
commands coming from either the digital
inputs or via a Network.
Parameters to configure the Logic Controller (LC) states.
States define the events and actions to take place in the
drive.
[11] Select preset ref Selects preset reference 1.
1
it will merge with other preset reference
commands coming from either the digital
LC-51 Logic Controller Event
Array [20]
Option:
inputs or via a Network.
Function:
[12] Select preset ref Selects preset reference 2.
[0] * False Select the boolean input (TRUE or FALSE) to define
2
the Logic Controller event.See LC-01 Start Event ([0] -
commands coming from either the digital
description.
inputs or via a Network.
LC-52 Logic Controller Action
[13] Select preset ref Selects preset reference 3.
3
Array [20]
Option:
[0] * DISABLED
If the active preset reference is changed,
it will merge with other preset reference
[61]) and LC-02 Stop Event ([70] - [74]) for further
Function:
Select the action corresponding to the LC
event. Actions are executed when the
corresponding event (defined in
126
If the active preset reference is changed,
DET-618C
If the active preset reference is changed,
it will merge with other preset reference
commands coming from either the digital
inputs or via a Network.
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
LC-52 Logic Controller Action
LC-52 Logic Controller Action
Array [20]
Array [20]
Option:
Function:
Option:
[14] Select preset ref Selects preset reference 4.
4
[31] Start timer 2
If the active preset reference is changed,
it will merge with other preset reference
commands coming from either the digital
inputs or via a Network.
commands coming from either the digital
inputs or via a Network.
If the active preset reference is changed,
it will merge with other preset reference
If the active preset reference is changed,
it will merge with other preset reference
commands coming from either the digital
inputs or via a Network.
Any output with LC output F will be low.
low
high.
[39] Set digital out B Any output with LC output B will be
high
high.
[40] Set digital out C Any output with LC output C will be
high.
[41] Set digital out D Any output with LC output D will be
high
high.
Selects ramp 2.
[42] Set digital out E
Decel 2
high
Selects ramp 3.
Decel 3
[43] Set digital out F
Any output with LC output E will be
high.
Any output with LC output Fwill be high.
high
Selects ramp 4.
Decel 4
[22] Run
[37] Set digital out F
high
Selects ramp 1.
Decel 1
[21] Select Accel/
Any output with LC output E will be low.
low
high
[17] Select preset ref Selects preset reference 7.
[20] Select Accel/
low
[35] Set digital out D Any output with LC output D will be low.
[38] Set digital out A Any output with LC output A will be
inputs or via a Network.
[19] Select Accel/
[34] Set digital out C Any output with LC output Cwill be low.
low
commands coming from either the digital
[18] Select Accel/
low
[36] Set digital out E
[16] Select preset ref Selects preset reference 6.
7
[32] Set digital out A Any output with LC output A will be low.
low
If the active preset reference is changed,
it will merge with other preset reference
6
Timer for further description.
[33] Set digital out B Any output with LC output B will be low.
[15] Select preset ref Selects preset reference 5.
5
Function:
Starts timer 2, see LC-20 Logic Controller
[60] Reset Counter A Resets Counter A to zero.
Issues a start command to the frequency
[61] Reset Counter B
Resets Counter B to zero.
[70] Start timer 3
Start Timer 3, see LC-20 Logic Controller
converter.
[23] Run reverse
Issues a start reverse command to the
Timer for further description.
frequency converter.
[71] Start timer 4
[24] Stop
Issues a stop command to the frequency
Start Timer 4, see LC-20 Logic Controller
Timer for further description.
converter.
[72] Start timer 5
[25] Qstop
Issues a quick stop command to the
Start Timer 5, see LC-20 Logic Controller
Timer for further description.
frequency converter.
[73] Start timer 6
[26] Dcstop
Issues a DC stop command to the
Start Timer 6, see LC-20 Logic Controller
Timer for further description.
frequency converter.
[74] Start timer 7
[27] Coast
The frequency converter coasts
Start Timer 7, see LC-20 Logic Controller
Timer for further description.
immediately. All stop commands
including the coast command stop the
Logic Controller.
[28] Freeze output
Freezes the output frequency of the
frequency converter.
[29] Start timer 0
Starts timer 0, see LC-20 Logic Controller
Timer for further description.
[30] Start timer 1
Starts timer 1, see LC-20 Logic Controller
Timer for further description.
DET-618C
127
3 3
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.20 B-## Brakes
Parameter group related to the brake features in the drive.
B-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM]
Range:
Function:
0 RPM*
[0 - 60000
Set the DC brake cut-in speed for
RPM]
3.20.1 B-0# DC Brake
activation of the DC braking current
set in B-01 DC Brake Current, upon a
stop command.
Parameters to configure the DC brake and DC hold
functions.
B-00 DC Hold Current
Range:
Function:
50 %*
[0 160 %]
B-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz]
Range:
Function:
0.0 Hz*
[0 - 1000.0 Hz] Set the DC brake cut-in speed for
Enter a value for holding current as a
activation of the DC braking current set
percentage of the rated motor current IM,N set
in B-01 DC Brake Current, upon a stop
in P-03 Motor Current. 100% DC holding current
corresponds to IM,N.
command.
This parameter holds the motor function
(holding torque) or pre-heats the motor.
B-05 Maximum Reference
Range:
Function:
This parameter is active if DC hold is selected in
par. F-53 ReferenceFeed-
F-25 Start Function [0] or H-80 Function at Stop
[1].
backUnit*
[par. F-52 - 999999.999
ReferenceFeedbackUnit]
B-06 Parking Current
NOTE
Range:
The maximum value depends on the rated motor current.
Avoid 100 % current for too long. It may damage the
motor.
Low values of DC hold will produce larger than expected
currents with larger motor power sizes. This error will
increase as the motor power increases.
50 %*
Function:
[0 - 1000 %] Set current as percentage of rated motor
current, P-03 Motor Current. Will be used
when enabled in F-20 PM Start Mode.
B-07 Parking Time
Range:
3 s*
B-01 DC Brake Current
Range:
B-06 Parking Current, once activated.
Function:
50
%*
Function:
[0.1 - 60 s] Set the duration of the Parking Current set in
[0 1000 %]
Enter a value for current as a percentage of the
rated motor current IM,N, see P-03 Motor Current.
100% DC braking current corresponds to IM,N.
DC brake current is applied on a stop
command, when the speed is lower than the
limit set in B-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM];
when the DC Brake Inverse function is active; or
3.20.2 B-1# Brake Energy Funct.
Parameters to configure the dynamic braking functions in
the drive. Note! This applies only to drives ordered with
the optional factory installed brake chopper option.
B-10 Brake Function
via the serial communication port. The braking
Option:
current is active during the time period set in
[0] * Off
No brake resistor is installed.
[1]
Resistor
A brake resistor is incorporated in the system,
brake
for dissipation of surplus brake energy as heat.
Function:
B-02 DC Braking Time.
NOTE
Connecting a brake resistor allows a higher DC
The maximum value depends on the rated motor current.
Avoid 100 % current for too long. It may damage the
motor.
link voltage during braking (generating
operation). The Resistor brake function is only
active in frequency converters with an integral
dynamic brake.
B-02 DC Braking Time
Range:
10 s*
Function:
[2]
AC brake
Is selected to improve braking without using a
brake resistor. This parameter controls an
[0 - 60 s] Set the duration of the DC braking current set
overmagnetization of the motor when running
in B-01 DC Brake Current, once activated.
with a generatoric load. This function can
improve the OVC-function. Increasing the
electrical losses in the motor allows the OVC
function to increase the braking torque without
exceeding the over voltage limit. Please note
128
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
B-10 Brake Function
B-13 Braking Thermal Overload
Option:
Option:
Function:
Function:
that AC brake is not as effective as dynamic
This parameter is only active in frequency
breaking with resistor.
converters with an integral dynamic brake.
AC brake is for Adv. Vector Control and flux
This parameter enables monitoring of the
mode in both open and closed loop.
power to the brake resistor. The power is
3 3
calculated on the basis of the resistance
B-11 Brake Resistor (ohm)
(B-11 Brake Resistor (ohm)), the DC link voltage,
Range:
and the resistor duty time.
Function:
50.00
[5.00 -
Set the brake resistor value in Ohms.
Ohm*
65535.00
This value is used for monitoring the
Ohm]
power to the brake resistor in
[0] * Off
No brake power monitoring required.
[1]
Activates a warning on the display when the
Warning
power transmitted over 120 s exceeds 100% of
B-13 Braking Thermal Overload. This
the monitoring limit (B-12 Brake Power Limit
parameter is only active in frequency
(kW) .
The warning disappears when the transmitted
converters with an integral dynamic
brake.
power falls below 80% of the monitoring limit.
Use this parameter for values without
[2]
decimals. For a selection with two
Trip
Trips frequency converter and displays an
alarm when the calculated power exceeds
decimals, use B-11 Brake Resistor (ohm).
100% of the monitoring limit.
B-12 Brake Power Limit (kW)
Range:
5.000
kW*
[3]
Function:
[0.001 -
Warning
Activates both of the above, including
and trip
warning, trip and alarm.
B-12 Brake Power Limit (kW) is the expected
2000.000
average power dissipated in the brake
kW]
resistor over a period of 120 s. It is used as
the monitoring limit for DR-33 Brake Energy /2
min and thereby specifies when a warning/
alarm is to be given.
To calculate B-12 Brake Power Limit (kW), the
following formula can be used.
Pbr,avg W =
2 V ×t s
U br
br
Rbr Ω × T br s
If power monitoring is set to [0] Off or [1] Warning, the
brake function remains active, even if the monitoring limit
is exceeded. This may lead to thermal overload of the
resistor. It is also possible to generate a warning via a
relay/digital outputs. The measuring accuracy of the power
monitoring depends on the accuracy of the resistance of
the resistor (better than ±20%).
B-15 Brake Check
Option:
Pbr,avg is the average power dissipated in the
brake resistor, Rbr is the resistance of the
brake resistor. tbr is the active breaking time
within the 120 s period, Tbr.
Ubr is the DC voltage where the brake
Function:
Select type of test and monitoring function to
check the connection to the brake resistor, or
whether a brake resistor is present, and then
display a warning or an alarm in the event of a
fault.
resistor is active. This depends on the unit as
follows:
NOTE
The brake resistor disconnection function is
tested during power-up. However the brake
IGBT test is performed when there is no
braking. A warning or trip disconnects the
brake function.
200-240 V: 390 V
380-480 V: 778 V
525-600 V: 943 V
525-690 V: 1099 V
NOTE
If Rbr is not known or if Tbr is different
from 120 s, the practical approach is to
run the brake application, readout
DR-33 Brake Energy /2 min and then
enter this + 20% in B-12 Brake Power
Limit (kW).
The testing sequence is as follows:
1.
The DC link ripple amplitude is
measured for 300 ms without braking.
2.
The DC link ripple amplitude is
measured for 300 ms with the brake
turned on.
3.
If the DC link ripple amplitude while
braking is lower than the DC link ripple
DET-618C
129
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
B-15 Brake Check
B-17 Over-voltage Control
Option:
Option:
Function:
3 3
4.
amplitude before braking + 1%: Brake
Over-voltage control (OVC) reduces the risk
check has failed by returning a warning
of the frequency converter tripping due to
or alarm.
an over voltage on the DC link caused by
If the DC link ripple amplitude while
generative power from the load.
braking is higher than the DC link
ripple amplitude before braking + 1%:
Brake check is OK.
[0]
Off
Monitors brake resistor and brake IGBT for a
short-circuit during operation. If a short-circuit
*
[1]
Warning
Function:
[0] * Disabled
No OVC required.
[1]
[2]
Enabled (not
Activates OVC except when using a stop
at stop)
signal to stop the frequency converter.
Enabled
Activates OVC.
occurs, warning 25 appears.
NOTE
Monitors brake resistor and brake IGBT for a
OVC must not be enabled in hoisting applications.
short-circuit, and runs a test for brake resistor
disconnection during power-up.
[2]
Trip
Monitors for a short-circuit or disconnection of
the brake resistor, or a short-circuit of the brake
IGBT. If a fault occurs, the frequency converter
cuts out while displaying an alarm (trip locked).
[3]
Stop and
Monitors for a short-circuit or disconnection of
trip
the brake resistor, or a short-circuit of the brake
B-18 Brake Check Condition
Range:
[0] * At Power Up
[1]
is displayed (e.g. warning 25, 27 or 28).
Monitors for a short-circuit or disconnection of
the brake resistor, or a short-circuit of the brake
IGBT. If a fault occurs, the frequency converter
performs a controlled decel.
[5]
Trip Lock
NOTE
Remove a warning arising in connection with [0] Off or [1]
Warning by cycling the mains supply. The fault must be
corrected first. For [0] Off or [1] Warning, the frequency
converter keeps running even if a fault is located.
This parameter is only active in frequency converters with
an integral dynamic brake.
B-16 AC brake Max. Current
Range:
100 %*
Function:
[0 - 1000.0 %] Enter the maximum permissible current
when using AC brake to avoid
overheating of motor windings.
NOTE
B-16 AC brake Max. Current will not have effect when
P-20 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non salient SPM.
130
After Coast Situations Brake check will be performed after
coast situations
decels to coast and then trips. A trip lock alarm
AC brake
Brake check will be performed at
power up
IGBT. If a fault occurs, the frequency converter
[4]
Function:
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.20.3 B-2# Mechanical Brake
Parameters for controlling operation of an electro-magnetic (mechanical) brake, typically required in hoisting applications.
To control a mechanical brake, a relay output (relay 01 or relay 02) or a programmed digital output (terminal 27 or 29) is
required. Normally this output must be closed during periods when the frequency converter is unable to ‘hold’ the motor,
e.g. due to an excessive load. Select [32] Mechanical Brake Control for applications with an electro-magnetic brake in
E-24 Function Relay, E-20 Terminal 27 Digital Output, or E-21 Terminal 29 Digital Output. When selecting [32] Mechanical brake
control, the mechanical brake is closed from start up until the output current is above the level selected in B-20 Release
Brake Current. During stop, the mechanical brake activates when the speed falls below the level specified in B-21 Activate
Brake Speed [RPM]. If the frequency converter enters an alarm condition or an over-current or over-voltage situation, the
mechanical brake immediately cuts in. This is also the case during safe stop.
NOTE
Protection mode and trip delay features (SP-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit and SP-26 Trip Delay at Drive Fault) may delay the
activation of the mechanical brake in an alarm condition. These features must be disabled in hoisting applications.
Illustration 3.44
DET-618C
131
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
B-20 Release Brake Current
B-23 Activate Brake Delay
Range:
Range:
Function:
par.
[0 - par.
DR-37 A* DR-37 A]
3 3
Function:
Set the motor current for release of the
After setting B-23 Activate Brake Delay the torque
mechanical brake, when a start condition
drops to zero in few minutes. The sudden torque
is present. The default value is the
change leads to movement and noise.
maximum current the inverter can provide
for the particular power size. The upper
B-24 Stop Delay
limit is specified in DR-37 Drive Max.
Range:
Current.
0 s*
Function:
[0 - 5 s] Set the time interval from the moment when the
NOTE
motor is stopped until the brake closes. This
When Mechanical brake control
output is selected but no mechanical
brake is connected, the function will
not work by default setting due to
too low motor current.
parameter is a part of the stopping function.
B-25 Brake Release Time
Range:
Function:
0.20 s*
[0 - 5 s] This value defines the time it takes for the
mechanical brake to open/ close. This
parameter must act as a time-out when brake
B-21 Activate Brake Speed [RPM]
Range:
feedback is activated.
Function:
0 RPM*
[0 - 30000
RPM]
Set the motor speed for activation of
the mechanical brake, when a stop
condition is present. The upper speed
B-26 Torque Ref
Range:
0 %*
Function:
[0 - 0 %] The value defines the torque applied against
limit is specified in H-73 Warning Speed
the closed mechanical brake, before release
High.
B-22 Activate Brake Speed [Hz]
Range:
0 Hz*
Function:
B-27 Torque Ramp Time
Range:
0.2 s*
Function:
[0 - 5 s] The value defines the duration of the torque
[0 - 5000.0 Hz] Set the motor frequency for activation of
ramp in clockwise direction.
the mechanical brake, when a stop
condition is present.
B-23 Activate Brake Delay
Range:
0 s*
[0 5 s]
Function:
B-28 Gain Boost Factor
Range:
1*
4]
Enter the brake delay time of the coast after decel
Function:
When a speed PID-control is connected to the
output (flux closed loop) it must be possible to
boost the proportional gain of the control during
time. The shaft is held at zero speed with full
the Activate Brake Delay (B-23 Activate Brake Delay).
holding torque. Ensure that the mechanical brake
has locked the load before the motor enters coast
By increasing the gain, the bump when the motor
mode.
The risk of oscillation is very small due to the
To adjust transition of the load to the mechanical
relatively short duration and the low (zero) speed.
takes over the load from the brake can be reduced.
brake, set B-23 Activate Brake Delay and B-24 Stop
Delay.
Setting of brake delay parameters does not impact
the torque. The frequency converter does not
register that mechanical brake is holding the load.
132
[0 -
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3 3
Illustration 3.45 Brake release sequence for hoist mechanical brake control
I) Activate brake delay: The frequency converter starts again from the mechanical brake engaged position.
II) Stop delay: When the time between successive starts is shorter than the setting in B-24 Stop Delay, the frequency converter starts
without applying the mechanical brake (e.g. reversing).
DET-618C
133
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.21 PI-## PID Controls
Parameter group related to PID Controls
PI-03 Speed PID Integral Time
Range:
Function:
long to regulate errors. This parameter is used
with [0] Speed open loop and [1] Speed closed
3.21.1 PI-0# Speed PID Control
Parameters to configure the Speed PID Control.
PI-00 Speed PID Feedback Source
Option:
Function:
NOTE
loop control, set in H-40 Configuration Mode.
PI-04 Speed PID Differentiation Time
Range:
30.0
Function:
[0 -
ms*
Enter the speed controller differentiation time.
200 ms] The differentiator does not react to constant
error. It provides gain proportional to the rate
This parameter cannot be
adjusted while the motor is
running.
of change of the speed feedback. The quicker
the error changes, the stronger the gain from
the differentiator. The gain is proportional with
the speed at which errors change. Setting this
Select the encoder for closed loop
parameter to zero disables the differentiator.
feedback.
This parameter is used with H-40 Configuration
The feedback may come from a
Mode [1] Speed closed loop control.
different encoder (typically
mounted on the application itself)
than the motor mounted encoder
feedback selected in H-42 Flux
Motor Feedback Source.
PI-05 Speed PID Diff. Gain Limit
Range:
5*
Function:
[1 - 20] Set a limit for the gain provided by the differentiator. Since the differential gain increases at higher
[0] * Motor feedback par.
frequencies, limiting the gain may be useful. For
H-42
example, set up a pure D-link at low frequencies
[1]
24V encoder
and a constant D-link at higher frequencies. This
[2]
OPCENC
parameter is used with H-40 Configuration Mode [1]
[3]
OPCRES
Speed closed loop control.
[6]
Analog Input 53
[7]
Analog Input 54
[8]
Frequency input 29
[9]
Frequency input 33
PI-02 Speed PID Proportional Gain
Range:
0*
PI-06 Speed PID Lowpass Filter Time
Range:
10.0
ms*
Function:
Function:
[0.1 - Set a time constant for the speed control low-
100
pass filter. The low-pass filter improves steady-
ms]
state performance and dampens oscillations on
the feedback signal. This is an advantage if there
[0 - 1] Enter the speed controller proportional gain. Quick
is a great amount on noise in the system, see
control is obtained at high amplification. However if
amplification is too great, the process may become
Illustration 3.46. For example, if a time constant
unstable.
frequency for the low-pass filter will be 1/0.1= 10
(τ) of 100 ms is programmed, the cut-off
RAD/s., corresponding to (10/2 x π) = 1.6 Hz. The
PI-03 Speed PID Integral Time
PID regulator only regulates a feedback signal
Range:
8.0
ms*
Function:
Enter the speed controller integral time, which
that varies by a frequency of less than 1.6 Hz. If
the feedback signal varies by a higher frequency
20000
determines the time the internal PID control
than 1.6 Hz, the PID regulator does not react.
ms]
takes to correct errors. The greater the error,
the more quickly the gain increases. The
Practical settings of PI-06 Speed PID Lowpass Filter
Time taken from the number of pulses per
integral time causes a delay of the signal and
revolutions from encoder:
[1.0 -
therefore a dampening effect, and can be used
Encoder PPR
to eliminate steady state speed error. Obtain
quick control through a short integral time,
512
10 ms
1024
5 ms
integral time disables the integral action,
2048
2 ms
leading to major deviations from the required
4096
1 ms
though if the integral time is too short, the
process becomes unstable. An excessively long
reference, since the process regulator takes too
134
PI-06 Speed PID
Lowpass Filter Time
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
NOTE
PI-07 Speed PID Feedback Gear Ratio
Severe filtering can be detrimental to dynamic
performance.
This parameter is used with H-40 Configuration Mode [1]
Speed closed loop and [2] Torque control.
The filter time in flux sensorless must be adjusted to
3-5 ms.
Range:
1*
Function:
[0.0001 - 32.0000]
3 3
Illustration 3.47
PI-08 Speed PID Feed Forward Factor
Range:
0 %*
Function:
[0 - 500 %] The reference signal bypasses the speed
controller by the amount specified. This
feature increases the dynamic performance
of the speed control loop.
3.21.2 PI-1# Torque PI Control
PI-12 Torque PI Proportional Gain
Range:
100 %*
Function:
[0 - 500 %] Enter the proportional gain value for the
torque controller. Selection of a high value
makes the controller react faster. Too high
a setting leads to controller instability.
PI-13 Torque PI Integration Time
Range:
0.020 s*
Function:
[0.002 - 2 s] Enter the integration time for the torque
controller. Selection of a low value makes
the controller react faster. Too low a
setting leads to control instability.
3.21.3 PI-2# Proces PID Feedback
Parameters to configure the feedback sources for the
Process PID Control.
PI-20 Process CL Feedback 1 Resource
Illustration 3.46 Feedback Signal
Option:
Function:
The effective feedback signal is made
up of the sum of up to two different
input signals.
Select which frequency converter
input should be treated as the source
DET-618C
135
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
PI-20 Process CL Feedback 1 Resource
PI-32 Process PID Start Speed
Option:
Range:
Function:
of the first of these signals. The
0 RPM*
Function:
[0 -
Enter the motor speed to be attained as a
second input signal is defined in
6000
start signal for commencement of PID
PI-22 Process CL Feedback 2 Resource.
RPM]
control. When the power is switched on, the
frequency converter will commence ramping
[0] * No function
and then operate under speed open loop
[1]
Analog Input 53
[2]
Analog Input 54
[3]
Frequency input 29
[4]
Frequency input 33
[7]
Analog Input X30/11 (OPCGPIO)
[8]
Analog Input X30/12 (OPCGPIO)
control. Thereafter, when the Process PID
start speed is reached, the frequency
converter will change over to Process PID
control.
PI-33 Process PID Proportional Gain
Range:
PI-22 Process CL Feedback 2 Resource
Option:
0.01*
Function:
[0 - 10] Enter the PID proportional gain. The proportional
Function:
gain multiplies the error between the set point
and the feedback signal.
The effective feedback signal is made
up of the sum of up to two different
PI-34 Process PID Integral Time
input signals. Select which frequency
converter input should be treated as
Range:
the source of the second of these
Function:
10000 s*
signals. The first input signal is
[0.01 -
Enter the PID integral time. The
10000 s]
integrator provides an increasing gain at
defined in PI-20 Process CL Feedback 1
a constant error between the set point
Resource.
and the feedback signal. The integral
[0] * No function
time is the time needed by the
[1]
Analog Input 53
integrator to reach the same gain as the
[2]
Analog Input 54
proportional gain.
[3]
Frequency input 29
[4]
Frequency input 33
[7]
Analog Input X30/11 (OPCGPIO)
[8]
Analog Input X30/12 (OPCGPIO)
PI-35 Process PID Differentiation Time
Range:
0 s*
Function:
[0 - 10 s] Enter the PID differentiation time. The differentiator does not react to a constant error, but
provides a gain only when the error changes.
3.21.4 PI-3# Process PID Control
The shorter the PID differentiation time, the
stronger the gain from the differentiator.
Parameters to configure the Process PID Controls.
PI-30 Process PID Normal/ Inverse Control
Option:
Function:
PI-36 Process PID Diff. Gain Limit
Range:
5*
Function:
[1 - 50] Enter a limit for the differentiator gain (DG). If there
Normal and inverse control are implemented by
is no limit, the DG will increase when there are fast
introducing a difference between the reference
changes. Limit the DG to obtain a pure differen-
signal and the feedback signal.
tiator gain at slow changes and a constant
differentiator gain where fast changes occur.
[0] * Normal Sets process control to increase the output
frequency.
[1]
Inverse Sets process control to reduce the output
frequency.
PI-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor
Range:
0 %*
PI-31 Process PID Anti Windup
Option:
[0]
200 %]
Function:
Enter the PID feed forward (FF) factor. The FF
factor sends a constant fraction of the reference
signal to bypass the PID control, so the PID
control only affects the remaining fraction of the
Function:
Off Continues regulation of an error even when the
control signal. Any change to this parameter will
output frequency cannot be increased or decreased.
thus affect the motor speed. When the FF factor
is activated it provides less overshoot, and high
[1] * On Ceases regulation of an error when the output
frequency can no longer be adjusted.
136
[0 -
dynamics when changing the set point.
DET-618C
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
PI-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor
PI-45 Process PID Feed Fwd Resource
Range:
Option:
Function:
PI-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor is active
Function:
[0] * No function
Select which drive input should be
when H-40 Configuration Mode is set to [3]
used as the feed forward factor. The
Process.
FF factor is added directly to the
3 3
output of the PID controller. This
PI-39 On Reference Bandwidth
Range:
5 %*
increases dynamic performance.
Function:
[0 - 200
%]
[1]
[2]
Analog Input 54
PID Control Error (the difference between the
reference and the feedback) is less than the
[7]
Frequency input 29
[8]
Frequency input 33
set value of this parameter the On Reference
[11] Local bus reference
status bit is high, i.e. =1.
[20] Digital Potentiometer
PI-40 Process PID I-part Reset
Option:
[21] Analog input X30-11
Function:
[22] Analog input X30-12
[0] * No
[1]
Analog Input 53
Enter the On Reference bandwidth. When the
[32] Bus PCD
Selects a bus reference configured by
Yes Select [1] Yes to reset the I-part of the process PID
O-02 Control Word Source. Change
controller. The selection will automatically revert to [0]
O-42 PCD Write Configuration for the
No. Resetting the I-part makes it possible to start from
a welldefined point after changing something in the
bus used in order to make the feedforward available in B-48 PCD Feed
process, e.g. changing a textile roll.
Forward. Use index 1 for feedforward [748] (and index 2 for
reference [1682]).
PI-41 Process PID Output Neg. Clamp
Range:
-100 %*
Function:
PI-46 Process PID Feed Fwd Normal/ Inv. Ctrl.
[-100 - par. PI-42 %] Enter a negative limit for the
Option:
process PID controller output.
Function:
[0] * Normal Select [0] Normal to set the feed forward factor to
PI-42 Process PID Output Pos. Clamp
Range:
100 %*
treat the FF resource as a positive value.
Function:
[1]
Inverse Select [1] Inverse to treat the FF resource as a
[par. PI-41 - 100 %] Enter a positive limit for the
negative value.
process PID controller output.
PI-49 Process PID Output Normal/ Inv. Ctrl.
PI-43 Process PID Gain Scale at Min. Ref.
Range:
100 %*
Option:
Function:
[0 - 100
%]
Function:
[0] * Normal Select [0] Normal to use the resulting output from
Enter a scaling percentage to apply to the
process PID output when operating at the
minimum reference. The scaling percentage
the process PID controller as is.
[1]
Inverse Select [1] Inverse to invert the resulting output
from the process PID controller. This operation is
performed after the feed forward factor is applied.
will be adjusted linearly between the scale
at min. ref. (PI-43 Process PID Gain Scale at
Min. Ref.) and the scale at max. ref.
3.21.5 PI-5# Ext. Process PID Ctrl.
(PI-44 Process PID Gain Scale at Max. Ref.).
PI-44 Process PID Gain Scale at Max. Ref.
Range:
100 %*
Function:
[0 - 100
%]
Enter a scaling percentage to apply to the
process PID output when operating at the
maximum reference. The scaling percentage
will be adjusted linearly between the scale
at min. ref. (PI-43 Process PID Gain Scale at
This parameter group is only used if H-40 Configuration
Mode is set to [7] Extended PID speed CL or [8] Extended PID
Speed OL.
PI-50 Process PID Extended PID
Option:
[0]
Function:
Disabled Disables the extended parts of the process PID
controller.
Min. Ref.) and the scale at max. ref.
(PI-44 Process PID Gain Scale at Max. Ref.).
[1] * Enabled
DET-618C
Enables the extended parts of the PID controller.
137
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
PI-51 Process PID Feed Fwd Gain
PI-63 Process PID Gain Scaled Output
Range:
Range:
1*
[0 100]
Function:
The feed forward is used to obtain the desired
0 %*
level, based on a well-known signal available. The
PID controller then only takes care of the smaler
3 3
part of the control, necessary because of unknown
characters. The standard feed fwd factor in
PI-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor is always
related to the reference whereas PI-51 Process PID
Feed Fwd Gain has more choices. In winder
applications, the feed fwd factor will typically be
the line speed of the system.
PI-52 Process PID Feed Fwd Ramp up
Range:
0.01 s*
Function:
[0.01 - 10 s] Controls the dynamics of the feed forward
signal when ramping up.
PI-53 Process PID Feed Fwd Ramp down
Range:
0.01 s*
Function:
[0.01 - 10 s] Controls the dynamics of the feed forward
signal when ramping down.
PI-56 Process PID Ref. Filter Time
Range:
0.001 s*
Function:
[0.001 - 1 s] Set a time constant for the reference first
order low-pass filter. The low-pass filter
improves steady-state performance and
dampens oscillations on the reference/
feedback signals. However severe filtering
can be detrimental to dynamic
performance.
PI-57 Process PID Fb. Filter Time
Range:
0.001 s*
Function:
[0.001 - 1 s] Set a time constant for the feedback first
order low-pass filter. The low-pass filter
improves steady-state performance and
dampens oscillations on the reference/
feedback signals. However severe filtering
can be detrimental to dynamic
performance.
PI-60 Process PID Error
Range:
0 %*
Function:
[-200 - 200 %]
PI-61 Process PID Output
Range:
0 %*
Function:
[-200 - 200 %]
PI-62 Process PID Clamped Output
Range:
0 %*
138
Function:
[-200 - 200 %]
DET-618C
Function:
[-200 - 200 %]
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.22 SF-# Special Functions
SF-00 Wobble Mode
Option:
3.22.1 SF-## Wobble Function
[3]
The wobble function is primarily used for synthetic yarn
winding applications. The wobble option is to be installed
in the frequency converter controlling the traverse drive.
The traverse drive frequency converter will move the yarn
back and forth in a diamond pattern across the surface of
the yarn package. To prevent a buildup of yarn at the
same points at the surface, this pattern must be altered.
The wobble option can accomplish this by continuously
varying the traverse velocity in a programmable cycle. The
wobble function is created by superimposing a delta
frequency around a center frequency. To compensate for
the inertia in the system a quick frequency jump can be
included. Especially suitable for elastic yarn applications
the option features a randomized wobble ratio.
Function:
Rel. Freq.,
Up/ Down
Time
3 3
NOTE
The setting of “Center Frequency” takes place via the
normal reference handling parameter group.
SF-01 Wobble Delta Frequency [Hz]
Range:
5 Hz*
Function:
[0 - 25 The delta frequency is determining the
Hz]
magnitude of the wobble frequency. The delta
frequency is superimposed on the center
frequency. SF-01 Wobble Delta Frequency [Hz] is
selecting both the positive and negative delta
frequency. The setting of SF-01 Wobble Delta
Frequency [Hz] must thus not be higher than the
setting of the center frequency. The initial ramp
up time from standstill until the wobble
sequence is running is determined.
SF-02 Wobble Delta Frequency [%]
Range:
Function:
25 %*
[0 - 100 %] The delta frequency can also be expressed
as percentage of the center frequency and
Illustration 3.48 Wobble Function
can thus be maximum 100%. The function
is the same as for SF-01 Wobble Delta
Frequency [Hz].
SF-00 Wobble Mode
Option:
SF-03 Wobble Delta Freq. Scaling Resource
Function:
Option:
NOTE
Function:
Select which drive input should be
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while running.
used to scale the delta frequency
setting.
The standard speed open loop mode in
[0] * No function
H-40 Configuration Mode is extended with a
[1]
wobble function. In this parameter it is
[2]
Analog Input 54
possible to select which method to be used
[3]
Frequency input 29
for the wobbler. The parameters can be set
[4]
Frequency input 33
as absolute values (direct frequencies) or as
[7]
Analog Input X30/11
relative values (percentage of other
[8]
Analog Input X30/12
parameter). The wobble cycle time can be
[15] Analog Input X48/2
Analog Input 53
set as an absolute alue or as independent
SF-04 Wobble Jump Frequency [Hz]
up- and down times. When using an
absolute cycle time, the up- and down times
are configured through the wobble ratio.
[2]
Function:
[0 -
The jump frequency is used to compensate for
20.0 Hz] the inertia in the traverse system. If a jump in
[0] * Abs. Freq.,
[1]
Range:
0 Hz*
Abs. Time
the output frequency is required in the top and
Abs. Freq.,
in the bottom of the wobble sequence, the
Up/ Down
frequency jump is set in this parameter. If the
Time
traverse system has a very high inertia a high
Rel. Freq.,
jump frequency may create a torque limit
Abs. Time
warning or trip (warning/alarm 12) or an over
DET-618C
139
3 3
Parameter Descriptions
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
3.22.2 SF-2# Adv. Start Adjust
SF-04 Wobble Jump Frequency [Hz]
Range:
Function:
voltage warning or trip (warning/alarm 7). This
SF-20 High Starting Torque Time [s]
parameter can only be changed in stop-mode
Range:
SF-05 Wobble Jump Frequency [%]
Range:
0 %*
0.0 s*
Function:
[0 - 60 s] High starting torque time for PM-Motor in Flux
Function:
mode without feedback.
[0 - 100 %] The jump frequency can also be expressed as
SF-21 High Starting Torque Current [%]
percentage of the center frequency. The
function is the same as for SF-04 Wobble
Range:
Jump Frequency [Hz].
Function:
100.0 %*
[0 - 200.0 %] High starting torque current for PMMotor in advanced vector control and
SF-06 Wobble Jump Time
Flux mode without feedback.
Range:
Function:
0.005 s*
SF-22 Locked Rotor Protection
[0.005 - 5.000 s]
Locked Rotor Protection for PM-Motor in Flux mode without
SF-07 Wobble Sequence Time
Range:
10 s*
feedback.
Function:
Option:
[1 - 1000 s] This parameter determines the wobble
sequence period. This parameter can only be
changed in stop-mode.
Wobble time = tup + tdown
Function:
[0] *
Off
[1]
On
SF-23 Locked Rotor Detection Time [s]
This parameter is available for AF-650 GP only.
SF-08 Wobble Up/ Down Time
Range:
5 s*
Range:
Function:
0.10 s*
[0.1 - 1000 s] Defines the individual up- and down times
in Flux mode without feedback.
for each wobble cycle.
SF-09 Wobble Random Function
Option:
Function:
[0] *
Off
[1]
On
SF-10 Wobble Ratio
Range:
1*
Function:
[0.1 - 20.0] If the ratio 0.1 is selected: tdown is 10 times
greater than tup.
If the ratio 10 is selected: tup is 10 times greater
than tdown.
SF-11 Wobble Random Ratio Max.
Range:
10*
Function:
[par. RS-53 - 10] Enter the maximum allowed wobble ratio.
SF-12 Wobble Random Ratio Min.
Range:
0.1*
Function:
[0.1 - par. SF-11] Enter the minimum allowed wobble
ratio.
SF-19 Wobble Delta Freq. Scaled
Range:
0 Hz*
Function:
[0 - 1000 Hz] Readout parameter. View the actual
wobble delta frequency after scaling has
been applied.
140
Function:
[0.05 - 1 s] Locked Rotor Detection Time for PM-Motor
DET-618C
Parameter Lists
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
4 Parameter Lists
4.1 Parameter Options
4.1.1 Introduction
4 4
Changes during operation
”TRUE” means that the parameter can be changed while
the frequency converter is in operation and “FALSE” means
that the frequency converter must be stopped before a
change can be made.
4-Set-up
'All set-ups': the parameter can be set individually in each
of the four set-ups, i. e. one single parameter can have
four different data values.
’1 set-up’: data value will be the same in all set-ups.
Data
Description
Type
2
Integer 8
Int8
3
Integer 16
Int16
4
Integer 32
Int32
5
Unsigned 8
Uint8
6
Unsigned 16
Uint16
7
Unsigned 32
Uint32
9
Visible String
VisStr
33
Normalized value 2 bytes
N2
35
Bit sequence of 16 boolean variables
V2
54
Time difference w/o date
TimD
type
Table 4.1 Data Type
DET-618C
141
4 4
Parameter Lists
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
4.1.2 K-## Keypad Set-up
Par. No.
#
Parameter description
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion
index
Type
Uint8
K-0#
K-01
Language
[0] English
1 set-up
TRUE
-
K-02
Motor Speed Unit
[0] RPM
2 set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
K-03
Regional Settings
[1] US
2 set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
K-04
Operating State at Power-up
[1] Forced stop, ref=old
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
Uint8
K-1#
K-10
Active Set-up
[1] Set-up 1
1 set-up
TRUE
-
K-11
Edit Set-up
[1] Set-up 1
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
K-12
This Set-up Linked to
[0] Not linked
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
K-13
Readout: Linked Set-ups
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
K-14
Readout: Edit Set-ups / Channel
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Int32
K-15
Readout: actual setup
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint8
K-20
Display Line 1.1 Small
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint16
K-21
Display Line 1.2 Small
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint16
K-22
Display Line 1.3 Small
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint16
K-23
Display Line 2 Large
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint16
K-2#
K-24
Display Line 3 Large
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint16
K-25
Quick Start
ExpressionLimit
1 set-up
TRUE
0
Uint16
[0] None
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
K-3#
K-30
Unit for Custom Readout
K-31
Min Value of Custom Readout
0 CustomReadoutUnit
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int32
K-32
Max Value of Custom Readout
100 CustomReadoutUnit
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int32
K-37
Display Text 1
0 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
0
VisStr[25]
K-38
Display Text 2
0 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
0
VisStr[25]
K-39
Display Text 3
0 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
0
VisStr[25]
K-4#
K-40
[Hand] Button on Keypad
[1] Enabled
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
K-41
[Off] Button on Keypad
[1] Enabled
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
K-42
[Auto] Button on Keypad
[1] Enabled
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
K-43
[Reset] Button on Keypad
[1] Enabled
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
K-5#
K-50
Keypad Copy
[0] No copy
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
K-51
Set-up Copy
[0] No copy
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
K-6#
K-60
Main Menu Password
K-61
Access to Main Menu w/o Password
K-65
Quick Menu Password
K-66
Access to Quick Menu w/o Password
K-67
Bus Password Access
100 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
0
Int16
[0] Full access
1 set-up
TRUE
-
Uint8
200 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
0
Int16
[0] Full access
1 set-up
TRUE
-
Uint8
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion
index
Type
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
[0] Linked to Hand / Auto
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
4.1.3 F-## Fundamental Parameters
Par. No.
#
Parameter description
F-0#
F-01
Frequency Setting 1
F-02
Operation Method
142
DET-618C
Parameter Lists
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
Par. No.
#
Parameter description
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion
index
F-03
Max Output Frequency 1
132 Hz
F-04
Base Frequency
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
-1
Uint16
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
F-05
Motor Rated Voltage
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
F-07
Accel Time 1
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
TRUE
-2
F-08
Decel Time 1
ExpressionLimit
Uint32
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
F-09
Torque Boost
100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Int16
Type
F-1#
F-10
Electronic Overload
[0] No protection
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
F-11
Motor External Fan
[0] No
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint16
F-12
Motor Thermistor Input
F-15
Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
F-16
F-17
F-18
[0] None
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
F-2#
F-20
PM Start Mode
[0] Rotor Detection
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
F-22
Start Speed [RPM]
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
F-23
Start Speed [Hz]
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
F-24
Holding Time
0s
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint8
F-25
Start Function
[2] Coast/delay time
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
F-26
Motor Noise (Carrier Freq)
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
Uint8
F-27
Motor Tone Random
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
-
F-28
Dead Time Compensation
[1] On
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
F-29
Start Current
0A
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
[1] On
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
F-3#
F-37
Adv. Switching Pattern
F-38
Overmodulation
F-4#
F-40
Torque Limiter (Driving)
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
F-41
Torque Limiter (Braking)
100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
F-43
Current Limit
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint32
F-5#
F-50
Reference Range
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
F-51
Reference/Feedback Unit
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
F-52
Minimum Reference
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
F-53
Maximum Reference
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
F-54
Reference Function
[0] Sum
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
F-6#
F-62
Catch up/slow Down Value
0%
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
F-64
Preset Relative Reference
0%
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int32
F-68
Relative Scaling Reference Resource
[0] No function
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
F-9#
F-90
Step Size
F-91
Accel/Decel Time
0.10 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
1s
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
F-92
Power Restore
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
F-93
Maximum Limit
100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Int16
F-94
Minimum Limit
-100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Int16
F-95
Accel/Decel Ramp Delay
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
TimD
DET-618C
143
4 4
Parameter Lists
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
4.1.4 E-## Digital In/Outs
Par. No.
#
Parameter description
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion
index
Type
E-0#
E-00
Digital I/O Mode
[0] PNP
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
E-01
Terminal 18 Digital Input
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
E-02
Terminal 19 Digital Input
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
E-03
Terminal 27 Digital Input
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
E-04
Terminal 29 Digital Input
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
E-05
Terminal 32 Digital Input
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
E-06
Terminal 33 Digital Input
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
E-07
Terminal 37 Safe Stop
[1] Safe Stop Alarm
1 set-up
TRUE
-
Uint8
Uint32
4 4
E-1#
E-10
Accel Time 2
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
E-11
Decel Time 2
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
E-12
Accel Time 3
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
E-13
Decel Time 3
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
E-14
Accel Time 4
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
E-15
Decel Time 4
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
E-20
Terminal 27 Digital Output
[0] No operation
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
E-21
Terminal 29 Digital Output
[0] No operation
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
E-24
Function Relay
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
E-26
On Delay, Relay
0.01 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
E-27
Off Delay, Relay
0.01 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
E-2#
E-5#
E-51
Terminal 27 Mode
[0] Input
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
E-52
Terminal 29 Mode
[0] Input
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
E-53
Terminal X30/2 Digital Input
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
E-54
Terminal X30/3 Digital Input
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
E-55
Terminal X30/4 Digital Input
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
E-56
Term X30/6 Digi Out (OPCGPIO)
[0] No operation
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
E-57
Term X30/7 Digi Out (OPCGPIO)
[0] No operation
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
E-6#
E-60
Term. 29 Low Frequency
100 Hz
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint32
E-61
Term. 29 High Frequency
100 Hz
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint32
E-62
Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
E-63
Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
E-64
Pulse Filter Time Constant #29
100 ms
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Uint16
E-65
Term. 33 Low Frequency
100 Hz
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint32
E-66
Term. 33 High Frequency
100 Hz
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint32
E-67
Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
E-68
Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
E-69
Pulse Filter Time Constant #33
100 ms
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Uint16
[0] No operation
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
5000 Hz
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint32
[0] No operation
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
5000 Hz
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint32
[0] No operation
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
E-7#
E-70
Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable
E-72
Pulse Output Max Freq #27
E-73
Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable
E-75
Pulse Output Max Freq #29
E-76
Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output Variable
144
DET-618C
Parameter Lists
Par. No.
#
Parameter description
E-78
Pulse Output Max Freq #X30/6
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion
index
Type
5000 Hz
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint32
1024 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
[0] Clockwise
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
E-8#
E-80
Term 32/33 Pulses Per Revolution
E-81
Term 32/33 Encoder Direction
E-9#
E-90
Digital & Relay Bus Control
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint32
E-93
Pulse Out #27 Bus Control
0%
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
N2
E-94
Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset
0%
1 set-up
TRUE
-2
Uint16
E-95
Pulse Out #29 Bus Control
0%
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
N2
E-96
Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset
0%
1 set-up
TRUE
-2
Uint16
E-97
Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control
0%
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
N2
E-98
Pulse Out #X30/6 Timeout Preset
0%
1 set-up
TRUE
-2
Uint16
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion
index
Type
4.1.5 C-## Frequency Control Functions
Par. No.
#
Parameter description
C-0#
C-01
Jump Frequency From [Hz]
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
C-02
Jump Speed From [RPM]
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
C-03
Jump Speed To [RPM]
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
C-04
Jump Frequency To [Hz]
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
C-05
Multi-step Frequency 1 - 8
0%
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
C-2#
C-20
Jog Speed [Hz]
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
C-21
Jog Speed [RPM]
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
C-22
Jog Accel/Decel Time
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
C-23
Quick Stop Decel Time
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
C-24
Quick Stop Ramp Type
[0] Linear
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
C-25
Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start
50 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
C-26
Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End
50 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
C-3#
C-30
Frequency Command 2
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
C-34
Frequency Command 3
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
Parameter description
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion
index
Type
P-01
Motor Poles
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint8
P-02
Motor Power [HP]
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
-2
Uint32
P-03
Motor Current
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
-2
Uint32
P-04
Auto Tune
[0] Off
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
P-05
Motor Cont. Rated Torque
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
-1
Uint32
P-06
Base Speed
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
67
Uint16
P-07
Motor Power [kW]
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
1
Uint32
P-09
Slip Compensation
100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Int16
4.1.6 P-## Motor Data
Par. No.
#
P-0#
P-1#
DET-618C
145
4 4
4 4
Parameter Lists
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
Par. No.
#
Parameter description
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion
index
Type
P-10
Slip Compensation Time Constant
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
[0] Asynchron
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
140 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Int16
P-2#
P-20
Motor Construction
P-24
Damping Gain
P-25
Low Speed Filter Time Const.
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
P-26
High Speed Filter Time Const.
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
P-27
Voltage filter time const.
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Uint16
P-3#
P-30
Stator Resistance (Rs)
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
-4
Uint32
P-31
Rotor Resistance (Rr)
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
-4
Uint32
P-33
Stator Leakage Reactance (X1)
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
-4
Uint32
P-34
Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2)
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
-4
Uint32
P-35
Main Reactance (Xh)
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
-4
Uint32
P-36
Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe)
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Uint32
P-37
d-axis Inductance (Ld)
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
-6
Int32
100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion
index
Type
[0] Protect Option Config.
1 set-up
TRUE
-
Uint8
0 N/A
2 set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
P-4#
P-46
Position Detection Gain
4.1.7 H-## High Perf Parameters
Par. No.
#
Parameter description
H-0#
H-01
Option Detection
H-02
Option Data Storage
H-03
Restore Factory Settings
[0] Normal operation
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
H-04
Auto-Reset (Times)
[0] Manual reset
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
H-05
Auto-Reset (Reset Interval)
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
H-07
Accel/Decel Time 1 Type
[0] Linear
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
H-08
Reverse Lock
[0] Clockwise
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
H-09
Start Mode
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
[2] Trip
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
H-2#
H-20
Motor Feedback Loss Function
H-21
Motor Feedback Speed Error
H-22
Motor Feedback Loss Timeout
300 RPM
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
0.05 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
H-24
Tracking Error Function
H-25
Tracking Error
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
10 RPM
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
H-26
Tracking Error Timeout
1s
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
H-27
Tracking Error Ramping
100 RPM
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
H-28
Tracking Error Ramping Timeout
1s
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
H-29
Tracking Error After Ramping Timeout
5s
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
H-4#
H-40
Configuration Mode
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
H-41
Motor Control Principle
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
[1] 24V encoder
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
[0] Constant torque
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
[0] High torque
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
[2] As mode par H-40
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
H-42
Flux Motor Feedback Source
H-43
Torque Characteristics
H-44
Constant or Variable Torque OL
H-45
Local Mode Configuration
H-46
Back EMF at 1000 RPM
H-47
Motor Angle Offset
146
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Int16
DET-618C
Parameter Lists
Par. No.
#
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
Parameter description
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion
index
Type
H-48
Clockwise Direction
[0] Normal
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
H-49
Motor Angle Offset Adjust
[0] Manual
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
H-5#
H-50
Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed
H-51
Min Speed Normal Magnetising [RPM]
100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
H-52
Min Speed Normal Magnetising [Hz]
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
H-53
Model Shift Frequency
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
-1
Uint16
H-54
Voltage reduction in fieldweakening
0V
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint8
H-55
U/f Characteristic - U
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
H-56
U/f Characteristic - F
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
H-58
Flystart Test Pulses Current
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
H-59
Flystart Test Pulses Frequency
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
H-6#
H-61
High Speed Load Compensation
100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Int16
H-64
Resonance Dampening
100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
H-65
Resonance Dampening Time Constant
5 ms
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Uint8
H-66
Min. Current at Low Speed
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint32
H-67
Torque Limit Factor Source
[0] No function
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
H-68
Speed Limit Factor Source
[0] No function
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
H-7#
H-70
Warning Current Low
0A
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
H-71
Warning Current High
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
H-72
Warning Speed Low
0 RPM
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
H-73
Warning Speed High
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
H-74
Warning Reference Low
-999999.999 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
H-75
Warning Reference High
999999.999 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
H-76
Warning Feedback Low
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
backUnit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
-999999.999 ReferenceFeedbackUnit
999999.999 ReferenceFeedH-77
Warning Feedback High
H-78
Missing Motor Phase Function
H-8#
H-80
Function at Stop
H-81
Min Speed for Function at Stop [RPM]
H-82
Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz]
H-83
Precise Stop Function
H-84
Precise Stop Counter Value
[0] Coast
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
Uint16
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
[0] Precise ramp stop
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
100000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint32
Uint8
H-85
Precise Stop Speed Compensation Delay
10 ms
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
H-87
Load Type
[0] Passive load
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
H-88
Minimum Inertia
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
-4
Uint32
H-89
Maximum Inertia
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
-4
Uint32
KTY Sensor Type
[0] KTY Sensor 1
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
[0] None
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
80 °C
1 set-up
TRUE
100
Int16
H-9#
H-95
H-96
KTY Thermistor Input
H-97
KTY Threshold level
DET-618C
147
4 4
4 4
Parameter Lists
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
4.1.8 AN-## Analog In / Out
Par. No.
#
Parameter description
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion
index
Type
AN-0#
AN-00
Live Zero Timeout Time
10 s
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
AN-01
Live Zero Timeout Function
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
AN-10
Terminal 53 Low Voltage
0.07 V
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
AN-11
Terminal 53 High Voltage
10 V
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
AN-12
Terminal 53 Low Current
0.14 mA
All set-ups
TRUE
-5
Int16
AN-13
Terminal 53 High Current
20 mA
All set-ups
TRUE
-5
Int16
AN-14
Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
AN-15
Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
AN-16
Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant
0.001 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Uint16
AN-20
Terminal 54 Low Voltage
0.07 V
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
AN-21
Terminal 54 High Voltage
10 V
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
AN-22
Terminal 54 Low Current
0.14 mA
All set-ups
TRUE
-5
Int16
AN-23
Terminal 54 High Current
20 mA
All set-ups
TRUE
-5
Int16
AN-24
Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
AN-25
Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
AN-26
Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant
0.001 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Uint16
Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage
0.07 V
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
AN-1#
AN-2#
AN-3#
AN-30
AN-31
Terminal X30/11 High Voltage
10 V
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
AN-34
Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
AN-35
Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb. Value
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
AN-36
Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant
0.001 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Uint16
AN-40
Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage
0.07 V
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
AN-41
Terminal X30/12 High Voltage
10 V
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
AN-44
Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
AN-45
Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb. Value
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
AN-46
Term. X30/12 Filter Time Constant
0.001 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Uint16
Uint8
AN-4#
AN-5#
AN-50
Terminal 42 Output
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
AN-51
Terminal 42 Output Min Scale
0%
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
AN-52
Terminal 42 Output Max Scale
100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
AN-53
Terminal 42 Output Bus Control
0%
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
N2
AN-54
Terminal 42 Output Timeout Preset
0%
1 set-up
TRUE
-2
Uint16
AN-55
Terminal 42 Output Filter
[0] Off
1 set-up
TRUE
-
Uint8
AN-6#
AN-60
Terminal X30/8 Output
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
AN-61
Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale
0%
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
AN-62
Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale
100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
AN-63
Terminal X30/8 Bus Control
0%
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
N2
AN-64
Terminal X30/8 Output Timeout Preset
0%
1 set-up
TRUE
-2
Uint16
148
DET-618C
Parameter Lists
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
4.1.9 SP-## Special Functions
Par. No.
#
Parameter description
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion
index
Type
Fault Level
ExpressionLimit
1 set-up
TRUE
-
Uint8
SP-10
Line failure
[0] No function
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
SP-11
Line Voltage at Input Fault
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
SP-12
Function at Line Imbalance
[0] Trip
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
SP-13
Mains Failure Step Factor
1 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint8
SP-14
Kin. Backup Time Out
60 s
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
SP-15
Kin. Backup Trip Recovery Level
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Uint32
SP-23
Typecode Setting
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
SP-24
Trip Delay at Current Limit
60 s
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
SP-25
Trip Delay at Torque Limit
SP-26
Trip Delay at Drive Fault
SP-28
Production Settings
SP-29
Service Code
SP-0#
SP-00
SP-1#
SP-2#
60 s
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
[0] No action
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Int32
SP-3#
SP-30
Current Lim Cont, Proportional Gain
100 %
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
SP-31
Current Lim Contr, Integration Time
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Uint16
SP-32
Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-4
Uint16
SP-35
Stall Protection
[1] Enabled
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
SP-4#
SP-40
VT Level
SP-41
Energy Savings Min. Magnetisation
SP-42
Energy Savings Min. Frequency
SP-43
Motor Cosphi
66 %
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint8
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
10 Hz
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
SP-5#
SP-50
RFI Filter
SP-51
DC Link Compensation
[1] On
1 set-up
FALSE
-
Uint8
ExpressionLimit
1 set-up
TRUE
-
SP-52
Fan Operation
Uint8
[0] Auto
All set-ups
TRUE
-
SP-53
Uint8
Fan Monitor
[1] Warning
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
SP-55
Output Filter
[0] No Filter
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
SP-56
Capacitance Output Filter
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
-7
Uint16
SP-57
Inductance Output Filter
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
-6
Uint16
SP-59
Actual Number of Inverter Units
ExpressionLimit
1 set-up
FALSE
0
Uint8
SP-7#
SP-71
Accel Time 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start
50 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
SP-72
Accel Time 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End
50 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
SP-73
Decel Time 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start
50 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
SP-74
Decel Time 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End
50 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
SP-76
Accel/Decel Time 2 Type
[0] Linear
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
SP-79
Accel Time 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start
50 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
SP-8#
SP-80
Accel Time 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End
50 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
SP-81
Decel Time 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start
50 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
SP-82
Decel Time 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End
SP-84
Accel/Decel Ramp 3 Type
SP-87
SP-88
50 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
[0] Linear
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
Accel Time 3 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start
50 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
Accel Time 3 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End
50 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
DET-618C
149
4 4
4 4
Parameter Lists
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
Par. No.
#
Parameter description
SP-89
Decel Time 3 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion
index
Type
50 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
SP-9#
SP-90
Decel Time 3 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End
SP-92
Accel/Decel Ramp 4 Type
50 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
[0] Linear
All set-ups
TRUE
-
SP-95
Uint8
Accel Time 4 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start
50 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
SP-96
Accel Time 4 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End
50 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
SP-97
Decel Time 4 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start
50 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
SP-98
Decel Time 4 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End
50 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion
index
Type
[0] Digital and ctrl.word
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
4.1.10 O-## Options/Comms
Par. No.
#
Parameter description
O-0#
O-01
Control Site
O-02
Control Word Source
O-03
Control Word Timeout Time
O-04
Control Word Timeout Function
O-05
End-of-Timeout Function
O-06
Reset Control Word Timeout
O-07
O-08
1s
1 set-up
TRUE
-1
Uint32
ExpressionLimit
1 set-up
TRUE
-
Uint8
[1] Resume set-up
1 set-up
TRUE
-
Uint8
[0] Do not reset
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
Diagnosis Trigger
[0] Disable
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
Readout Filtering
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
O-10
Control Word Profile
[0] Drive Profile
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
O-13
Configurable Status Word STW
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
O-14
Configurable Control Word CTW
[1] Profile default
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
O-19
Product Code
ExpressionLimit
1 set-up
TRUE
0
Uint32
O-30
Protocol
[2] Modbus RTU
1 set-up
TRUE
-
Uint8
O-31
Address
1 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
0
Uint8
Uint8
O-1#
O-3#
O-32
Drive Port Baud Rate
O-33
Drive Port Parity
O-34
Estimated cycle time
O-35
Minimum Response Delay
O-36
Max Response Delay
O-37
Max Inter-Char Delay
ExpressionLimit
1 set-up
TRUE
-
[0] Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit
1 set-up
TRUE
-
Uint8
0 ms
2 set-ups
TRUE
-3
Uint32
10 ms
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Uint16
ExpressionLimit
1 set-up
TRUE
-3
Uint16
ExpressionLimit
1 set-up
TRUE
-5
Uint16
[1] Standard telegram 1
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
O-4#
O-40
Telegram Selection
O-41
Parameters for Signals
0
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint16
O-42
PCD Write Configuration
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint16
O-43
PCD Read Configuration
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint16
O-5#
O-50
Coasting Select
[3] Logic OR
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
O-51
Quick Stop Select
[3] Logic OR
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
O-52
DC Brake Select
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
O-53
Start Select
[3] Logic OR
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
O-54
Reversing Select
[3] Logic OR
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
O-55
Set-up Select
[3] Logic OR
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
O-56
Preset Reference Select
[3] Logic OR
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
O-57
Profidrive OFF2 Select
[3] Logic OR
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
150
DET-618C
Parameter Lists
Par. No.
#
Parameter description
O-58
Profidrive OFF3 Select
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion
index
Type
[3] Logic OR
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
Uint32
O-8#
O-80
Bus Message Count
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
O-81
Bus Error Count
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint32
O-82
Slave Messages Rcvd
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint32
O-83
Slave Error Count
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint32
O-9#
O-90
Bus Jog 1 Speed
100 RPM
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
O-91
Bus Jog 2 Speed
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
Parameter description
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion
index
Type
DeviceNet Protocol
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
Uint8
4.1.11 DN-## DeviceNet
Par. No.
#
DN-0#
DN-00
DN-01
Baud Rate Select
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
DN-02
MAC ID
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
DN-05
Readout Transmit Error Counter
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
DN-06
Readout Receive Error Counter
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
DN-07
Readout Bus Off Counter
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
DN-1#
DN-10
Process Data Type Selection
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
DN-11
Process Data Config Write
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint16
DN-12
Process Data Config Read
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint16
DN-13
Warning Parameter
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
DN-14
Net Reference
[0] Off
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
DN-15
Net Control
[0] Off
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
DN-20
COS Filter 1
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
DN-21
COS Filter 2
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
DN-22
COS Filter 3
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
DN-23
COS Filter 4
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
Uint8
DN-2#
DN-3#
DN-30
Array Index
0 N/A
2 set-ups
TRUE
0
DN-31
Store Data Values
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
DN-32
Devicenet Revision
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
DN-33
Store Always
[0] Off
1 set-up
TRUE
-
Uint8
DN-34
DeviceNet Product Code
ExpressionLimit
1 set-up
TRUE
0
Uint16
DN-39
Devicenet F Parameters
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint32
DET-618C
151
4 4
4 4
Parameter Lists
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
4.1.12 PB-## Profibus
Par. No.
#
Parameter description
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion
index
Type
PB-0#
PB-00
Setpoint
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
PB-07
Actual Value
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
PB-1#
PB-15
PCD Write Configuration
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint16
PB-16
PCD Read Configuration
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint16
PB-18
Node Address
126 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
0
Uint8
[100] None
1 set-up
TRUE
-
Uint8
PB-2#
PB-22
Telegram Selection
PB-23
Parameters for Signals
0
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint16
PB-27
Parameter Edit
[1] Enabled
2 set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint16
PB-28
Process Control
[1] Enable cyclic master
2 set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
PB-4#
PB-44
Fault Message Counter
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
PB-45
Fault Code
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
PB-47
Fault Number
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
PB-5#
PB-52
Fault Situation Counter
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
PB-53
Profibus Warning Word
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
V2
[255] No baudrate found
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
PB-6#
PB-63
Actual Baud Rate
PB-64
Device Identification
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
PB-65
Profile Number
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
OctStr[2]
PB-67
Control Word 1
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
V2
PB-68
Status Word 1
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
V2
PB-7#
PB-70
Edit Set-up
PB-71
Profibus Save Data Values
[1] Set-up 1
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
PB-72
ProfibusDriveReset
PB-75
DO Identification
[0] No action
1 set-up
FALSE
-
Uint8
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
PB-80
Defined Parameters (1)
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
PB-81
Defined Parameters (2)
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
PB-82
Defined Parameters (3)
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
PB-83
Defined Parameters (4)
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
PB-84
Defined Parameters (5)
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
PB-90
Changed Parameters (1)
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
PB-91
Changed Parameters (2)
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
PB-92
Changed Parameters (3)
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
PB-93
Changed Parameters (4)
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
PB-94
Changed Parameters (5)
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
PB-99
Profibus Revision Counter
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
PB-8#
PB-9#
152
DET-618C
Parameter Lists
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
4.1.13 EN-## Ethernet
Par. No.
#
Parameter description
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
EN-00
IP Address Assignment
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
EN-01
IP Address
0 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
0
OctStr[4]
EN-02
Subnet Mask
0 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
0
OctStr[4]
EN-03
Default Gateway
0 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
0
OctStr[4]
EN-04
DHCP Server
0 N/A
2 set-ups
TRUE
0
OctStr[4]
EN-05
Lease Expires
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
0
TimD
EN-06
Name Servers
0 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
0
OctStr[4]
EN-07
Domain Name
0 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
0
VisStr[48]
EN-08
Host Name
0 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
0
VisStr[48]
EN-09
Physical Address
0 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
0
VisStr[17]
Uint8
Conversion
index
Type
EN-0#
EN-1#
EN-10
Link Status
EN-11
Link Duration
EN-12
Auto Negotiation
[0] No Link
All set-ups
TRUE
-
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
0
TimD
[1] On
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
EN-13
Link Speed
[0] None
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
EN-14
Link Duplex
[1] Full Duplex
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
EN-20
Control Instance
ExpressionLimit
1 set-up
TRUE
0
Uint8
EN-21
Process Data Config Write
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint16
EN-22
Process Data Config Read
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint16
EN-23
Process Data Config Write Size
16 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint32
EN-24
Process Data Config Read Size
16 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint32
EN-27
Primary Master
0 N/A
2 set-ups
FALSE
0
OctStr[4]
EN-28
Store Data Values
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
EN-29
Store Always
[0] Off
1 set-up
TRUE
-
Uint8
EN-2#
EN-3#
EN-30
Warning Parameter
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
EN-31
Net Reference
[0] Off
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
EN-32
Net Control
[0] Off
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
EN-33
CIP Revision
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
EN-34
CIP Product Code
ExpressionLimit
1 set-up
TRUE
0
Uint16
EN-35
EDS Parameter
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint32
EN-37
COS Inhibit Timer
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
EN-38
COS Filter
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
EN-40
Status Parameter
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
EN-41
Slave Message Count
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint32
EN-42
Slave Exception Message Count
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint32
Uint8
EN-4#
EN-8#
EN-80
FTP Server
[0] Disabled
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
EN-81
HTTP Server
[0] Disabled
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
EN-82
SMTP Service
[0] Disabled
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
EN-89
Transparent Socket Channel Port
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
EN-9#
EN-90
Cable Diagnostic
[0] Disabled
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
EN-91
MDI-X
[1] Enabled
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
EN-92
IGMP Snooping
[1] Enabled
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
EN-93
Cable Error Length
0 N/A
1 set-up
TRUE
0
Uint16
DET-618C
153
4 4
4 4
Parameter Lists
Par. No.
#
Parameter description
EN-94
Broadcast Storm Protection
EN-95
Broadcast Storm Filter
EN-96
Port Mirroring
EN-98
Interface Counters
EN-99
Media Counters
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion
index
Type
-1 %
2 set-ups
TRUE
0
Int8
[0] Broadcast only
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
4000 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint32
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint32
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion
index
Type
[1] RS422 (5V TTL)
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
1024 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
4.1.14 EC-## Feedback Option
Par. No.
#
Parameter description
EC-1#
EC-10
Signal Type
EC-11
Resolution (PPR)
EC-2#
EC-20
Protocol Selection
EC-21
Resolution (Positions/Rev)
EC-24
SSI Data Length
EC-25
Clock Rate
EC-26
SSI Data Format
[0] None
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint32
13 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint8
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
3
Uint16
[0] Gray code
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
HIPERFACE Baudrate
[4] 9600
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
EC-60
Feedback Direction
[0] Clockwise
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
EC-61
Feedback Signal Monitoring
[1] Warning
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion
index
Type
EC-3#
EC-34
EC-6#
4.1.15 RS-## Resolver Interface
Par. No.
#
Parameter description
RS-5#
RS-50
Poles
RS-51
Input Voltage
2 N/A
1 set-up
FALSE
0
Uint8
7V
1 set-up
FALSE
-1
Uint8
Uint8
RS-52
Input Frequency
10 kHz
1 set-up
FALSE
2
RS-53
Transformation Ratio
0.5 N/A
1 set-up
FALSE
-1
Uint8
RS-56
Encoder Sim. Resolution
[0] Disabled
1 set-up
FALSE
-
Uint8
RS-59
Resolver Interface
[0] Disabled
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
154
DET-618C
Parameter Lists
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
4.1.16 ID-## Drive Information
Par. No.
#
Parameter description
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion
index
Type
ID-0#
ID-00
Operating hours
0h
All set-ups
FALSE
74
Uint32
ID-01
Running Hours
0h
All set-ups
FALSE
74
Uint32
ID-02
kWh Counter
0 kWh
All set-ups
FALSE
75
Uint32
ID-03
Power Up's
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint32
ID-04
Over Temp's
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
ID-05
Over Volt's
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
ID-06
Reset kWh Counter
[0] Do not reset
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
ID-07
Reset Running Hours Counter
[0] Do not reset
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
Uint16
4 4
ID-1#
ID-10
Trending Source
0
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
ID-11
Trending Interval
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
TRUE
-3
TimD
ID-12
Trigger Event
[0] False
1 set-up
TRUE
-
Uint8
ID-13
Trending Mode
[0] Trend always
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
ID-14
Samples Before Trigger
50 N/A
2 set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
ID-20
Historic Log: Event
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint8
ID-21
Historic Log: Value
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint32
ID-22
Historic Log: Time
0 ms
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Uint32
Fault Log: Error Code
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint8
ID-31
Fault Log: Value
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Int16
ID-32
Fault Log: Time
0s
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint32
ID-2#
ID-3#
ID-30
ID-4#
ID-40
Drive Type
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
VisStr[6]
ID-41
Power Section
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
VisStr[20]
ID-42
Voltage
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
VisStr[20]
ID-43
Software Version
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
VisStr[5]
ID-44
Ordered Typecode String
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
VisStr[40]
ID-45
Actual Typecode String
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
VisStr[40]
ID-46
GE Product No.
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
VisStr[8]
ID-47
Power Card Ordering No
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
VisStr[8]
ID-48
Keypad ID Number
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
VisStr[20]
ID-49
SW ID Control Card
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
VisStr[20]
ID-5#
ID-50
SW ID Power Card
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
VisStr[20]
ID-51
Drive Serial Number
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
VisStr[10]
ID-53
Power Card Serial Number
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
VisStr[19]
ID-59
CSIV Filename
ExpressionLimit
1 set-up
FALSE
0
VisStr[16]
ID-6#
ID-60
Option Mounted
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
VisStr[30]
ID-61
Option SW Version
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
VisStr[20]
ID-62
Option Ordering No
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
VisStr[8]
ID-63
Option Serial No
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
VisStr[18]
ID-70
Option in Slot A
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
VisStr[30]
ID-71
Slot A Option SW Version
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
VisStr[20]
ID-72
Option in Slot B
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
VisStr[30]
ID-73
Slot B Option SW Version
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
VisStr[20]
ID-7#
DET-618C
155
4 4
Parameter Lists
Par. No.
#
Parameter description
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion
index
Type
ID-8#
ID-80
Fan Running Hours
0h
All set-ups
TRUE
74
Uint32
ID-81
Preset Fan Running Hours
0h
All set-ups
TRUE
74
Uint32
Uint16
ID-9#
ID-92
Defined Parameters
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
ID-93
Modified Parameters
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
ID-98
Drive Identification
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
VisStr[40]
ID-99
Parameter Metadata
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
4.1.17 DR-## Data Readouts
Par. No.
#
Parameter description
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
V2
0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Int32
Int16
Conversion
index
Type
DR-0#
DR-00
Control Word
DR-01
Reference [Unit]
DR-02
Reference %
0%
All set-ups
FALSE
-1
DR-03
Status Word
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
V2
DR-05
Main Actual Value [%]
0%
All set-ups
FALSE
-2
N2
DR-09
Custom Readout
0 CustomReadoutUnit
All set-ups
FALSE
-2
Int32
DR-1#
DR-10
Power [kW]
0 kW
All set-ups
FALSE
1
Int32
DR-11
Power [hp]
0 hp
All set-ups
FALSE
-2
Int32
DR-12
Motor Voltage
0V
All set-ups
FALSE
-1
Uint16
DR-13
Frequency
0 Hz
All set-ups
FALSE
-1
Uint16
DR-14
Motor current
0A
All set-ups
FALSE
-2
Int32
DR-15
Frequency [%]
0%
All set-ups
FALSE
-2
N2
DR-16
Torque [Nm]
0 Nm
All set-ups
FALSE
-1
Int16
DR-17
Speed [RPM]
0 RPM
All set-ups
FALSE
67
Int32
DR-18
Motor Thermal
0%
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint8
DR-19
KTY sensor temperature
0 °C
All set-ups
FALSE
100
Int16
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
Int16
DR-2#
DR-20
Motor Angle
DR-21
Torque [%] High Res.
0%
All set-ups
FALSE
-1
DR-22
Torque [%]
0%
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Int16
DR-25
Torque [Nm] High
0 Nm
All set-ups
FALSE
-1
Int32
DC Link Voltage
0V
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
DR-32
Brake Energy /s
0 kW
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint32
DR-33
Brake Energy /2 min
0 kW
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint32
DR-34
Heatsink Temp.
0 °C
All set-ups
FALSE
100
Uint8
DR-35
Drive Thermal
0%
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint8
DR-3#
DR-30
DR-36
Drive Nominal Current
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
-2
Uint32
DR-37
Drive Max. Current
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
-2
Uint32
DR-38
Logic Controller State
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint8
DR-39
Control Card Temp.
0 °C
All set-ups
FALSE
100
Uint8
DR-40
Trending Buffer Full
[0] No
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
DR-41
Keypad Bottom Statusline
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
VisStr[50]
DR-48
Speed Ref. After Ramp [RPM]
0 RPM
All set-ups
FALSE
67
Int32
DR-4#
156
DET-618C
Parameter Lists
Par. No.
#
Parameter description
DR-49
Current Fault Source
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion
index
Type
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
DR-5#
DR-50
External Reference
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
-1
Int16
DR-51
Pulse Reference
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
-1
Int16
DR-52
Feedback[Unit]
0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Int32
DR-53
Digi Pot Reference
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
-2
Int16
DR-57
Feedback [RPM]
0 RPM
All set-ups
FALSE
67
Int32
4 4
DR-6#
DR-60
Digital Input
DR-61
Terminal 53 Switch Setting
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
[0] Current
All set-ups
FALSE
-
DR-62
Analog Input 53
Uint8
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
DR-63
Terminal 54 Switch Setting
Int32
[0] Current
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
DR-64
Analog Input 54
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Int32
DR-65
Analog Output 42 [mA]
0 N/A
DR-66
Digital Output [bin]
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Int16
All set-ups
FALSE
0
DR-67
Freq. Input #29 [Hz]
0 N/A
Int16
All set-ups
FALSE
0
DR-68
Freq. Input #33 [Hz]
Int32
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
DR-69
Pulse Output #27 [Hz]
Int32
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Int32
DR-7#
DR-70
Pulse Output #29 [Hz]
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Int32
DR-71
Relay Output [bin]
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Int16
DR-72
Counter A
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Int32
DR-73
Counter B
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Int32
DR-74
Prec. Stop Counter
0 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint32
DR-75
Analog In X30/11
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Int32
DR-76
Analog In X30/12
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Int32
DR-77
Analog Out X30/8 [mA]
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
-3
Int16
DR-8#
DR-80
Fieldbus CTW 1
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
V2
DR-82
Fieldbus REF 1
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
N2
DR-84
Comm. Option STW
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
V2
DR-85
Drive Port CTW 1
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
V2
DR-86
Drive Port REF 1
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
N2
DR-87
Bus Readout Alarm/Warning
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
DR-90
Alarm Word
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint32
DR-91
Alarm Word 2
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint32
DR-92
Warning Word
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint32
DR-93
Warning Word 2
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint32
DR-94
Ext. Status Word
0 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint32
DR-9#
DET-618C
157
4 4
Parameter Lists
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
4.1.18 LC-## Logic Controller
Par. No.
#
Parameter description
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion
index
Type
LC-0#
LC-00
Logic Controller Mode
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
LC-01
Start Event
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
LC-02
Stop Event
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
LC-03
Reset Logic Controller
Controller
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
LC-10
Comparator Operand
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
LC-11
Comparator Operator
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
LC-12
Comparator Value
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
LC-15
RS-FF Operand S
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
LC-16
RS-FF Operand R
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
Logic Controller Timer
ExpressionLimit
1 set-up
TRUE
-3
TimD
Logic Rule Boolean 1
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
LC-41
Logic Rule Operator 1
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
LC-42
Logic Rule Boolean 2
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
LC-43
Logic Rule Operator 2
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
LC-44
Logic Rule Boolean 3
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
LC-51
Logic Controller Event
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
LC-52
Logic Controller Action
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
[0] Do not reset Logic
LC-1#
LC-2#
LC-20
LC-4#
LC-40
LC-5#
158
DET-618C
Parameter Lists
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
4.1.19 B-## Braking Functions
Par. No.
#
Parameter description
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion
index
Type
B-0#
B-00
DC Hold Current
50 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
B-01
DC Brake Current
50 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
B-02
DC Braking Time
10 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
B-03
DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM]
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
B-04
DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz]
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
B-05
Maximum Reference
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Int32
B-06
Parking Current
50 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
B-07
Parking Time
3s
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
B-1#
B-10
Brake Function
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
B-11
Brake Resistor (ohm)
ExpressionLimit
1 set-up
TRUE
-2
Uint32
B-12
Brake Power Limit (kW)
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint32
B-13
Braking Thermal Overload
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
B-15
Brake Check
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
B-16
AC brake Max. Current
B-17
Over-voltage Control
B-18
Brake Check Condition
B-19
Over-voltage Gain
100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint32
[0] Disabled
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
[0] At Power Up
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
B-2#
B-20
Release Brake Current
B-21
Activate Brake Speed [RPM]
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
B-22
Activate Brake Speed [Hz]
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
Uint8
B-23
Activate Brake Delay
0s
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
B-24
Stop Delay
0s
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint8
B-25
Brake Release Time
0.20 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
B-26
Torque Ref
0%
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Int16
B-27
Torque Ramp Time
0.2 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint8
B-28
Gain Boost Factor
1 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
DET-618C
159
4 4
4 4
Parameter Lists
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
4.1.20 PI-## PID Controls
Par. No.
#
Parameter description
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
PI-00
Speed PID Feedback Source
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
PI-02
Speed PID Proportional Gain
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-4
Uint32
PI-03
Speed PID Integral Time
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-4
Uint32
PI-04
Speed PID Differentiation Time
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-4
Uint16
PI-05
Speed PID Diff. Gain Limit
5 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
PI-06
Speed PID Lowpass Filter Time
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-4
Uint16
PI-07
Speed PID Feedback Gear Ratio
1 N/A
All set-ups
FALSE
-4
Uint32
PI-08
Speed PID Feed Forward Factor
0%
All set-ups
FALSE
0
Uint16
PI-09
Speed PID Error Correction w/ Ramp
300 RPM
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint32
Conversion
index
Type
PI-0#
PI-1#
PI-12
Torque PI Proportional Gain
100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
PI-13
Torque PI Integration Time
0.020 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Uint16
PI-2#
PI-20
Process CL Feedback 1 Resource
[0] No function
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
PI-22
Process CL Feedback 2 Resource
[0] No function
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
Uint8
PI-3#
PI-30
Process PID Normal/ Inverse Control
[0] Normal
All set-ups
TRUE
-
PI-31
Process PID Anti Windup
[1] On
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
PI-32
Process PID Start Speed
0 RPM
All set-ups
TRUE
67
Uint16
PI-33
Process PID Proportional Gain
0.01 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
PI-34
Process PID Integral Time
10000 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
PI-35
Process PID Differentiation Time
0s
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
PI-36
Process PID Diff. Gain Limit
5 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
PI-38
Process PID Feed Forward Factor
0%
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint16
PI-39
On Reference Bandwidth
5%
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
Uint8
PI-4#
PI-40
Process PID I-part Reset
[0] No
All set-ups
TRUE
-
PI-41
Process PID Output Neg. Clamp
-100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Int16
PI-42
Process PID Output Pos. Clamp
100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Int16
PI-43
Process PID Gain Scale at Min. Ref.
100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Int16
PI-44
Process PID Gain Scale at Max. Ref.
100 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Int16
PI-45
Process PID Feed Fwd Resource
[0] No function
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
PI-46
Process PID Feed Fwd Normal/ Inv. Ctrl.
[0] Normal
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
PI-49
Process PID Output Normal/ Inv. Ctrl.
[0] Normal
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
PI-50
Process PID Extended PID
[1] Enabled
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
PI-51
Process PID Feed Fwd Gain
1 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
PI-52
Process PID Feed Fwd Ramp up
0.01 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
PI-53
Process PID Feed Fwd Ramp down
0.01 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint32
PI-56
Process PID Ref. Filter Time
0.001 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Uint16
PI-57
Process PID Fb. Filter Time
0.001 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Uint16
PI-5#
PI-6#
PI-60
Process PID Error
0%
All set-ups
FALSE
-1
Int16
PI-61
Process PID Output
0%
All set-ups
FALSE
-1
Int16
PI-62
Process PID Clamped Output
0%
All set-ups
FALSE
-1
Int16
PI-63
Process PID Gain Scaled Output
0%
All set-ups
FALSE
-1
Int16
160
DET-618C
Parameter Lists
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
4.1.21 SF-# Special Functions
Par. No.
#
Parameter description
Default value
4-set-up
Change
during
operation
Conversion
index
Type
SF-0#
SF-00
Wobble Mode
[0] Abs. Freq., Abs. Time
All set-ups
FALSE
-
Uint8
SF-01
Wobble Delta Frequency [Hz]
5 Hz
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint8
SF-02
Wobble Delta Frequency [%]
25 %
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
SF-03
Wobble Delta Freq. Scaling Resource
[0] No function
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
SF-04
Wobble Jump Frequency [Hz]
0 Hz
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint8
SF-05
Wobble Jump Frequency [%]
0%
All set-ups
TRUE
0
Uint8
SF-06
Wobble Jump Time
SF-07
Wobble Sequence Time
SF-08
Wobble Up/ Down Time
SF-09
Wobble Random Function
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Uint16
10 s
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
5s
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint16
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
Uint8
SF-1#
SF-10
Wobble Ratio
1 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
SF-11
Wobble Random Ratio Max.
10 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint8
SF-12
Wobble Random Ratio Min.
0.1 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint8
SF-19
Wobble Delta Freq. Scaled
0 Hz
All set-ups
FALSE
-1
Uint16
SF-2#
SF-20
High Starting Torque Time [s]
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint16
SF-21
High Starting Torque Current [%]
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-1
Uint32
SF-22
Locked Rotor Protection
[0] Off
All set-ups
TRUE
-
Uint8
SF-23
Locked Rotor Detection Time [s]
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
TRUE
-2
Uint8
0.100 N/A
All set-ups
TRUE
-3
Uint16
SF-8#
SF-84
Process PID Proportional Gain
DET-618C
161
4 4
5 5
Troubleshooting
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
5 Troubleshooting
If an alarm cannot be reset, the reason may be that its
cause has not been rectified, or the alarm is trip-locked
(see also Table 5.1).
5.1 Status Messages
5.1.1 Warnings/Alarm Messages
Alarms that are trip-locked offer additional protection,
meaning that the mains supply must be switched off
before the alarm can be reset. After being switched back
on, the frequency converter is no longer blocked and can
be reset as described above once the cause has been
rectified.
A warning or an alarm is signalled by the relevant LED on
the front of the frequency converter and indicated by a
code on the display.
A warning remains active until its cause is no longer
present. Under certain circumstances, operation of the
motor may still be continued. Warning messages may be
critical, but are not necessarily so.
Alarms that are not trip-locked can also be reset using the
automatic reset function in H-04 Auto-Reset (Times)
(Warning: automatic wake-up is possible!)
In the event of an alarm, the frequency converter trips.
Reset the alarm to resume operation once the cause has
been rectified.
If a warning or alarm is marked against a code in Table 5.1,
this means that either a warning occurs before an alarm,
or else that it is possible to specify whether a warning or
an alarm should be displayed for a given fault.
Three ways to reset:
• Press [Reset].
This is possible, for instance, in F-10 Electronic Overload.
After an alarm or trip, the motor carries on coasting, and
the alarm and warning flash. Once the problem has been
rectified, only the alarm continues flashing until the
frequency converter is reset.
• Via a digital input with the “Reset” function.
• Via serial communication/optional network.
NOTE
After a manual reset pressing [Reset], press [Auto ] to
restart the motor.
NOTE
No missing motor phase detection (numbers 30-32) and no
stall detection is active when P-20 Motor Construction is set
to [1] PM non salient SPM.
No.
Description
Warning
1
10 Volts low
X
2
Live zero error
(X)
Alarm/Trip
Alarm/Trip Lock
(X)
Parameter
Reference
AN-01 Live Zero
Timeout Function
3
No motor
(X)
4
Mains phase loss
(X)
H-80 Function at Stop
5
DC link voltage high
X
6
DC link voltage low
X
7
DC over-voltage
X
X
8
DC under voltage
X
X
9
Inverter overloaded
X
X
10
Motor Electronic OL over temperature
(X)
(X)
F-10 Electronic
11
Motor thermistor over temperature
(X)
(X)
F-10 Electronic
12
Torque limit
X
X
13
Over Current
X
X
14
Earth Fault
X
X
(X)
(X)
SP-12 Function at Line
Imbalance
Overload
Overload
162
DET-618C
X
Troubleshooting
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
No.
Description
Warning
Alarm/Trip
Alarm/Trip Lock
15
16
Hardware mismatch
X
X
Short Circuit
X
X
17
Control word time-out
20
Temp. Input Error
21
Param Error
23
Internal Fans
X
24
External Fans
X
25
Brake resistor short-circuited
X
26
Brake resistor power limit
(X)
(X)
(X)
Parameter
Reference
O-04 Control Word
Timeout Function
(X)
B-13 Braking Thermal
Overload
27
Brake chopper short-circuited
X
X
28
Brake check
(X)
(X)
29
Heatsink temp
X
X
X
30
Motor phase U missing
(X)
(X)
(X)
B-15 Brake Check
H-78 Missing Motor
Phase Function
31
Motor phase V missing
(X)
(X)
(X)
H-78 Missing Motor
32
Motor phase W missing
(X)
(X)
(X)
H-78 Missing Motor
33
Inrush Fault
X
X
34
Network communication fault
35
Option Fault
36
Mains failure
37
Phase imbalance
X
38
Internal Fault
X
X
39
Heatsink sensor
X
X
40
Overload of Digital Output Terminal 27
Phase Function
Phase Function
X
X
X
X
(X)
E-00 Digital I/O Mode,
E-51 Terminal 27 Mode
41
Overload of Digital Output Terminal 29
(X)
E-00 Digital I/O Mode,
E-52 Terminal 29 Mode
42
Ovrld X30/6-7
43
Ext. Supply (option)
45
Earth Fault 2
46
Pwr. card supply
47
24 V supply low
48
(X)
X
X
X
X
X
X
1.8 V supply low
X
X
49
Speed limit
X
50
Auto Tune calibration failed
X
51
Auto Tune check Unom and Inom
X
52
Auto Tune low Inom
X
53
Auto Tune motor too big
X
54
Auto Tune motor too small
X
55
Auto Tune parameter out of range
X
56
Auto Tune interrupted by user
X
57
Auto Tune time-out
58
Auto Tune internal fault
59
Current limit
X
61
Feedback Error
(X)
62
Output Frequency at Maximum Limit
X
X
H-36 Trip Speed Low
[RPM]
X
X
X
(X)
H-20 Motor Feedback
Loss Function
DET-618C
163
5 5
5 5
Troubleshooting
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
No.
Description
Warning
Alarm/Trip
Alarm/Trip Lock
64
Voltage Limit
X
65
Control Board Over-temperature
X
66
Heat sink Temperature Low
X
X
X
67
Option Module Configuration has Changed
X
69
Pwr. Card Temp
X
70
Illegal Drive configuration
75
Illegal Profile Sel.
76
Power Unit Setup
X
77
Reduced power mode
X
78
Tracking Error
(X)
79
Illegal PS config
X
80
Drive Restored to Factory Settings
X
81
CSIV corrupt
X
82
CSIV parameter error
X
83
Illegal Option Combination
X
88
Option Detection
X
91
Analog input 54 wrong settings
X
246
Pwr.card supply
250
New spare parts
251
New Type Code
Parameter
Reference
X
X
X
SP-59 Actual Number of
Inverter Units
(X)
H-24 Tracking Error
Function
X
S202
X
X
X
Table 5.1 Alarm/Warning Code List
or connected parts. A trip lock situation can only be reset
by a power cycling.
(X) Dependent on parameter
1) Cannot be Auto reset via H-04 Auto-Reset (Times)
A trip is the action following an alarm. The trip coasts the
motor and is reset by pressing [Reset] or by a digital input
(parameter group E-1# [1]). The origin event that caused
an alarm cannot damage the frequency converter or cause
dangerous conditions. A trip lock is an action when an
alarm occurs, which could damage the frequency converter
Bit
Hex
Dec
Alarm Word
Warning
yellow
Alarm
flashing red
Trip locked
yellow and red
Table 5.2 LED Indication
Alarm Word 2
Warning Word
Warning
Word 2
Extended
Status Word
Brake Check (W28)
reserved
Ramping
Pwr. Card Temp (W69)
reserved
Auto Tune Running
Earth Fault (W14)
reserved
Start CW/CCW
Ctrl.Card Temp (W65)
reserved
Slow Down
Alarm Word Extended Status Word
0
00000001
1
Brake Check (A28) ServiceTrip,
Read/Write
1
2
00000002
00000004
2
4
Pwr. Card Temp
ServiceTrip,
(A69)
(reserved)
Earth Fault (A14)
ServiceTrip,
Typecode/
Sparepart
3
4
5
00000008
00000010
00000020
8
16
32
Ctrl.Card Temp
ServiceTrip,
(A65)
(reserved)
Ctrl. Word TO
ServiceTrip,
(A17)
(reserved)
Ctrl. Word TO (W17)
Catch Up
Over Current
reserved
Over Current (W13)
reserved
Feedback High
reserved
Torque Limit (W12)
reserved
Feedback Low
(A13)
6
00000040
64
Torque Limit
(A12)
164
DET-618C
Troubleshooting
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
Bit
Hex
Dec
Alarm Word
Alarm Word 2
Warning Word
Warning
Word 2
Extended
Status Word
7
00000080
128
Motor Th Over
reserved
Motor Th Over (W11)
reserved
Output Current
reserved
Motor Electronic OL
reserved
Output Current Low
(A11)
8
00000100
256
Motor Electronic
High
OL Over (A10)
Over (W10)
9
00000200
512
Drive Overld. (A9) reserved
Drive Overld (W9)
10
00000400
1024
DC under Volt
DC under Volt (W8)
11
00000800
2048
DC over Volt (A7) reserved
DC over Volt (W7)
12
00001000
4096
Short Circuit
reserved
DC Voltage Low (W6)
Inrush Fault (A33) reserved
DC Voltage High (W5)
Braking
Mains ph. Loss
reserved
Mains ph. Loss (W4)
Out of Speed Range
reserved
No Motor (W3)
OVC Active
reserved
Live Zero Error (W2)
AC Brake
KTY error
10V Low (W1)
KTY Warn
Fans error
Brake Overload (W26)
Fans Warn Password Protection
reserved
Brake Resistor (W25)
reserved
reserved
Brake IGBT (W27)
reserved
reserved
Speed Limit (W49)
reserved
reserved
Network Fault (W34)
reserved
Unused
reserved
24V Supply Low (W47)
reserved
Unused
reserved
Mains Failure (W36)
reserved
Unused
reserved
Current Limit (W59)
reserved
Unused
reserved
Low Temp (W66)
reserved
Unused
reserved
reserved
Output Freq High
Output Freq Low
(A8)
Brake Check OK
reserved
Braking Max
(A16)
13
00002000
8192
14
00004000
16384
5 5
(A4)
15
00008000
32768
Auto Tune Not
OK
16
00010000
65536
Live Zero Error
(A2)
17
00020000
131072
Internal Fault
Password Timelock
(A38)
18
00040000
262144
Brake Overload
(A26)
19
00080000
524288
U phase Loss
(A30)
20
00100000
1048576
V phase Loss
(A31)
21
00200000
2097152
W phase Loss
(A32)
22
00400000
4194304
Network Fault
(A34)
23
00800000
8388608
24 V Supply Low
(A47)
24
01000000
16777216
Mains Failure
(A36)
25
02000000
33554432
1.8V Supply Low
26
04000000
67108864
Brake Resistor
(A48)
(A25)
27
08000000
134217728
Brake IGBT (A27)
reserved
Voltage Limit (W64)
reserved
Unused
28
10000000
268435456
Option Change
reserved
Encoder loss (W90)
reserved
Unused
(A67)
29
20000000
536870912
Drive Restored to Feedback Fault
Feedback Fault (W61,
factory
(A61, A90)
W90)
Safe Stop (A71)
Safe Stop (W68)
Unused
settings(A80)
30
40000000
1073741824
Safe Stop (A68)
Safe Stop
Unused
(W71)
31
80000000
2147483648
Mech. brake low
Dangerous
(A63)
Failure (A72)
Extended Status Word
Unused
Table 5.3 Description of Alarm Word, Warning Word and Extended Status Word
The alarm words, warning words and extended status
words can be read out via serial bus or optional network
for diagnostics. See also DR-94 Ext. Status Word.
DET-618C
165
5 5
Troubleshooting
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
WARNING 1, 10 Volts low
The control card voltage is below 10 V from terminal 50.
Remove some of the load from terminal 50, as the 10 V
supply is overloaded. Max. 15 mA or minimum 590 Ω.
Troubleshooting
Connect a brake resistor
Extend the ramp time
Change the ramp type
This condition can be caused by a short in a connected
potentiometer or improper wiring of the potentiometer.
Activate the functions in B-10 Brake Function
Increase SP-26 Trip Delay at Drive Fault
Troubleshooting
Remove the wiring from terminal 50. If the warning clears,
the problem is with the customer wiring. If the warning
does not clear, replace the control card.
WARNING/ALARM 2, Live zero error
This warning or alarm only appears if programmed by the
user in AN-01 Live Zero Timeout Function. The signal on one
of the analog inputs is less than 50% of the minimum
value programmed for that input. Broken wiring or faulty
device sending the signal can cause this condition.
Troubleshooting
Check connections on all the analog input
terminals. Control card terminals 53 and 54 for
signals, terminal 55 common. OPCGPIO terminals
11 and 12 for signals, terminal 10 common.
OPCAIO terminals 1, 3, 5 for signals, terminals 2,
4, 6 common).
Check that the frequency converter programming
and switch settings match the analog signal type.
Perform Input Terminal Signal Test.
WARNING/ALARM 3, No motor
No motor has been connected to the output of the
frequency converter.
WARNING/ALARM 4, Mains phase loss
A phase is missing on the supply side, or the mains
voltage imbalance is too high. This message also appears
for a fault in the input rectifier on the frequency converter.
Options are programmed at SP-12 Function at Line
Imbalance.
If the alarm/warning occurs during a power sag
the solution is to use kinetic back-up (SP-10 Line
failure)
WARNING/ALARM 8, DC under voltage
If the intermediate circuit voltage (DC link) drops below
the under voltage limit, the frequency converter checks if a
24 V DC backup supply is connected. If no 24 V DC backup
supply is connected, the frequency converter trips after a
fixed time delay. The time delay varies with unit size.
Troubleshooting
Check that the supply voltage matches the
frequency converter voltage.
Perform input voltage test.
Perform soft charge circuit test.
WARNING/ALARM 9, Inverter overload
The frequency converter is about to cut out because of an
overload (too high current for too long). The counter for
electronic, thermal inverter protection issues a warning at
98% and trips at 100%, while giving an alarm. The
frequency converter cannot be reset until the counter is
below 90%.
The fault is that the frequency converter has run with
more than 100% overload for too long.
Troubleshooting
Compare the output current shown on the
keypad with the frequency converter rated
current.
Compare the output current shown on the
keypad with measured motor current.
Display the Thermal Drive Load on the keypad
and monitor the value. When running above the
frequency converter continuous current rating,
the counter increases. When running below the
frequency converter continuous current rating,
the counter decreases.
Troubleshooting
Check the supply voltage and supply currents to the
frequency converter.
WARNING 5, DC link voltage high
The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is higher than the
high voltage warning limit. The limit is dependent on the
frequency converter voltage rating. The unit is still active.
WARNING 6, DC link voltage low
The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is lower than the low
voltage warning limit. The limit is dependent on the
frequency converter voltage rating. The unit is still active.
WARNING/ALARM 7, DC overvoltage
If the intermediate circuit voltage exceeds the limit, the
frequency converter trips after a time.
166
WARNING/ALARM 10, Motor overload temperature
According to the electronic thermal protection, the motor
is too hot. Select whether the frequency converter issues a
warning or an alarm when the counter reaches 100% in
F-10 Electronic Overload. The fault occurs when the motor
runs with more than 100% overload for too long.
Troubleshooting
Check for motor overheating.
Check if the motor is mechanically overloaded
DET-618C
Troubleshooting
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
Check that the motor current set in P-03 Motor
Current is correct.
If extended mechanical brake control is selected, trip can
be reset externally.
Ensure that Motor data in parameters P-02, P-03,
P-06, P-07, F-04 and F-05 are set correctly.
If an external fan is in use, check in F-11 Motor
External Fan that it is selected.
Running Auto tune in P-04 Auto Tune tunes the
frequency converter to the motor more
accurately and reduces thermal loading.
WARNING/ALARM 11, Motor thermistor over temp
Check whether the thermistor is disconnected. Select
whether the frequency converter issues a warning or an
alarm in F-10 Electronic Overload.
Troubleshooting
Remove power and check if the motor shaft can
be turned.
Check that the motor size matches the frequency
converter.
Check parameters P-02, P-03, P-06, P-07, F-04 and
F-05 for correct motor data.
ALARM 14, Earth (ground) fault
There is current from the output phases to earth, either in
the cable between the frequency converter and the motor
or in the motor itself.
Troubleshooting:
Remove power to the frequency converter and
repair the earth fault.
Troubleshooting
Check for motor overheating.
Check if the motor is mechanically overloaded.
When using terminal 53 or 54, check that the
thermistor is connected correctly between either
terminal 53 or 54 (analog voltage input) and
terminal 50 (+10 V supply). Also check that the
terminal switch for 53 or 54 is set for voltage.
Check F-12 Motor Thermistor Input selects terminal
53 or 54.
When using digital inputs 18 or 19, check that
the thermistor is connected correctly between
either terminal 18 or 19 (digital input PNP only)
and terminal 50. Check F-12 Motor Thermistor
Input selects terminal 18 or 19.
Check for earth faults in the motor by measuring
the resistance to ground of the motor leads and
the motor with a megohmmeter.
ALARM 15, Hardware mismatch
A fitted option is not operational with the present control
board hardware or software.
Record the value of the following parameters and contact
your GE supplier:
ID-40 Drive Type
ID-41 Power Section
ID-42 Voltage
ID-43 Software Version
WARNING/ALARM 12, Torque limit
The torque has exceeded the value in F-40 Torque Limiter
(Driving) or the value in F-41 Torque Limiter (Braking).
SP-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit can change this from a
warning only condition to a warning followed by an alarm.
ID-45 Actual Typecode String
ID-49 SW ID Control Card
ID-50 SW ID Power Card
ID-60 Option Mounted
ID-61 Option SW Version (for each option slot)
Troubleshooting
If the motor torque limit is exceeded during
ramp, extend the ramp time.
ALARM 16, Short circuit
There is short-circuiting in the motor or motor wiring.
If the generator torque limit is exceeded during
ramp, extend the ramp time.
Remove power to the frequency converter and repair the
short circuit.
If torque limit occurs while running, possibly
increase the torque limit. Make sure that the
system can operate safely at a higher torque.
WARNING/ALARM 17, Control word timeout
There is no communication to the frequency converter.
The warning is only active when O-04 Control Word
Timeout Function is NOT set to [0] Off.
If O-04 Control Word Timeout Function is set to [5] Stop and
Trip, a warning appears and the frequency converter ramps
down until it stops then displays an alarm.
Check the application for excessive current draw
on the motor.
WARNING/ALARM 13, Over current
The inverter peak current limit (approximately 200% of the
rated current) is exceeded. The warning lasts about 1.5 s,
then the frequency converter trips and issues an alarm.
This fault can be caused by shock loading or quick
acceleration with high inertia loads. It can also appear after
kinetic back-up if the acceleration during ramp up is quick.
DET-618C
Troubleshooting
Check connections on the serial communication
cable.
Increase O-03 Control Word Timeout Time
167
5 5
5 5
Troubleshooting
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
Check the operation of the communication
equipment.
Verify a proper installation based on EMC
requirements.
WARNING/ALARM 20, Temp. input error
The temperature sensor is not connected.
WARNING/ALARM 21, Parameter error
The parameter is out of range. The parameter number is
reported in the keypad. The affected parameter must be
set to a valid value.
WARNING/ALARM 22, Hoist mechanical brake
Report value shows what kind it is.
0 = The torque ref. was not reached before timeout.
1 = There was no brake feedback before timeout.
WARNING 23, Internal fan fault
The fan warning function is an extra protective function
that checks if the fan is running/mounted. The fan warning
can be disabled in SP-53 Fan Monitor ([0] Disabled).
Troubleshooting
Check for proper fan operation.
Cycle power to the frequency converter and
check that the fan operates briefly at start-up.
Check the sensors on the heatsink and control
card.
WARNING 24, External fan fault
The fan warning function is an extra protective function
that checks if the fan is running/mounted. The fan warning
can be disabled in SP-53 Fan Monitor ([0] Disabled).
WARNING/ALARM 27, Brake chopper fault
The brake transistor is monitored during operation and if a
short circuit occurs, the brake function is disabled and a
warning is issued. The frequency converter is still
operational but, since the brake transistor has shortcircuited, substantial power is transmitted to the brake
resistor, even if it is inactive.
Remove power to the frequency converter and remove the
brake resistor.
High power drives: This alarm/warning could also occurs
should the brake resistor overheat. Terminals 104 to 106 of
FK102 are available as brake resistor temperature switch on
the power card of high power drives. Unless used as an
input, a jumper must be placed between terminals 104
and 106 of FK102.
WARNING/ALARM 28, Brake check failed
The brake resistor is not connected or not working.
Check B-15 Brake Check.
ALARM 29, Heatsink temp
The maximum temperature of the heatsink has been
exceeded. The temperature fault will not reset until the
temperature falls below a defined heatsink temperature.
The trip and reset points are different based on the
frequency converter power size.
Troubleshooting
Check for the following conditions.
Ambient temperature too high.
Motor cable too long.
Incorrect airflow clearance above and below the
frequency converter.
Troubleshooting
Check for proper fan operation.
Blocked airflow around the frequency converter.
Damaged heatsink fan.
Cycle power to the frequency converter and
check that the fan operates briefly at start-up.
Check the sensors on the heatsink and control
card.
WARNING 25, Brake resistor short circuit
The brake resistor is monitored during operation. If a short
circuit occurs, the brake function is disabled and the
warning appears. The frequency converter is still
operational but without the brake function. Remove power
to the frequency converter and replace the brake resistor
(see B-15 Brake Check).
WARNING/ALARM 26, Brake resistor power limit
The power transmitted to the brake resistor is calculated as
a mean value over the last 120 seconds of run time. The
calculation is based on the intermediate circuit voltage and
the brake resistance value set in B-16 AC brake Max.
Current. The warning is active when the dissipated braking
is higher than 90% of the brake resistance power. If [2] Trip
is selected in B-13 Braking Thermal Overload, the frequency
converter trips when the dissipated braking power reaches
100%.
168
Dirty heatsink.
ALARM 30, Motor phase U missing
Motor phase U between the frequency converter and the
motor is missing.
Remove power from the frequency converter and check
motor phase U.
ALARM 31, Motor phase V missing
Motor phase V between the frequency converter and the
motor is missing.
Remove power from the frequency converter and check
motor phase V.
ALARM 32, Motor phase W missing
Motor phase W between the frequency converter and the
motor is missing.
Remove power from the frequency converter and check
motor phase W.
ALARM 33, Inrush fault
Too many power-ups have occurred within a short time
period. Let the unit cool to operating temperature.
DET-618C
Troubleshooting
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
WARNING/ALARM 34, Fieldbus communication fault
The network on the communication option card is not
working.
ALARM 39, Heatsink sensor
No feedback from the heatsink temperature sensor.
WARNING/ALARM 35, Option faultOut of frequency range
An option alarm is received. The alarm is option-specific.
The most likely cause is a power-up or a communication
fault.
WARNING/ALARM 36, Mains failure
This warning/alarm is only active if the supply voltage to
the frequency converter is lost and SP-10 Line failure is NOT
set to [0] No Function. Check the fuses to the frequency
converter and mains power supply to the unit.
ALARM 37, Phase imbalance
There is a current imbalance between the power units
ALARM 38, Internal fault
When an internal fault occurs, a code number defined in
Table 5.4 is displayed.
Troubleshooting
Cycle power
Check for loose or missing wiring
It may be necessary to contact your GE supplier or service
department. Note the code number for further troubleshooting directions.
0
Text
Serial port cannot be restore. Contact your GE
supplier or GE Service Department.
256-258
783
Internal fault. Contact your GE supplier or GE
Parameter value outside of min/max limits
Service Department.
Option SW in slot A is too old
1300
Option SW in slot B is too old
1315
Option SW in slot A is not supported (not allowed)
1316
Option SW in slot B is not supported (not allowed)
1379-2819
ALARM 45, Earth fault 2
Earth (ground) fault on start-up.
Troubleshooting
Check for proper earthing (grounding) and loose
connections.
ALARM 46, Power card supply
The supply on the power card is out of range.
Internal fault. Contact your GE supplier or the GE
1299
WARNING 42, Overload of digital output on X30/6 or
overload of digital output on X30/7
For X30/6, check the load connected to X30/6 or remove
the short-circuit connection. Check E-56 Term X30/6 Digi
Out (OPCGPIO).
Check motor cables for short-circuits or leakage
currents.
Service Department.
1024-1284
WARNING 41, Overload of digital output terminal 29
Check the load connected to terminal 29 or remove shortcircuit connection. Check E-00 Digital I/O Mode and
E-52 Terminal 29 Mode.
Check for proper wire size.
Power EEPROM data is defective or too old.
Replace power card.
512-519
WARNING 40, Overload of digital output terminal 27
Check the load connected to terminal 27 or remove shortcircuit connection. Check E-00 Digital I/O Mode and
E-51 Terminal 27 Mode.
For X30/7, check the load connected to X30/7 or remove
the short-circuit connection. Check E-57 Term X30/7 Digi
Out (OPCGPIO).
Check that the option is properly installed
No.
The signal from the IGBT thermal sensor is not available on
the power card. The problem could be on the power card,
on the gate drive card, or the ribbon cable between the
power card and gate drive card.
Internal fault. Contact your GE supplier or GE
There are three power supplies generated by the switch
mode power supply (SMPS) on the power card: 24 V, 5 V,
±18 V. When powered with three phase mains voltage, all
three supplies are monitored.
Troubleshooting
Check for a defective power card.
Check for a defective control card.
Service Department.
Replace control card
Check for a defective option card.
2820
Keypad stack overflow
2821
Serial port overflow
If a 24 V DC power supply is used, verify proper
supply power.
2822
USB port overflow
2561
3072-5122
5123
WARNING 47, 24 V supply low
The 24 V DC is measured on the control card. The external
24 V DC backup power supply may be overloaded,
otherwise contact the GE supplier.
Parameter value is outside its limits
Option in slot A: Hardware incompatible with
control board hardware
5124
Option in slot B: Hardware incompatible with
WARNING 48, 1.8 V supply low
The 1.8 V DC supply used on the control card is outside of
allowable limits. The power supply is measured on the
control card. Check for a defective control card. If an
option card is present, check for an overvoltage condition.
control board hardware
5376-6231
Internal fault. Contact your GE supplier or GE
Service Department.
Table 5.4 Internal Fault Codes
DET-618C
169
5 5
5 5
Troubleshooting
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
WARNING 49, Speed limit
When the speed is not within the specified range in F-18
and F-17, the frequency converter shows a warning. When
the speed is below the specified limit in H-36 Trip Speed
Low [RPM] (except when starting or stopping) the
frequency converter will trip.
ALARM 50, Auto tune calibration failed
Contact your GE supplier or GE Service Department.
ALARM 51, Auto tune check Unom and Inom
The settings for motor voltage, motor current and motor
power are wrong. Check the settings in parameters P-02,
P-03, P-06, P-07, F-04 and F-05.
ALARM 52, Auto tune low Inom
The motor current is too low. Check the settings.
ALARM 53, Auto tune motor too big
The motor is too big for the Auto tune to operate.
ALARM 54, Auto tune motor too small
The motor is too small for the Auto tune to operate.
ALARM 55, Auto tune parameter out of range
The parameter values of the motor are outside of the
acceptable range. Auto tune will not run.
ALARM 56, Auto tune interrupted by user
The user has interrupted the Auto tune.
ALARM 57, Auto tune internal fault
Try to restart Auto tune again. Repeated restarts can over
heat the motor.
ALARM 58, Internal fault
Contact your GE supplier.
ALARM 63, Mechanical brake low
The actual motor current has not exceeded the “release
brake” current within the “Start delay” time window.
WARNING/ALARM 65, Control card over temperature
The cut-out temperature of the control card is 80 °C.
Troubleshooting
• Check that the ambient operating temperature is
within limits
•
•
•
Check for clogged filters
Check fan operation
Check the control card
WARNING 66, Heatsink temperature low
The frequency converter is too cold to operate. This
warning is based on the temperature sensor in the IGBT
module.
Increase the ambient temperature of the unit. Also, a
trickle amount of current can be supplied to the frequency
converter whenever the motor is stopped by setting
B-00 DC Hold Current at 5% and H-80 Function at Stop
ALARM 67, Option module configuration has changed
One or more options have either been added or removed
since the last power-down. Check that the configuration
change is intentional and reset the unit.
ALARM 69, Power card temperature
The temperature sensor on the power card is either too
hot or too cold.
Troubleshooting
Check that the ambient operating temperature is
within limits.
Check for clogged filters.
WARNING 59, Current limit
The current is higher than the value in F-43 Current Limit.
Ensure that Motor data in parameters P-02, P-03, P-06,
P-07, F-04 and F-05 are set correctly. Possibly increase the
current limit. Be sure that the system can operate safely at
a higher limit.
WARNING/ALARM 61, Feedback error
An error has been detected between calculated speed and
speed measurement from feedback device. The function
Warning/Alarm/Disabling setting is in H-20 Motor Feedback
Loss Function. Accepted error setting in H-21 Motor
Feedback Speed Error and the allowed time the error occur
setting in H-22 Motor Feedback Loss Timeout. During a
commissioning procedure the function may be effective.
WARNING 62, Output frequency at maximum limit
The output frequency has reached the value set in
F-03 Max Output Frequency 1. Check the application to
determine the cause. Possibly increase the output
frequency limit. Be sure the system can operate safely at a
higher output frequency. The warning will clear when the
output drops below the maximum limit.
170
Check fan operation.
Check the power card.
ALARM 70, Illegal drive configuration
The control card and power card are incompatible. Contact
your supplier with the model number of the unit from the
nameplate and the part numbers of the cards to check
compatibility.
WARNING 76, Safe stop auto restart
The required number of power units does not match the
detected number of active power units.
WARNING 77, Reduced power mode
This warning indicates that the frequency converter is
operating in reduced power mode (i.e. less than the
allowed number of inverter sections). This warning will be
generated on power cycle when the frequency converter is
set to run with fewer inverters and will remain on.
ALARM 78, Tracking error
The difference between set point value and actual value
has exceeded the value in H-25 Tracking Error. Disable the
function by H-24 Tracking Error Function or select an alarm/
warning also in H-24 Tracking Error Function. Investigate the
mechanics around the load and motor, Check feedback
DET-618C
Troubleshooting
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
connections from motor – encoder – to frequency
converter. Select motor feedback function in H-20 Motor
Feedback Loss Function. Adjust tracking error band in
H-25 Tracking Error and H-27 Tracking Error Ramping.
ALARM 79, Illegal power section configuration
The scaling card is the incorrect part number or not
installed. Also MK102 connector on the power card could
not be installed.
ALARM 80, Drive initialised to default value
Parameter settings are restored to factory settings after a
manual reset. Reset the unit to clear the alarm.
5 5
ALARM 83, Illegal option combination
The mounted options are not supported to work together.
WARNING 89, Mechanical brake sliding
The hoist brake monitor has detected a motor speed > 10
RPM.
ALARM 90, Feedback monitor
Check the connection to encoder/resolver option and
eventually replace the OPCENC or OPCRES.
WARNING/ALARM 104, Mixing fan fault
The fan monitor checks that the fan is spinning at powerup or whenever the mixing fan is turned on. If the fan is
not operating, then the fault is annunciated. The mixingfan fault can be configured as a warning or an alarm trip
by SP-53 Fan Monitor.
Troubleshooting Cycle power to the frequency converter
to determine if the warning/alarm returns.
ALARM 246, Power card supply
This alarm is only for 6x unit size frequency converters. It is
equivalent to Alarm 46. The report value in the alarm log
indicates which power module generated the alarm:
1 = left most inverter module.
2 = middle inverter module in 62 or 64 frequency
converter.
2 = right inverter module in 61 or 63 frequency
converter.
3 = right inverter module in 62 or 64 frequency
converter.
5 = rectifier module.
WARNING 250, New spare part
A component in the frequency converter has been
replaced. Reset the frequency converter for normal
operation.
WARNING 251, New typecode
The power card or other components have been replaced
and the typecode changed. Reset to remove the warning
and resume normal operation.
DET-618C
171
Index
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
Index
Freeze Output.......................................................................................... 4
Fuses....................................................................................................... 169
A
Adv. Start Adjust, SF-2#.................................................................... 140
G
Advanced Vector Control..................................................................... 5
Graphical Display.................................................................................. 13
Alarm
Messages.......................................................................................... 162
Word..................................................................................................... 87
I
Analog
Input................................................................................................... 166
Inputs...................................................................................................... 5
Signal................................................................................................. 166
IGMP........................................................................................................ 104
Indexed Parameters............................................................................. 21
Indicator Lights..................................................................................... 14
Input Terminal..................................................................................... 166
Auto Tune............................................................................................. 170
J
B
Jog................................................................................................................ 4
Braking................................................................................................... 168
Break-away Torque................................................................................. 5
K
Keypad....................................................................................... 6, 0
, 16
C
Cabling................................................................................................... 104
L
Catch Up.................................................................................................. 44
LEDs........................................................................................................... 13
Change-Of-State................................................................................. 104
Local
Control Keys......................................................................................... 1
Reference............................................................................................ 24
Clockwise................................................................................................. 37
Coasting.............................................................................................. 4, 15
Communication Option................................................................... 169
Configuration............................................................................... 86, 103
Control
Cables................................................................................................... 10
Card.................................................................................................... 166
Principle............................................................................................... 63
Cooling..................................................................................................... 35
Current Rating..................................................................................... 166
D
M
Main
Menu..................................................................................................... 17
Menu Mode................................................................................. 14, 20
Reactance........................................................................................... 56
Mains Supply............................................................................................ 6
Motor
Current.............................................................................................. 170
Data........................................................................................... 167, 170
Power................................................................................................. 170
Protection........................................................................................... 33
DC Link................................................................................................... 166
Default Settings.............................................................................. 1, 141
N
Digital Input......................................................................................... 167
Network..................................................................... 102, 103, 104, 105
Display
Line 2 Large........................................................................................ 28
Mode..................................................................................................... 16
O
E
Electronic Thermal Overload......................................................... 114
Operating Mode.................................................................................... 24
Output
Current.............................................................................................. 166
Speed.................................................................................................... 37
Ethernet....................................................................................... 102, 104
Ethernet/IP............................................................................................ 103
P
P-3# Adv. Motor Data.......................................................................... 58
F
Feedback............................................................................................... 169
Forward Open..................................................................................... 104
172
Parameter
Selection.............................................................................................. 20
Set-Up.................................................................................................. 17
Phase Loss............................................................................................. 166
DET-618C
Index
AF-650 GP Programming Guide
Potentiometer Reference.................................................................. 11
Programming...................................................................................... 166
W
Protection Mode..................................................................................... 8
Warning Word........................................................................................ 87
Pulse Start/Stop..................................................................................... 11
Warnings............................................................................................... 162
Q
Quick
Menu.............................................................................................. 14, 18
Menu Mode................................................................................. 14, 17
Transfer Of Parameter Settings Between Multiple Frequency Converters...... 16
R
Rated Motor Speed................................................................................ 4
RCD............................................................................................................... 6
Reference.............................................................................................. 103
Relay Outputs........................................................................................ 46
Reset....................................................................................... 166, 171, 15
S
Safety Precautions.................................................................................. 7
Screened/armoured............................................................................ 10
Serial Communication........................................................................... 5
Short Circuit......................................................................................... 167
Speed Up/Down................................................................................... 11
Start
Delay..................................................................................................... 37
Function.............................................................................................. 37
Start/Stop................................................................................................ 10
Stator Leakage Reactance................................................................. 56
Status
Status.................................................................................................... 14
Messages............................................................................................. 13
Step-by-Step.......................................................................................... 21
Supply Voltage.................................................................................... 169
Symbols...................................................................................................... 4
Synchronous Motor Speed.................................................................. 5
T
Thermal Load................................................................................ 65, 114
Thermistor.......................................................................................... 33, 6
V
Value.......................................................................................................... 21
Voltage
Imbalance......................................................................................... 166
Reference Via A Potentiometer................................................... 11
DET-618C
173
GE
AF-650 GPTM
General Purpose Drive
Programming Guide
The instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor to provide for every possible
contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be
desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, the
matter should be referred to the GE company.
AF-650 GP is a trademark of the General Electric Company.
GE
41 Woodford Avenue
Plainville, CT 06062
www.geelectrical.com/drives
130R0361
*MG34H302*
DET-618C